Home

R&S®FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual

1. 265 SOURce EXTerrnal FREQUeROy cett ert tie remp d exe E EA n EX rd RE TETEE SOURce EXTernal FREQuency COUPling S TATe rentre trn nne thin SOURce EXTernal FREQuency OFFSet sees SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator sess nennen SOURCE EX Temal delight SOURce EXTernial ROSCiIllator SOU RCe 2 eet rr rrr th nr rer re re ri reggae SOURGce EXTetnal S TAT6e iiie inttr erro terre E e e e Fere oc E a ra en EE ree ERE re Eras goes SOURce POWer LEEVel IMMediate OFFS Efisiensi rne parre tt tp neo oer renun STATus QUEStionable DIQ CON DItiOr or rto rone treat rt tenen an 368 STATUs QUEStionable DIQ ENABIG e tr co iar cert ee eret Ec rH EDU ze ap E p E das 368 STATus QUEStionable DIO NTRAFHSILOT na ctt conceal consarsqunevnceneasicesiersdeneonatv coneeatens ROESER En 368 STATus QUEStioniable DIQ PTEansitlOni eret tr ttt rrt ent rng ene een a 369 STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt STATuUS QUEStionable SYNG GONDIION NEE STATUus QUEStionable SYNGC ENABIO 2 eite tot tb ec nene pb Dg cate ce d dte ere ve eed 365 STATus QUEStionable S YNC NTRariitiOn rotor rt teeth treo rere rrr o tieu 365 HE A QUEStionable de an E e DE 366 STATus QUEStionable SYNCO EVENI J critt trie ete vr nete rtp ee gat 366 SYSTem COMMunicate
2. 48 e Average Power Copnsumpton ennemis 49 5 3 1 Analog Baseband Input 50 Q Connectors optional The Analog Baseband Interface option provides four BASEBAND INPUT BNC connec tors on the front panel of the R amp S FSW for analog and Q signals R amp S FSW85 two connectors o e Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface BASEBAND INP NPUT 50 The upper BNC connectors BASEBAND INPUT and BASEBAND INPUT Q are used to input single ended signals the positive signal input for differential signals as well as input from active Rohde amp Schwarz probes R amp S RT ZSxx and differential probes RT ZDxx The lower BNC connectors I and Q are used to input the negative signal for differential signals R amp S FSW85 The R amp S FSW85 provides only two connectors differential input is not supported Complex signal input I jQ For complex signal input I jQ always use two identical cables for the and Q con nectors same length same type same manufacturer Otherwise time delay or gain imbalance may occur between the different cables which cannot be calibrated All connectors have a fixed impedance of 50 O and may receive a maximum input level of 4 V each Risk of instrument damage Do not overload the BASEBAND INPUT connectors An input voltage of 4 V must never be exceeded Noncompliance will destroy the Analog Baseband Interface com ponents The device that prov
3. 166 Relationship to sample rate sssssssss 27 Ref Level hardware setting Ref EvI S MLV oeni anaa aaa REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ eu ee 78 Reference frequency External generator ihossaan 66 121 Reference level Auto level EE Digital He E External generator External Mixer eerte tre xen zi 57 OTS M M Offset Power sensor POSION sts chiens Power SCNSOM PM EET 135 Setting to marker BI fe geg 145 146 149 150 Eco M 145 149 Reference line External Generator 2 rrt rers 70 Position external generator ssssssss 126 Shifting external generator 71 126 Value external generator 126 Reference ENEE 183 Reference trace External generator ee 69 70 Storing as transducer factor external generator 70 126 Reflection measurement External Generator 5 errem 65 Refreshing MSRA applications remote MSRT applications remote Remote commands Basics OM Syntax ertet ri enti pde 209 Boolean values 213 Capitalization 210 Character data 20213 Data blocks 214 Numeric values 212 Optional keywords Parameters Strings 214 NIC NP ee 211 Remote control eer m Repetition interval ve DORK CY p M aN Resampler Data proceSSing te
4. Parameters Name Generator name as string value RST SMUO02 Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN TYPE SMWO6 Selects SMWO6 as an external generator Manual operation See Generator Type on page 120 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRess Address Configures the TCP IP address for the external generator Parameters Address TCP IP address between 0 0 0 0 and 0 255 255 255 RST 0 0 0 0 Example SYST COMM TCP RDEV GEN ADDR 130 094 122 195 Manual operation See GPIB Address TCP IP Address on page 121 Source Calibration The following commands are required to activate the calibration functions of the exter nal tracking generator However they are only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 254 Configuring I Q Analyzer Measurements Remote commands exclusive to source calibration DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue cessere 257 SENSe CORRection COLLect AGQuUiF6 2 2 21 25 72 ordre ete exec scu ane eiae ies 257 SENSE ee ee EN DE 258 E Eeer EE 258 ISENSeTGORRScUon ES TA KEE 258 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerator 259 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant For external generator calibration measurements requires the o
5. esses 255 GvGTemCOMMunicate HR DEVice GENerator NTertace ennt 255 GvGTemCGOMMunicate HRDEVice GENeratorlINk esee 255 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE esas na sns shanas 256 Gv Tem CGOMMunicate TChip R DEVice GENeratorADDbess rer trerrrerrreeo 256 SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator SOURce Source This command controls selection of the reference oscillator for the external generator Configuring I Q Analyzer Measurements If the external reference oscillator is selected the reference signal must be connected to the rear panel of the instrument Parameters Source INTernal the internal reference is used EXTernal the external reference is used if none is available an error flag is displayed in the status bar RST INT Example SOUR EXT ROSC EXT Switches to external reference oscillator Manual operation See Reference on page 121 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RDEVice GENerator ADDRess Number Changes the IEC IEEE bus address of the external generator Parameters Number Range 0 to 30 RST 28 Example SYST COMM GPIB RDEV GEN ADDR 15 Manual operation See GPIB Address TCP IP Address on page 121 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTerface Type Defines the interface used for the connection to the external generator This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 254 Parameters Type
6. Ai Stat s registers oreet e rte 366 Digital Baseband Interface B17 Applications 5415 Description EC Stat s registers Joni eet e eret 364 Digital UO Bandwidth nne hee entretien tere 39 Connection information 144 Data PrOC SSING ctr tne nhe ESA 35 Enhanced mode 40 158 Full scale level ET 37 Input connection information ssssss 115 Input settings wee 114 Quitp t settings it reet erret te 142 Output settings information 143 Samlple Tates tette mee treten 39 TAGGEN WEE 37 158 Digital input ST Dt E 40 Connection information ve 115 Connection status 41 Digital Baseband Interface 96 Restrictions e 40 U nfilt ted rrr nt eene 40 Digital output Connection Status sssini isidis 41 Digital Baseband Interface Ol Ena blitrig mme 143 Processing 38 FRESEICHONS e e M 40 Direct path Input configuration alf D Display configuration forc 172 Drop out time vie EE 160 Trigger Power sensor eeeeesese 137 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 216 Duty cycle Power EE 136 E Edge gate deet GETING s ecce oie en cote ex ret bn b es ete stuns 296 Electronic input attenuation seeseeessssss 147 Enhanced mode Digital W O tire to rin ree nion 40 158 Equali
7. Manual operation See Write to lt CVL table name gt on page 108 See Bias on page 112 SENSe CORRection CVL CATAlog This command queries all available conversion loss tables saved in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory on the instrument This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Usage Query only SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr This command deletes the selected conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 245 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL CLE Usage Event Manual operation See Delete Table on page 110 SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent Text This command defines a comment for the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 245 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Text Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL COMM Conversion loss table for FS Zen Manual operation See Comment on page 112 Configuring I Q Analyzer Measurements SENSe CORRection CVL DATA lt Freq gt lt Level gt This command defines the
8. Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This example demonstrates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MATLAB o Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k f10at32 fwrite fid single imag iq k f10at32 end fclose fid List of Remote Commands UO Analyzer Q Input Interfaces B17 B71 SENSe WINDow n DE Tector t FUNCtion trino ntt rrt 328 IEN Ge Tu lNDow nz DE TecorztGlEUNGCHonl AUTO 329 SENSe ADJUSCE ALL rrr cte ceret ed de doe t E et e ee e EENEG SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation vo SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURaltion MODE eoe orti rrr teeth eg inodo ee E PER SENSe JADJust CONFigure HY S Tleresis EOW er recette anne t e n rer deus SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYS Teresis UPB er rrr rrr inttr nne rtr ih E Fe nnn SENSeADIJUSECONFIQUIO IIR Ge iniinis noira E pnt Spese SEE EEr ine Sk dees estan ue dee SENSe ADJust F REQUenOy eterne rte rr neni rrr repr cael Ve EEA ee S Erden es SENSE ADJUST LEV lcci M SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt SENSeJAVERAge lt n gt TYPE EE SENSe JAVER agesni P pSTATeSE cromo ETE er neret reta E ou ou E eR SENSe GOIRRection GOL ect AC QUIE cna tone eo ore tae uev Fg edu UY AEE AE OI E Ere canes
9. 23 Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input eere nnn 23 Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface 35 Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface 42 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output eeseeeeessses 50 UO Data Import and Export eeesseeeeseeeseeeeeeeeee nennen nennen nennen nennen 85 Basics OMP ET iie nei eit eee ne 86 UO Analyzer in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode een 92 Measurements in the Time and Frequency Domain eene 93 Configuratio e P 95 Configuration Overview eese nennen nnn nennen inne nnn nnns 95 Import Export FUNCOMS ipinnu reru une PRX RR uAR n pisD NEE AEN Zeg aa EAA Eaa aaae 97 Data Input and Output SettingS ccceceeseeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeseeaeeeseeeeeeeeeseeseeeeneaeeeeeeeees 98 PAUP UIC TEE 144 gl Ce Eed Le CT 153 Trigger Settings inei oon etie etes iicet ce ened uias tuus lived DUE ee eL ede 154 Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settings seeeeeeeneee 163 Display COnfiQguration TT 172 Adjusting Settings Automatically essere enne 172 Configuring an UO Analyzer as an MSRA MSRT Application 175 User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 3 R amp S
10. SENSe IQ BANDwidth BWIDth MODE Mode This command defines how the resolution bandwidth is determined Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters Mode AUTO MANual FFT AUTO Default The RBW is determined automatically depending on the sample rate and record length MANual The user defined RBW is used and the FFT window length and possibly the sample rate are adapted accordingly The RBW is defined using the SENSe IO BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution command FFT The RBW is determined by the FFT parameters RST AUTO Example IQ BAND MODE MAN Switches to manual RBW mode IQ BAND RES 120000 Sets the RBW to 120 kHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See RBW on page 167 SENSe IQ BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution Bandwidth This command defines the resolution bandwidth manually if SENSe 10 BANDwidth BWIDth MODE is set to MAN Defines the resolution bandwidth The available RBW values depend on the sample rate and record length For details see chapter 5 6 4 Frequency Resolution of FFT Results RBW on page 90 Parameters Bandwidth refer to data sheet RST RBW AUTO mode is used Example IQ BAND MODE MAN Switches to manual RBW mode IQ BAND RES 120000 Sets the RBW to 120 kHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See RBW on page 167 SENSe IQ FFT ALGorithm Method Defines the FFT calculation method Parameters Method Example
11. Usage Query only Retrieving UO Trace Data In addition to the raw captured UO data the results from UO analysis as shown in the result displays can also be retrieved Ge BE 356 FORMaECDEXPotrtDSEPaLalor ranae Cone Os enn eee rer qan RIO YR ENA ane hE 357 TRAC E E 357 RRE E Ee KREE 358 TEARS DDATAIDUR snail doc Diaper toco dors ub la Rd ud 359 FORMat DATA Format This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S FSW to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format Retrieving Results Parameters Format ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other for mats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format In the Spectrum application the format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of trace data For UO data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05
12. ku e Analysis interval Configuration MSRA remote 349 351 FICA qe iani 93 Cotifig ratiOni cocer re neri iniaa 193 Configuration MSRA remote 349 351 Applications l Q Analyzer remote ntes 214 APX External generator 2 etc ione 69 74 Att hardware setting nicessaria 13 fuarum 147 PENU Ta MR 147 Iioc 147 Manual Option Protective rem rennen et Pere 50 Protective remote 25e cometen 221 Audio signals Output remote ec niet 140 277 Auto adjustment Triggered measurement rre 310 Ee RUE 173 Auto frequeliey EE 173 Auto ID External MIKEN inrsin External Mixer Remote control Threshold External Mixer remote control 236 Threshold External Mixer sessssse 108 Auto level ek 174 Reference level 146 150 174 SOMRKCY sue e iecore eek ee e eye det 146 150 174 Auto settings Meastime Auto cn eer tnn een nr rte 174 Meastime Manual rre 174 Automatic coupling Frequencies external generator 72 123 AUX control TTL synchronization external generator 63 Average COUME EE 170 Power SONSOP eC 136 Average mode dr le EE 179 Averaging Traces remote control cea 328 B B2000 Activating Deactivat
13. Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd Q Data File Format iq tar Element Samples Description Contains the number of samples of the UO data For multi channel signals all chan nels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values e A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the UO data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the UO data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock fre quency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and Q values interleaved and Q are unitless real Real number unitless polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires D
14. Note on blocked remote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depend ing on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage Event SCPI confirmed INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using ABORt or finished in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INI Tiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments usin
15. 174 Upper Level KE 174 Lower Level Hyslieresis oe et E N Rande 174 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto AII Activates all automatic adjustment functions for the current measurement settings This includes Auto Frequency e Auto Level Note MSRA MSRT operating modes In MSRA MSRT operating mode this function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 308 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq The R amp S FSW adjusts the center frequency automatically The optimum center frequency is the frequency with the highest S N ratio in the fre quency span As this function uses the signal counter it is intended for use with sinus oidal signals This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 310 Adjusting Settings Automatically Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines a reference level which ensures that no overload occurs at the R amp S FSW for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the sig nal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression and clipping are minimized To determine the required reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S F
16. 25 39 V Video lu e e P 84 Video OUTPUT o eruta a 140 277 W Window functions GhalracteriStiGS 2 esee tici dee EET ers eegen Window title bar information Windows Adding remote 2 eaae ets 313 Closing remote ae eee 314 317 GONTIQUFING ites E eb tc aie 97 Layout remote 4 915 Maximizing remote 912 Querying remote 914 Replacing remote 315 Splitting remote we 912 Types remote ue nde er ep 313 X X value Manken ated enia tir ettet atv saan o deser etde copied ciu 183 Y Y axis fele 152 Scaling UO Vector 153 funere cC 151 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating eee 101 Activating Deactivating remote 223 Z Zeroing ower SENSON uecine t tree p Re REX eroe 134 Zoom limits USING for Searches eren eene 188 Zooming Activating d le 347 Area Multiple mode remote 948 Area remote 2 347 Deactivating 192 Multiple mode 192 Multiple mode remote 948 ie e 347 Restoring original display sess 192 Single mode Single mode remote
17. Calibrate Transmission remote control Normalize remote control esses Softkeys Amplitude Config EE 144 Auto TEE 173 fora 173 Auto Level 146 150 174 BB POWER suis nne eer ert t e p ERE 158 Capture Offset sissies sienas 169 Center Genter Mkr Freg iet tenen 189 Continue Single Sweep sse 172 Continuous Sweep iisen a aain 171 DIGI GON E 115 Digital e E 158 Display Config 172 Export 25 98 Stettin ea leh rece Rt He EPA Aes 156 Free RUFI EE 156 Frequency COMA 2 ico eoe pests 153 VO POWE pm 158 IF e 157 Import eoe na 98 Input Source Config 52 99 edel STEE 98 IG HE POM TEE 98 Lower Level Hysteresis A 174 Marker Config 181 184 Marker to Trace zeideg irikia AE 183 Meastime A lo ege ee e He des 174 Meastime Manual 5 rrr 174 MIT iere tege irn e ERE ee Yer vv cele viue RR 189 Id lm 189 Next Peak iiu ree cotes 189 Not Delta 22 5 n eire bet ege 183 Outputs CONTIG i t eei terrere een 139 Di CC CE 189 Eer S NSOF RPM ER 159 Power Sensor Coffig sek tree tene 132 ui Ref Level vii Ref Level Offset esses 145 149 ReEEVIE S A EE 190 Repetition interval erret ten 160 RE Atten AUtO iie eei edat eet tette eds 147 RF Atteri Manual teda enge 147 RE POWOE ele 159 Scale CONO x Lncret denen 151 Search Cohflgi 2 n rtr tte rete t cts
18. Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus QUEStionable DIQ register for IQ measurements Readout deletes the contents of the EVEN section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Example STAT QUES DIQ Usage Query only 10 11 Programming Examples The following programming examples demonstrate how to capture UO data and per form UO data analysis using the UO Analyzer in a remote environment Optional interfaces for UO data input are also demonstrated in the UO Analyzer e UO Analysis with Graphical Evaluatton 370 e Basic HO Analysis with Improved Performance cccscccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 371 e Data Acquisition via the Optional Digital Baseband Interface 372 e Converting an RF Signal to a Digital UO Signal via the Optional Digital Base
19. 137 Level Power SENSOR ertet tenens 136 rc D M 160 OUIDUE Zonge e 141 162 Power SCNSOF eere nter tec erneut 136 139 Remote Control rire ees 287 TE 162 292 Slope Power sensor sssssssseee 137 Widthi B2000 cc tir tt recht 80 Trigger level 160 External trigger remote A 290 UO Power remote A 291 IF Powertretrriote ne eite eet 290 RF Power remote edel 291 Trigger source 156 Analog Baseband s 45 BB POWOL nne erret i e p ER gae s 158 Digital I Q uis eerte aeai 37 158 S4 a che ivaa 156 External CHS E 157 Free RUM e 156 legc cS 158 IF POWT e 157 Power SONSOF icc ee teneri ne eA 159 FRE EE 159 EE 160 Troubleshooting VQ data acquisition oie ertet VO data OUIDUE EE Input overload Overload external generator TTL handshake see TTL synchronization sess 121 TTL synchronization AUX control external generator suuss 63 External generator sesssussss 63 73 121 U Units POWGEMSECNSOM sik calesnsccavencaccat cin 135 Reference level 145 146 149 150 Updating Result display remote AAA 350 Upper Level Hysteresis ient rint teres 174 Usable UO bandwidth b ifo ren zasini 25 39 User manuals 2 cath nente coe anb se n eda cra ch SNE 8 User sample rate bI ifo ro o p
20. 7 Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Set the frequency span Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements SENS FREQ STAR 10HZ SENS FREQ STOP 1MHZ Set the generator type to SMW06 with a frequency range of 100 kHz to 4GHz SYST COMM RDEV GEN TYPE SMWO06 Set the interface used to the GPIB address 28 SYST COMM RDEV GEN INT GPIB SYST COMM GPIB RDEV GEN ADDR 28 Activate the use of TTL synchronization to optimize measurement speed SYST COMM RDEV GEN LINK TTL Activate the use of the external reference frequency at 10 MHz on the generator SOUR EXT ROSC EXT Activate external generator control SOUR EXT STAT ON Set the generator output level to 10 dBm SOUR EXT POW 10DBM Set the frequency coupling to automatic SOUR EXT FREQ COUP STAT ON Define a series of frequencies one for each sweep point based on the current requency at the RF input of the analyzer the generator frequency is half the requency of the analyzer with an offset of 100 kHz analyzer start 10 Hz analyzer stop 1 MHz analyzer span 999 99 KHz generator frequency start 100 005 KHz generator frequency stop 600 KHz generator span 499 995 KHz SOUR EXT FREQ FACT NUM 1 SOUR EXT FREQ FACT DEN 2 SOUR EXT FREQ OFFS 100KHZ Perform a transmission measurement with direct connection between the generator and the analyzer and wait till the end SENS CORR METH TRAN SENS CO
21. For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 7 Analysis on page 177 Analysis functions exclusive to UO data WAC e EE 177 Marker USAGE D ean 181 POO FUNC MOS roc cte shectacnns tacet ee cevagecedeuaniuleceenxneasdadenyadeseadevauuedecerages 191 Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode 192 Trace Settings Access Overview gt Analysis gt Traces or TRACE gt Trace Config You can configure the settings for up to 6 individual traces For HO Vector evaluation mode only 1 trace is available and the detector is not edita ble vel iuo dBm J RBW e mni 10dB SWT 79 5ms VBW Mode Aut Traces Trace Data Export Copy Trace Trace Math Spectrogram Auto Type Hold State Value m e Auto Peak s La m cm Logarithmic amope E os Trace Settings Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace S Trace 6 eene 178 Trace TE 178 PCCM T 178 POl DEE 179 eet lee E 179 AV OTAGO MOUS 179 Predefined Trace Settings QUICK CONTIG eeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaaeeeteeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaas 180 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Ttace 4 Softkeys EE 180 eo 180 Trace 1 Trace 2
22. Full Scale Level 10 0 dBm dBm ence Level evel Yes IQR100 101165 V Digital IQ OUT Sample Rate 10 MHz Full Scale Level 10 dBm For more information see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Digital VQ Blue 114 lala DS 115 F l Scate LoVe PEE 115 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level nene 115 Connected Instrument acia eiecti gna reina ed sgg a esser aa PE eyed AEN 115 DIGON C 115 Digital UO Input State Enables or disable the use of the Digital IQ input source for measurements Digital IQ is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 224 Data Input and Output Settings Input Sample Rate Defines the sample rate of the digital UO signal source This sample rate must corre spond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator If Auto is selected the sample rate is adjusted automatically by the connected device The allowed range is from 100 Hz to 10 GHz Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 228 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO on page 228 Full Scale Level The Full Scale Level defines the level and unit that should correspond to an UO sam ple with the magnitude 1 If Auto is selected the level is automatically set to the value provided by the connec ted device Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 2
23. If the B2000 option is activated the basic IF OUT 2 GHZ output is automatically deacti vated It is not reactivated when the B2000 option is switched off For details see chapter 5 4 7 Basics on the 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 Option on page 76 Prerequisites Note the following prerequisites for output to the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector Instrument model R amp S FSW26 43 50 67 85 external mixers can be used e Zero span mode UO Analyzer or VSA R amp S FSW K70 application Center frequency 2 8 GHz e optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is not active UO Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase 1 and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as UO signals The complete modulation informa tion and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be analyzed in the UO baseband Importing and exporting UO signals is useful for various applications e Generating and saving UO signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in external software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FSW later e Capturing and saving UO signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to ana lyze them with the R amp S FSW or an external software tool later User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 85 d Basics on FFT For example you can capture UO data
24. In the default state the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW dBm Via the known input impedance 50 Q or 75 Q see Impedance on page 100 conversion to other units is possible The following units are available and directly convertible dBm dBmV dByV dBpA dBpW Volt Ampere Watt Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 223 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer on page 279 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines a reference level which ensures that no overload occurs at the R amp S FSW for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the sig nal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression and clipping are minimized To determine the required reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSW If necessary you can optimize the reference level further by manually decreasing the attenuation level to the lowest possible value before an overload occurs then decreas ing the reference level in the same way When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 the level measurement is performed on the connected oscilloscope Y axis scaling on the oscil loscope is limited to a minimum of 5mV per division R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Configuration You can change the measurement time for the level measureme
25. Sample rate exceeds limit of connec ted instrument on Digital UO OUT port e Reduce the sample rate Keyword FIFO OVLD The sample rate on the connected instrument is higher than the input sample rate setting on the R amp S FSW Reduce the sample rate on the connected instrument Increase the input sample rate setting on the R amp S FSW Error Messages Table 9 3 Errors using the optional Analog Baseband Interface and possible solutions Message Possible solutions Check Cable for High Accuracy Tim ing High Accuracy Timing inactive For R amp S FSW models with a serial number lower than 103000 only The preconditions required for High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF were not met Make sure the cable required for high accuracy timing is connected to trigger ports 1 and 2 Unless it is explicitely deactivated the high accuracy timing setting remains active The error message is cleared when one of the following occurs Analog Baseband input is deactivated see Analog Baseband Input State on page 117 e High accuracy timing is deactivated see High Accuracy Tim ing Trigger Baseband RF on page 117 e The cable was successfully detected Activation of High Accuracy Timing failed Table 9 4 Errors using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 and possible solu tions Message Possible solutions Unsupported capturing devic
26. The R amp S FSW UO Analyzer application is part of the standard base unit and requires no further installation The optional Digital Baseband Interface requires both hardware and firmware installa tion which is described in the release notes provided with the option at delivery 2 1 Starting the UO Analyzer Application The UO Analyzer is an application on the R amp S FSW To activate the UO Analyzer application 1 Select the MODE key A dialog box opens that contains all applications currently available on your R amp S FSW 2 Select the UO Analyzer item Lc ER IQ Analyzer Understanding the Display Information The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the I Q Analyzer applica tion The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the UO Analyzer Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu see chapter 6 1 Configura tion Overview on page 95 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application The same application can be acti vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the avail able memory on the instrument Only one measurement can be perfor
27. on page 47 The selected center frequency should also be selected such that the displayed spectrum remains within the maximum analysis bandwidth see chap ter 5 3 4 Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Analog Baseband signals on page 48 SO DW fo B 2 B 2 fe BW max 2 Fig 5 13 Spectrum in low IF mode Compared to the initial complex baseband signal that was input the down converted or Q component contains only half the spectrum i e one sideband less after passing the filter The power is thus reduced by one half or 3 dB This power loss is compen sated for by increasing the power of the resulting spectrum by 3 dB The digitized data is brought to the desired sample rate using a downsampling filter and fractional resampling This processing mode corresponds to the common RF spectrum analysis applied to the analog baseband input Real baseband mode I or Q only As mentioned above a center frequency of 0 Hz is not allowed for low IF mode In this case the input signal is assumed to be a real baseband signal so no down conversion is performed Thus this mode resembles an oscilloscope The spectrum result display always starts at 0 and has a maximum span of half the sample rate half of the cap tured samples are from the other component which is not displayed in this mode The Real Imag result display shows only one diagram namely the one for the selected component Processing Data From the Analog Baseband
28. 227 228 Unit digital UO remote A 228 G Gating VQ Gata sicci nro etian Pet eer dae 296 Slc 156 Generator Frequencies external generator Frequency coupling external generator Frequency offset external generator Output power external generator Generator type LEE iir er i tr 120 Generators Frequency range external generator 121 Power range external generator 121 Setup files external generator 68 120 121 Supported external generator ssssss 66 GPIB Address External generator sssssss 121 External generator m TTL synchronization External generator 121 Group delay S MOON asne EET 179 H Handover frequency External Mixer tite tette 54 105 External Mixer Remote control 237 Hardware settings Displayed eet eren ie p ede 13 Harmonics Conversion loss table ecrire ern External Mixer Remote control Hop Order External Mixer m Type External Mixer AA High pass filter Ee 223 iile cmo E 101 Hold Trace Seting ME 179 Hysteresis Lower A to level n eet es 174 Trigger s Trigger Power sensor diiine tienoin isian aia 137 Upper Auto level iiris 174 l UO Analyzer Dalla ACQU
29. Generator type TTL support Generator type TTL support SGS100A6 SMP03 X SGS100A12 SMP04 X SMAO1A X SMP22 X SMA100A3 X SMR20 1 Requires firmware version V2 10 x or higher on the signal generator 2 Requires firmware version V1 10 x or higher on the signal generator 3 Requires the option SMR B11 on the signal generator 4 Requires firmware version V3 20 200 or higher on the signal generator Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Generator type TTL support Generator type TTL support SMA100A6 X SMR20B11 3 X SMB100A1 X SMR27 X SMB100A12 X SMR27B11 X SMB100A2 X SMR30 X SMB100A20 X SMR30B11 3 X SMB100A3 X SMR40 X SMB100A40 X SMR40B11 3 X SMBV100A3 X SMR50 X SMBV100A6 X SMR50B11 X SMC100A1 SMR60 X SMC100A3 SMR60B11 3 X SME02 x SMT02 SME03 X SMTO03 SME06 X SMTO06 SMF100A X SMUO2 X SMF22 X SMUO2B31 X SMF22B2 X SMUO3 X SMF43 X SMUO3B31 X SMF43B2 x SMU04 X SMG SMUO4B31 X SMGL SMUO6 X SMGU z SMUO6B31 2 X SMH SMVO03 SMHU SMWO03 x SMIQO2 X SMWO06 xo SMIQO2B X SMW20 x SMIQO2E SMW40 x SMIQOS3 X SMX SMIQO3B X SMY01 1 Requires firmware version V2 10 x or higher on the signal generator 2 Requires firmware version V1 10 x or higher on the signal generator 3 Requires the option SMR B11 on the signal generator 4 Requires firmware version V3 20 200 or higher
30. Hides the marker information Manual operation See Marker Info on page 185 CALCulate n MARKer m X SSIZe lt StepSize gt This command selects the marker step size mode for all markers in all windows lt m gt lt n gt are irrelevant The step size defines the distance the marker moves when you move it with the rotary knob It therefore takes effect in manual operation only Parameters lt StepSize gt STANdard the marker moves from one pixel to the next POINts the marker moves from one sweep point to the next RST POINts Example CALC MARK X SSIZ STAN Sets the marker step size to one pixel Manual operation See Marker Stepsize on page 185 Configuring and Performing a Marker Search The following commands control the marker search CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzLOENcude eene nnne nn nass nnns 336 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCUrSION 00ccccceccceceececesssceceacececseeseseseececesesuseeeeaeees 337 CAL Culate nz M Abkercmz SEARG nes N sisse sisi asses sais 337 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm XS lMitslGTaATel eene 337 CAL Culate nz M Abkercmz XZ SGLIMeLEFT enenatis 338 GALCulatesn MARKersm X SLIMits RIGFIT rie cnet tane tdt ene eub AEN 338 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm XS lMits Z0OOMISTATel nennen 339 e e DIE En ET 339 er EE Ee LETTRE 339 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LOEXclude State This command turns the suppression of the local oscillator during automatic marker positioni
31. I Q Pro cessing Modes on page 46 In addition the channel bar also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though this is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values e g transducer or trigger settings This information is dis played only when applicable for the current measurement For details see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 3 Magnitude Fig 2 2 Window title bar information in the I Q Analyzer application 1 Window number 2 Window type 3 Trace color 4 Trace number 5 Detector 6 Trace mode Diagram footer information The information in the diagram footer beneath the diagram depends on the evalua tion e Center frequency e Number of sweep points e Range per division x axis Span Spectrum Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar For details see chapter 9 1 Error Messages on page 206 3 Typical Applications for the UO Analyzer and UO Input Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase I and the quadrature Q c
32. If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted 10 1 2 Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 210 10 1 3 10 1 4 10 1 5 Introduction The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets n next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suf
33. POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Manual operation See Exporting the Peak List on page 191 TRACe lt n gt DATA lt ResultType gt This command queries current trace data and measurement results The data format depends on FORMat DATA Query parameters lt ResultType gt Selects the type of result to be returned TRACE1 TRACE6 Returns the trace data for the corresponding trace Return values lt TraceData gt Example Usage Manual operation Retrieving Results Returns the sweep point values as shown in the result display If you are measuring with the auto peak detector the command returns positive peak values only To retrieve negative peak val ues define a second trace with a negative peak detector For the Magnitude and Spectrum result displays in the UO Ana lyzer application this command returns the magnitude of the and Q values I jQ for each sweep point 1001 values For the Real Imag I Q result display the command returns first the real parts for each trace point then the imaginary parts hong Du Don For the I Q Vector result display the and Q values for each trace point are returned 1001 pairs of and Q values For analog baseband input in real baseband processing mode I or Q only only the positive sp
34. Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Manual operation See New Table on page 109 See Edit Table on page 109 See File Name on page 111 SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber lt SerialNo gt This command defines the serial number of the mixer for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 245 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt SerialNo gt Serial number with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX 123 4567 Manual operation See Mixer S N on page 112 Programming Example Working with an External Mixer This example demonstrates how to work with an external mixer in a remote environ ment It is performed in the Spectrum application in the default layout configuration Note that without a real input signal and connected mixer this measurement will not return useful results a a a Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON Configuring bas
35. Reference Level Automatically determines a reference level which ensures that no overload occurs at the R amp S FSW for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the sig nal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression and clipping are minimized To determine the required reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSW If necessary you can optimize the reference level further by manually decreasing the attenuation level to the lowest possible value before an overload occurs then decreas ing the reference level in the same way When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 the level measurement is performed on the connected oscilloscope Y axis scaling on the oscil loscope is limited to a minimum of 5mV per division Amplitude You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 174 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 311 Full Scale Level Mode Value The full scale level defines the maximum power you can input at the Baseband Input connector without clipping the signal The full scale level can be defined automatically according to the reference level or manually For manual input the following values can be selected e 025V e 05V e 1V e 2V
36. This register contains information about the state of the digital UO input and output This register is used by the optional Digital Baseband Interface The status of the STATus QUESTionable DIQ register is indicated in bit 14 of the STATus QUESTionable register You can read out the state of the register with STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition on page 368 and STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt on page 369 For more information on the optional Digital Baseband Interface see chapter 5 2 Pro cessing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface on page 35 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Remote Commands to Perform Measurements with UO Data EE M r H P M HH H X H q Bit No Meaning 0 Digital UO Input Device connected This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the Digital Baseband Interface of the analyzer 1 Digital UO Input Connection Protocol in progress This bit is set while the connection between analyzer and digital baseband data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 2 Digital UO Input Connection Protocol error This bit is set if an error occurred during establishing of the connect between analyzer and digital UO data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 3 Digital UO
37. on page 32 This rate may differ from the sample rate of the connected device see Input Sample Rate on page 115 If the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active restrictions to the sample rate apply see chapter 5 2 3 Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Digital UO Data on page 39 Remote command TRACe IQ SRATe on page 305 Analysis Bandwidth Defines the flat usable bandwidth of the final I Q data This value is dependent on the defined Sample Rate and the defined signal source Up to the Maximum Bandwidth the following rule applies analysis bandwidth 0 8 sample rate Note Bandwidths up to 2 GHz are only available if the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is installed and active see B2000 State on page 127 The option is not activated automatically by defining a larger bandwidth Note For input from the optional Analog Baseband interface If the frequency range defined by the analysis bandwidth and the center frequency exceeds the minimum fre quency 0 Hz for low IF evaluation or the maximum frequency for I jQ evaluation an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency see Center Frequency on page 118 or the analysis bandwidth to exclude possible unwanted signal compo nents For details on frequency ranges and the analysis bandwidth see chapter 5 3 Process ing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface on page 42 Remote command TRACe IQ BWIDth on page
38. on page 76 The following settings are available for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 e General Settings creencia eter aeo ndetteee endear Ela 127 e AONO oues ri odisea did aas ot aids eee aie 128 General Settings Access INPUT OUTPUT gt B2000 Config gt Settings WW yiew SS Spectrum Li EE Power Sensor External Generator Probes B2000 Settings B2000 State TCPIP Address or Computer name Oscilloscope FSW Rear Panel Houn oooga The required connections between the R amp S FSW and the oscilloscope are illustrated in the dialog box For details see chapter 5 4 7 2 Prerequisites and Measurement Setup on page 77 B2000 State Activates the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Note Manual operation on the connected oscilloscope or remote operation other than by the R amp S FSW is not possible while the B2000 option is active When the B2000 option is activated the basic IF OUT 2 GHZ output is automatically deactivated It is not reactivated when the B2000 option is switched off Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope STATe on page 273 User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 127 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Configuration TCPIP Address or Computer name When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 the entire measurement via the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector and an oscilloscope as well as bot
39. 150 140 130 120 110 100 Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input Digital Baseband output If Digital Baseband output is active see Digital Baseband Output on page 143 the sample rate is restricted to 200 MHz max 160 MHz usable UO bandwidth The figure 5 5 shows the maximum usable UO bandwidths depending on the output sample rates Usable UO bandwidth UO bandwidths for RF input MHz Activated option B160 U160 ITT iw LL LLLL PTET TTT Ty Pie PAL Te ege 7 or deactivated option B160 U160 Without BW extension options or B8 Output sample 10000 rate fan MHz 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Fig 5 5 Relationship between maximum usable I Q bandwidth and output sample rate with and with out bandwidth extensions 5 1 1 3 R amp S FSW without additional bandwidth extension options sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum UO bandwidth 10 MHz Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz Table 5 2 Maximum I Q bandwidth Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 10 MHz proportional up to maximum 10 MHz 10 MHz to 10 GHz 10 MHz MSRA master 10 MHz to 600 MHz 5 1 1 4 R amp S FSW with options B28 or U28 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 28 MHz MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to a samp
40. ER 79 Configuring remote ceeeeceeseseeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeae 299 Errors ver e WEE 23 l Q data remote eerte nrc 318 MSRA MSRT m Le cp EE Troubleshooting cote tte mieten retine 206 Data format clem ened 378 SET 378 une 356 Data output Troubleshooting 3 ttti eade 206 207 DC offset Analog Baseband B71 remote control 232 233 Decimation Data PROCESSING aec cott roe ttn dL ete Hm nine 23 zl TE 40 Delta markers tech cie URN Ip Sa m bU ptis d 183 elle e S 183 Demodulation Display eer ttr metere teet eene 172 Denominator Frequencies external generator 72 123 Detectors REMOS coritrol 2 rt e ere 328 Eie 178 Diagram area Hardware settings iere 13 Diagram footer information sseeseeee 14 Differential input Analog Baseband B71 remote control 231 Analog Baseband Dr 117 DiglConf see also R amp S DiglGonf ee es 115 Digital Baseband Interface we 143 BASICS M HR 35 Connected instrument 2 rere 144 Error messages 206 Input 36 Input settings 114 Input status remote eret 226 oor m M M 37 Output connection status remote 229 Output settings een 142 143 Status
41. For background information on amplitude settings see the R amp S FSW User Manual 6 4 4 Amplitude Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Amplitude or AMPT Amplitude Config Amplitude settings determine how the R amp S FSW must process or display the expected input power levels Amplitude settings for input from the optional Analog Baseband interface are described in chapter 6 4 2 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input on page 148 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Configuration Amplitude Reference Level Input Settings Value 0 0 dBm Preamplifier Offset 0 0 dB Input Coupling Unit Impedance Mechanical Attenuation Electronic Attenuation State Mode Mode Value L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 146 FR AC oU Io BE 147 L Attenuation Mode Value tnter tert ntntn setate tnn 147 Using Tute e e DEE 147 jue esr uo c as 148 LE 148 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R amp S FSW is adapted according to this value it is recom mended that you set the reference level cl
42. GPIB TCPip RST GPIB Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN INT TCP Manual operation See Interface on page 120 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator LINK Type This command selects the link type of the external generator if the GPIB interface is used The difference between the two GPIB operating modes is the execution speed While during GPIB operation each frequency to be set is transmitted to the generator sepa rately a whole frequency list can be programmed in one go if the TTL interface is also used Frequency switching can then be performed per TTL handshake which results in considerable speed advantages Configuring I Q Analyzer Measurements This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 254 Parameters Type GPIB TTL GPIB GPIB connection without TTL synchronization for all generators of other manufacturers and some Rohde amp Schwarz devices TTL GPIB connection with TTL synchronization if available for most Rohde amp Schwarz devices RST GPIB Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN LINK TTL Selects GPIB TTL interface for generator operation Manual operation See TTL Handshake on page 121 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE Type This command selects the type of external generator For a list of the available generator types see the External Generator Control Basics section in the R amp S FSW User Manual
43. IF and Video Signal Output on page 84 Remote command OUTPut IF IFFRequency on page 278 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT For details see chapter 5 4 8 Input from Noise Sources on page 83 Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 276 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW Trigger input parameters are available in the Trigger dialog box Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 295 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 294 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output 6 3 4 QD Data Input and Output Settings Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW trigger
44. Level Min Lavel Max enti rater eder n dde c eet d n a 121 Generator Type Selects the generator type and thus defines the generator setup file to use For an overview of supported generators see chapter 5 4 5 2 Overview of Supported Generators on page 66 For information on generator setup files see chapter 5 4 5 3 Generator Setup Files on page 68 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE on page 256 Interface Type of interface connection used The following interfaces are currently supported e GPIB e TCP IP not by all generators Data Input and Output Settings For details on which signal generators support which interfaces see the documenta tion of the corresponding signal generator Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTerface on page 255 TTL Handshake If available for the specified generator type this option activates TTL synchronization via handshake for GPIB connections Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control because the frequency stepping of the R amp S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator For more information on TTL synchronization see TTL synchronization on page 73 For an overview of which generators support TTL synchronization see chapter 5 4 5 2 Overview of Supported Generators on page 66 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator LINK on p
45. MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Return values lt PeakPosition gt Position of the peaks on the x axis The unit depends on the measurement Usage Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEeaks Y This command queries the position of the peaks on the y axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Return values lt PeakPosition gt Position of the peaks on the y axis The unit depends on the measurement Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single swe
46. Manual operation See LO Level on page 107 SENSe MIXer SIGNal State This command specifies whether automatic signal detection is active or not Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance Parameters State OFF ON AUTO ALL OFF No automatic signal detection is active ON Automatic signal detection Signal ID is active AUTO Automatic signal detection Auto ID is active ALL Both automatic signal detection functions Signal ID Auto ID are active RST OFF Manual operation See Signal ID on page 107 See Auto ID on page 108 SENSe MIXer THReshold Value This command defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison see SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 236 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters Value numeric value Range 0 1 dB to 100 dB RST 10 dB Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Auto ID Threshold on page 108 Mixer Settings The following commands are required to configure the band and specific mixer set tings ISGENZGe Mixer EREOuencv HANDover tnit ene nennen nnns sns tn nne re re rh aan 237 ISENS MIXER FREQ Eege eerte rate te che aea ceras et etae eese 237 SENSe MIXer FREG mency S TOP2 2 icis ictor e cerebro dade chanted 238 SENSe MIXer
47. Modulation Inverted UO remote 1 302 Inverted I Q EE 167 MSRA Analysis iliterVal 2 rrr netten 164 Operating mode FROSUACHON e eitis ence recitare rie se MSRA applications Capture offset remote A 351 MSRT Analysis interval souge geed Eege dE 164 Operating mode Ee WEE MSRT applications Capture E Capture offset remote Multiple Measurement channels AA 12 Multiple zoom N Next MIDI accused i noie i nt cotra vaca cras na sra ec Marker positioning as QE qe Marker positionihg ec peor nt on tnn eren Noise ife 83 141 NOR External generator cent 69 74 Normalization Approximate external generator ss 69 External generator tette 69 125 Number of Readings Power SensQF ccoriecis cus E e ddr ca RR rae EE Eds 136 Numerator Frequencies external generator 72 123 O Offset Analysis iriterVal sinsin Aiea 169 Displayed Frequency Reference level sse 145 149 Open circuit reflection measurement Calibration external generator ssse 125 Options Analog Baseband Interface sesssssssss Bandwidth extension esses Digital Baseband Interface Electronic attenuatioh erinnern Highi pass filter reet Preatmplifigi ciere ttti tent tren Pene 148 Oscilloscope Add
48. PSE Trigger on page 139 How to Set Up a Power Sensor Up to 4 external power sensors can be configured separately and used for precise power measurement All power sensors can be activated and deactivated individually The following procedure describes in detail how to configure and activate power sen sors 1 To display the Power Sensor tab of the Input dialog box do one of the following e Select Input from the Overview e Select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then the Power Sensor Config softkey 10 11 12 Data Input and Output Settings Select the tab for the power sensor index you want to configure e g Sensor 1 Press Select to analyze the power sensor data according to the current configura tion when power measurement is activated From the selection list with serial numbers of connected power sensors select the sensor you want to configure To have newly connected power sensors assigned to a tab automatically default select Auto Define the frequency of the signal whose power you want to measure a To define the frequency manually select Frequency Manual and enter a fre quency b To determine the frequency automatically select Frequency Coupling and then either Center to use the center frequency or Marker to use the fre quency defined by marker 1 Select the unit for the power result display Select the measurement time for which the average is calculated or define the
49. RF and external trigger signals For more information see High accuracy timing on page 45 Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 The high accuracy timing function is switched on The cable for high accuracy timing must be connected to trigger ports 1 and 2 OFF 0 The high accuracy timing function is switched off RST OFF Example CAL AIQ HAT STAT ON Manual operation See High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF on page 117 TRACe IQ APCon STATe State If enabled the average power consumption is calculated at the end of the I Q data measurement This command must be set before the measurement is performed The conversion factors A and B for the calculation are defined using TRACe 10 APCon A and TRACe IQ APCon B The results can be queried using TRACe 10 APCon RESult on page 234 For details see chapter 5 3 5 Average Power Consumption on page 49 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Example RST Q STAT ON Q SRAT 1MHZ TRAC IQ RLEN 1000000 Q APC STAT ON Q APC A 3 0 TRAC IQ APC B 0 6 NIT WAI TRAC IQ APC RES TRACe IQ APCon A lt ConvFact gt Defines the conversion factor A for the calculation of the average power consumption For details see chapter 5 3 5 Average Power Consumption on page 49 Parameters lt ConvFact gt numeric value RST 1 0 TRACe IQ APCon B lt ConvFact gt Defines the conversion factor B for the
50. R_S Instr user data iq tar Uses UO data from the specified file as input Usage Setting only Manual operation See Select Q Data File on page 103 Configuring Digital UO Input and Output Useful commands for digital UO data described elsewhere INP SEL DIQ see INPut SELect on page 224 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 289 TRACe IQ DIQFilter on page 303 Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURce EBOX RST SOURCe EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Remote commands exclusive to digital UO data input and output INPUT DIOG DEVICE E 226 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO toro eot raii reae comua 227 leie wie Geer Be EE 227 INPUEDIG RANGS SUPPEGR 2 c c cescecsaececcectagenenesanstedeedousgisedeesayevevetinpeedacdssganee
51. Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output B2000 specific conversion loss tables A B2000 conversion loss table consists of 41 magnitude correction values per fre quency as opposed to 1 for ac files To each side of the specific frequency 20 ref erence values are defined Thus correction levels are measured with a spacing of 50 MHz Example For example for the level measured at the frequency 50 GHz 41 correction levels are defined e 20 for the frequencies 49 GHz 49 05 GHz 49 1 GHz 49 95 GHz e 1 for the frequency 50 GHz e 20 for the frequencies 50 05 GHz 50 1 GHz 50 15 GHz 51 GHz Phase correction tables In addition to the magnitude correction tables B 2000 phase correction tables with the same layout are defined in a separate file Both files are always delivered as a pair by the manufacturer of the external mixer Currently the R amp S FSW uses only the magni tude correction files for external mixers the phase is assumed to be ideal Restrictions If the 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is active the following restric tions apply e Manual operation on the oscilloscope or remote operation other than by the R amp S FSW controlling the option is not possible e MSRA mode is not available The center frequency must lie between 8 GHz and the maximum frequency sup ported by the instrument model The record length may be restricted by the number of samples provided by the os
52. Reflection Measurement Scalar reflection measurements can be carried out using a reflection coefficient mea surement bridge User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 65 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output GEN OUTPUT Bridge RF INPUT DUT Fig 5 24 Test setup for reflection measurement Generated signal input In order to use the functions of the external generator an appropriate generator must be connected and configured correctly In particular the generator output must be con nected to the RF input of the R amp S FSW External reference frequency In order to enhance measurement accuracy a common reference frequency should be used for both the R amp S FSW and the generator If no independent 10 MHz reference frequency is available it is recommended that you connect the reference output of the generator with the reference input of the R amp S FSW and that you enable usage of the external reference on the R amp S FSW via SETUP Reference External Refer ence For more information on external references see the Instrument Setup section in the R amp S FSW User Manual Connection errors If no external generator is connected if the connection address is not correct or the generator is not ready for operation an error message is displayed e g Ext Genera tor TCPIP Handshake Error see chapter 5 4 5 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 74 5 4 5 2 Overview of Supported Generators
53. Restricting the maximum bandwidth manually By default all installed bandwidth extension options are activated allowing for the maximum possible bandwidth for measurements on the R amp S FSW However in some cases this may not be necessary For example due to the correlation of both parame ters high sample rates automatically lead to an extended analysis bandwidth How ever while a high sample rate may be necessary for example due to postprocessing in an OFDM system the wide bandwidth is not really required On the other hand low sample rates lead to small usable UO bandwidths In order to ensure the availabilty of the required bandwidth the minimum required bandwidth for the specified sample rate can be selected via remote command only Thus if one of the bandwidth extension options is installed the maximum bandwidth can be restricted manually to a value that may improve the measurement see Maxi mum Bandwidth on page 165 In this case the hardware of the regular RF path is Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input used rather than the hardware required by the R amp S FSW B160 B320 B500 band width extension options The following improvements may be achieved e longer measurement time for sample rates under 300 MHz e UO Power trigger is available e data processing becomes up to 10 times faster 5 1 1 8 Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated UO Bandwidth Extension Option B320 U320 Sample rate Ma
54. SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency on page 266 Data Input and Output Settings Frequency Coupling Selects the coupling option The frequency can be coupled automatically to the center frequency of the instrument or to the frequency of marker 1 Remote command SENSe PHETer p FREQuency LINK on page 266 Unit Scale Selects the unit with which the measured power is to be displayed Available units are dBm dB W and If dB or 96 is selected the display is relative to the reference value that is defined with either the Meas gt Ref setting or the Reference Value setting Remote command UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer on page 269 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer RATio on page 269 Meas Time Average Selects the measurement time or switches to manual averaging mode In general results are more precise with longer measurement times The following settings are recommended for different signal types to obtain stable and precise results Short Stationary signals with high power gt 40dBm because they require only a short measurement time and short measurement time provides the highest repetition rates Normal Signals with lower power or modulated signals Long Signals at the lower end of the measurement range 50 dBm or Signals with lower power to minimize the influence of noise Manual Manual averaging mode The average count is set with the Average Count Number of Readings setting Remote co
55. Sample Rate ISR 18 Rate SR Trigger Fig 5 9 Signal path using digital input Full scale level The Full Scale Level defines the level that corresponds to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 and can be defined in various units When converting the measured power into dBm an impedance of 50 O is assumed Triggering The following trigger sources are supported e External see External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 156 e BB Power see Baseband Power on page 158 e Time see Time on page 160 e Digital UO general purpose trigger see Digital I Q on page 158 If external triggering is used the external trigger must be applied via the connector on the rear panel of the instrument as for analog input Gating Gating is not supported for digital input 5 2 2 Digital Output The digital input and output cannot be used simultaneously The only data source that can be used for digital baseband output is RF input It is recommended that you use the R amp S SMU Z6 1415 0201 02 cable to connect other devices to the Digital Baseband Interface of the R amp S FSW Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface Processing digital output Digital output is processed almost identically to RF input in I Q mode see chapter 5 1 Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input on page 23 UO data is sampled blockwise according to the defined sample rate and stored in the UO memory From the memory the I Q data is pro
56. The currently used output frequency is indicated in the field other wise used to define the frequency manually in the Output settings dialog box see IF Wide Out Frequency on page 141 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing pme M M M T H T A M eam M Mee 5 5 IF 2 GHz Output For instrument models R amp S FSW26 43 50 67 85 the IF output can also be provided at the alternative IF OUT 2 GHZ output connector at a frequency of 2 GHz and with a bandwidth of 2 GHz The IF output can then be analyzed by a different instrument for example an R amp SGRTO oscilloscope If IF OUT 2 GHZ output is activated the measured values are no longer available on the display thus the trace data currently displayed on the R amp S FSW becomes invalid A message in the status bar indicates this situation The message also indicates whether the sidebands of the IF spectrum output are in normal or inverted order com pared to the RF signal which depends on the used center frequency 2 GHz bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B2000 To analyze IF data with a bandwidth of 2 GHz using an R amp SGRTO oscilloscope it is recommended that you use the fully integrated solution including alignment with the 2 GHz bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B2000 rather than the basic IF OUT 2 GHZ output solution
57. Window Length Defines the number of samples to be included in a single window in averaging mode In single mode the window length corresponds to the Record Length on page 166 Values from 3 to 4096 are available in Manual mode in Advanced FFT mode val ues from 3 to 524288 are available However the window length may not be longer than the FFT Length If the window length is shorter than the FFT Length the sample data is filled up with zeros up to the FFT length If the window length is longer than the Record Length that is not enough samples are available a window length the size of the Record Length is used for calculation The window length and the Window Overlap determine how many FFT calculations must be performed for each record in averaging mode see Transformation Algorithm on page 168 5 6 4 Frequency Resolution of FFT Results RBW The resolution bandwidth defines the minimum frequency separation at which the individual components of a spectrum can be distinguished Small values result in a high precision as the distance between two distinguishable frequencies is small Higher values decrease the precision but increase measurement speed The RBW is determined by the following equation Sample Rate Window Length Definition of RBW 5 2 RBW Normalized Bandwidth a Note The normalized bandwidth is a fixed value that takes the noise bandwidth of the window function into consideration The m
58. is lost for any reason the display of the oscilloscope remains deactivated Restart the oscilloscope to reactivate the display Alternatively re establish the connection and then close it properly or use the remote command to re activate the display see EXPort WAVeform DISPlayoff on page 272 10 Introduction Remote Commands to Perform Measure ments with IO Data The following commands are specific to performing measurements in the UO Analyzer application or using the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 in a remote environment The R amp S FSW must already be set up for remote operation in a network as described in the base unit manual d 10 1 Note that basic tasks that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described here For a description of such tasks see the R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this includes e Basic instrument configuration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation e Using the common status registers The following tasks specific to the UO Analyzer application are described here o etei e 209 Common SUOS EE 214 e Activating I Q Analyzer Measurements 4 eese thee nitens 214 e Configuring I Q Analyzer Measurements eee aas 220 e Configuring the Result Display 5 trt rtt t RR RR RR Rhea ren xe
59. lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band definition RST 2 for band F Example MIX HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 106 SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire high sec ond range Parameters Average numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS HIGH 20dB Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 106 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the high second range Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example MIX LOSS TABL HIGH MyCVLTable Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 106 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the low first range Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example MIX LOSS TABL mix 1 4 Specifies the conversion loss table mix_1_4 Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 106 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire low first range Parameters Average numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default uni
60. number of readings to average To define the number of readings to be taken into account manually select Manual and enter the number in the Number of Read ings field To activate the duty cycle correction select DutyCycle and enter a percentage as the correction value If you selected dB or 96 as units relative display define a reference value a To set the currently measured power as a reference value press the Meas gt Ref button b Alternatively enter a value manually in the Reference Value field c Optionally select the Use Ref Level Offset option to take the reference level offset set for the analyzer into account for the measured power To use the power sensor as an external power trigger select the External Power Trigger option and define the trigger settings For details see How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External PSE Trigger on page 139 If necessary repeat steps 3 10 for another power sensor Set the Power Sensor State at the top of the Power Sensor tab to On to acti vate power measurement for the selected power sensors The results of the power measurement are displayed in the marker table Function Sensor lt 1 4 gt How to Zero the Power Sensor 1 To display the Power Sensor tab of the Input dialog box do one of the following e Select Input from the Overview Data Input and Output Settings e Select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then the Power
61. result display in the UO Analyzer for instance will principally show the same results as the zero span measurement for the same data However while the Magnitude evaluation is configured by the UO analysis bandwidth and the measurement time the zero span measurement is configured by the center frequency RBW and sweep time settings Internally these time domain settings are converted to the required UO settings by the UO Analyzer The time and frequency domain measurements and the required settings are descri bed in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Limitations However since the data in the I Q Analyzer application is captured by the Master independently of the specific time or frequency measurement requirements concerning the RBW filter type and number of sweep points in the application some restrictions may apply to these measurements in the UO Analyzer If not enough samples are available in the captured and converted UO data for example an error message is dis played in the application The maximum span for a frequency sweep on l Q based data corresponds to the maximum UO bandwidth see chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UC Bandwidth for RF Input on page 25 and chapter 5 2 3 Sample Rates and Band widths for Digital UO Data on page 39 The maximum resolution bandwidth RBW is 1 MHz Furthermore the following functions are not available for time and frequency domain measurements in multistandard
62. the RBW mode is changed to Manual This setting is only available if a Spectrum window is active If the Advanced Fourier Transformation Params option is enabled advanced FFT mode is selected and the RBW cannot be defined directly Note that the RBW is correlated with the Sample Rate and Record Length and possi bly the Window Function and Window Length Changing any one of these parameters may cause a change to one or more of the other parameters For more information see chapter 5 6 Basics on FFT on page 86 Auto mode Default The RBW is determined automatically depending on the Sample Rate and Record Length Manual mode The RBW can be defined by the user The user defined RBW is used and the Window Length and possibly Sample Rate are adapted accordingly Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settings Advanced This mode is used if the Advanced Fourier Transformation Params FFT mode option is enabled The RBW is determined by the advanced FFT parameters Remote command SENSe IQ BANDwidth BWIDth MODE on page 299 SENSe IQ BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 300 Advanced FFT mode Basic settings Shows or hides the Advanced Fourier Transformation parameters in the Data Acqui sition dialog box These parameters are only available and required for the advanced FFT mode Note that if the advanced FFT mode is used the RBW settings are not available For more information see chapter 5 6 4 Fr
63. the duration of 1 sample Usage Query only Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 160 TRACe IQ WBANd STATe State This command determines whether the wideband provided by bandwidth extension options is used or not if installed Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters State ON OFF ON If enabled installed bandwidth extension options can be used They are activated for bandwidths 80 MHz if the bandwidth is not restricted by the TRACe 10 WBANd MBWIDTH command Otherwise the currently available maximum bandwidth is allowed see chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 25 This parameter corresponds to the Auto setting in manual operation with TRACe 10 WBANd MBWIDTH 320 MHZ OFF The bandwidth extension options R amp S FSW B500 B320 B160 are deactivated the maximum analysis bandwidth is restricted to 80 MHz This parameter corresponds to the 80 MHZ setting in manual operation RST ON Manual operation See Maximum Bandwidth on page 165 TRACe IQ WBANd MBWIDTH Limit Defines the maximum analysis bandwidth Any value can be specified the next higher fixed bandwidth is used Defining a value other than MAX is useful if you want to specify the sample rate directly and at the same time ensure a minimum bandwidth is available see Restrict ing the maximum bandwidth manually on page 30 Parameters Limit 80 MHz R
64. 182 El e 182 Marker Position G value nnne nini trnntnn nns nrnnns 183 VETT MERO C 183 F trepeecharket UEM 183 Linking to nei 183 Assigning the Marker to a Trace 183 SII i 184 AI Markers MI EE 184 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 334 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 333 Marker Usage Marker Position X value Defines the position x value of the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 334 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 333 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied re
65. 186 Select Market aber 184 lu UE MEET 171 SWECDICOUNE orci i d Ee eiae bean 170 Uem ees Alger 160 Trace 1 2 9 4 ui ect eet e ENEE 180 Trace COM cerent miren 177 Trigger Cohflgi EE 154 Trigger OSet EE 160 Upper Level Hysteresis 5 nere 174 Sort mode Pak list oed one t Hte 190 Source offset External generator err eren 122 Source power External generator nente rere 122 Specifics for GONQUIATION ET 97 Spectrum le EE 19 UO Evaluation method nuiscce 19 SRate hardware setting A 14 Status Digital Baseband Interface vg e ed de Status bar Error messages external generator 74 Status registers Querying remote E 363 STAT QUES POW eege dee 221 STATus QUEStionable DIQ 363 366 STATus QUEStionable SYNC ssssss 364 Step size EI Markers remote control Suffixes Ve TE 214 Remote commands nitet eren rper tren 211 Swap UO acu sei M 302 Sweep ABDOMINO scit eet ect Ua 171 172 eo n 170 Performirig remote niece 318 Points I Q Analyzer 4 170 Settings erimi 169 TIME REMOLE euidenter tiere 324 Sweeps Reverse external generator ssussss 73 T TCP IP Address External generator suuss 121 External generator is 5e hice tuac ttn ee 120 Threshold e E 187 Tim
66. 2 ISR input Sample Rate SR Digital 100 Hz 200 MHz output Usable UO bandwidth Min 0 8 SR 0 8 ISR Digital input and filter active Unfiltered UO data input The values in table 5 6 apply for the default data processing using the decimation filter and resampler If the filter is deactivated see Omitting the Digital Decimation Filter No Filter on page 166 the analysis sample rate is identical to the input sample rate In this case the usable UO bandwidth is not restricted by the R amp S FSW Bandwidths Depending on the sample rate the following bandwidths are available Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface Usable IQ bandwidth ISR Filter can be turned off BW 0 8 SR BW 0 8 ISR Fig 5 11 Bandwidths depending on sample rate for active digital input 5 2 4 Interface Status Information When a digitial input or output instrument is connected to the R amp S Digital Baseband Interface the Input or Output dialog boxes provide information on the status of the connection see Connected Instrument on page 115 Connected Instrument on page 144 Output Settings Information on page 143 You can query the information in these dialog boxes using remote commands see INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 226 and OUTPut DIQ CDEVice on page 229 Status icons The status of the connection to the Digital Baseband Interface is also indicated as icons in the status bar The status icons have t
67. 296 OUT butTRlGgerzportz PDUL Se ENG 296 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as well as an output Suffix port Selects the used trigger port 2 trigger port 2 front panel 3 trigger port 3 rear panel Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters Direction INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 141 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel Level This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with oUT Put TRIGgereport 0TYPe Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Level HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 141 See Level on page 142 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputT ype gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FSW has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an exte
68. 303 Maximum Bandwidth Defines the maximum bandwidth to be used by the R amp S FSW for UO data acquisition This setting is only available if a bandwidth extension option greater than 160 MHz is installed on the R amp S FSW Otherwise the maximum bandwidth is determined automati cally Note This setting is not available for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 For details on the maximum bandwidth see chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 25 Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settings Auto Default All installed bandwidth extension options are activated The currently available maximum bandwidth is allowed see chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 25 Note that using bandwidth extension options greater than 160 MHz may cause more spurious effects See Restricting the maximum bandwidth manually on page 30 Note If a bandwidth extension greater than 160 MHz is active on the R amp S FSW the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector is automatically used to provide IF output See the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual for details on the connec tor 80 MHz Restricts the analysis bandwidth to a maximum of 80 MHz The bandwidth extension options greater than 160 MHz are deactiva ted 160 MHz Restricts the analysis bandwidth to a maximum of 160 MHz The bandwidth extension option for 320 MHz is deactivated Not available or req
69. 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW R amp S9FSW Multi Standard Radio Analyzer is abbreviated as R amp S FSW MSRA Products of the R amp S9SMW family e g R amp S SMW200A are abbreviated as R amp S SMW R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Contents 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 Contents arr 7 About this Manual 7 Documentation OVGIViCW ciii ccccccceccccecsseeccceesseeececeesteeddeeensteedeceesteeecceessteedeeeessteddeneestes 8 Conventions Used in the Documentation eee 9 Welcome to the I Q Analyzer Application s 11 Starting the UO Analyzer Application eere nnn 11 Understanding the Display Information eese 12 Typical Applications for the UO Analyzer and UO Input 15 Measurement and Result Displays eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 18 Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing
70. Auto FFT mode an FFT length of 4096 and a window length of 4096 or the record length if shorter is used to calculate the spectrum Combining results trace detector If the record length permits multiple overlapping windows are calculated and combined to create the final spectrum using the selected trace detector If necessary the trace detector is also used to reduce the number of calculated frequency points defined by the FFT length to the defined number of sweep points By default the Autopeak trace detector is used User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 88 Basics on FFT using a detector other than Auto Peak and fewer than 4096 sweep points may lead to o Due to the fact that the frequency points are reduced to the number of sweep points wrong level results 4096 samples n use trace detector to combine these FFTs use trace detector to reduce to sweep points 5 6 3 Dependencies Between FFT Parameters FFT analysis in the R amp S FSW is highly configurable Several parameters including the resolution bandwidth record length and FFT length can be defined according to the user s requirements Note however that several parameters are correlated and not all can be configured independently of the others Record Length Defines the number of UO samples to capture By default the number of sweep points is used The record length is calculated as the measurement time multiplied by the sample rate If you chang
71. BW max fe 0 Hz frequency i e i e c 40 MHz to 40 MHz default 10 Hz to 40 MHz default 80 MHz to 80 MHz with B71E 10 Hz to 80 MHz with B71E option option Span Sample rate Sample rate Sample rate 2 not forced by R amp S FSW 5 3 5 Average Power Consumption The Analog Baseband interface can be used to capture two different signals one pro portional to the voltage and one proportional to the current of a DUT The average power consumption can then be calculated from the captured UO signal To avoid pro cessing large amounts of UO data the R amp S FSW provides an internal calculation of the average power consumption for remote operation according to the following equation 1 NofSamples Pae P n NofSamples 2 P n A V n I n B V n V n with e V n I data of the instrument e Int Q data of the instrument e A conversion factor A e B conversion factor B Remote commands TRACe IQ APCon STATe on page 233 TRACe IQ APCon A on page 234 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing EE M d d P M H 5 4 5 4 1 5 4 2 TRACe IQ APCon B on page 234 TRACe IQ APCon RESult on page 234 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output
72. CALC MARK FUNC FPE 10 Initiates a search for 10 peaks on the current trace CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE lt MaxNoPeaks gt This command defines the maximum number of peaks that the R amp S FSW looks for during a peak search Parameters lt MaxNoPeaks gt Maximum number of peaks to be determined Range 1 to 200 RST 50 Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE LIST SIZE 10 The marker peak list will contain a maximum of 10 peaks Manual operation See Maximum Number of Peaks on page 191 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT lt SortMode gt This command selects the order in which the results of a peak search are returned Parameters lt SortMode gt X Sorts the peaks according to increasing position on the x axis Y Sorts the peaks according to decreasing position on the y axis RST X Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE SORT Y Sets the sort mode to decreasing y values Manual operation See Sort Mode on page 190 IO Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STATe State This command turns a peak search on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE STAT ON Activates marker peak search Manual operation See Peak List State on page 190 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEeaks X This command queries the position of the peaks on the x axis The order depends on the sort orde
73. Data Files The data is stored as binary data Definite Length Block Data according to IEEE 488 2 each measurement value being formatted in 32 Bit IEEE 754 Floating Point Format The schema of the result string is as follows 41024 lt valuel gt lt value2 gt lt value n With 4 number of digits 4 in the example of the following number of data bytes 1024 number of following data bytes 1024 in the example lt Value gt 4 byte floating point value Reading out data in binary format is quicker than in ASCII format Thus binary format is recommended for large amounts of data A 3 Reference Format Description for I Q Data Files This section describes how UO data is transferred to the memory during remote control see TRACe 10 DATA FORMat on page 354 command For details on the format of the individual values see chapter A 2 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 378 For details on the format of UO export files using the UO Export function see the R amp S FSW User Manual Reference Format Description for UO Data Files COMPatible IQBLock IQPair mode Q Data 1 512k I Data Q Data OF 512k Q Data x X N 512k Q Data l Data X N 512k Q Data Fig 1 2 I Q data formats Note 512k corresponds to 524288 samples For maximum performance the formats Compatible or IQPair should be used Fur thermore for large amounts of data
74. EIS EE 217 INS Tr meht RE El EE 218 INS DRUIMENt SEESCE H 219 EAYOUEADDEWINDOW rrr ete EP eege Edel 313 EAYout GATalogE ee KE 314 LAYout IDENtify WINDOW eoruni tnr no ennt Sgen aRa cesceneatesadarsansienctncectaasessanvennconcevees 314 LAYout REMove WINDow 314 LAYout REPLace WINDOW 1 3 n tron treten terrre eren trn Ferr rh rr er Enni a 315 LAOU SPLICE cs casement sesnece 315 LAYOUt WINDOWSA DID 317 LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify LAY OURWINDOWSM gt REMOVG reos et coran teer ect EI genaue seca sont ansannaert tuat eni AE NEE LAYout WINDowsr REPBLAC6 iei erret tree tel p pate edi A a MMEMory EOAD IQ STA Te nest tto erroe rt tpa ther rea treten ero y Er DRE e YR CY Kk o e EXE Roe MMEM STORE lt A gt IO COMME ME rener nane aa a EEO EITE ATANIR 362 MMEMory STORe Sn IQ STAT6 r erret rper A erae EE n o TX EX DEN E 363 MMEM M STORES E E MMEMory STORe n PEAK e OWTPUEDIQ e n UE HEEM ege geed Eed E E EE UN lee e e e ei ER GE RE 276 ei Et Gel Re E 277 OUTPut TRIGgerspotts DIR CEO creto tpe ni 294 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel OU TPUEMRIGGSrS DOr OU dE 295 OUTPut TRIiGgersport gt PULSe6IMMe d ate vc eegene geed etre cena 296 OUTPutsTRIGger ports PUESe EENGIh root t EERSTEN 296 READ PME TEI Da c
75. FSW B160 B320 B500 is installed the Maximum Band width depending on whether you require a larger or smaller bandwidth e Measurement Time how long the data is to be captured e Record Length the number of samples to be captured also defined by sam ple rate and measurement time 10 Select the Display Config button and select up to six displays that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 11 Exit the SmartGrid mode 12 Start a new sweep with the defined settings R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input How to Work with UO Data 8 2 4 How to Output UO Data via the Optional Digital Baseband Interface 0 8 3 The lI Q data processed by the I Q Analyzer can also be output to the optional Digital Baseband Interface if installed The digital input and output cannot be used simultaneously 10 Connect the device to which digital output will be provided to the DIGITAL BASEBAND OUTPUT connector at the rear of the R amp S FSW Press the INPUT OUTPUT key of the R amp S FSW Select Output Config and switch to the Digital IQ tab to configure the Digital Baseband output Information on the detected output device is shown under Connected Instrument The output settings only become available once a device has been detected Set the state of the Digital Baseband Output to On If the maximum sample rate displayed for the detected output device is lower than the currentl
76. FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Contents 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 9 1 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 A A 1 A 2 A 3 AA CIL ege SE 177 Trace Settings 177 Marker USAO TTT 181 Lnnulithuonc t 191 Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode eene nennen nennen nennen nnn 192 How to Work with UO Data eeeeeeeeeeennnnnn 194 How to Perform Measurements in the UO Analyzer Application 194 How to Capture or Output UO Data via Optional Interfaces 196 How to Configure Data Acquisition via the Optional 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 E 200 How to Export and Import UO Data ee REENEN 203 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 206 Error Ee LE 206 Remote Commands to Perform Measurements with UO Data 209 riter s m L BHH RT 209 Common SufflX6s ince nnne initiati Rak oe ANa RRERMERFXRRR Rue ET ERRXERSEBEPA NR Rae E PRA AERE RID 214 Activating UO Analyzer Measurements eene enne 214 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements eene 220 Configuring the Result Display eeeeeeeeennennennnnn nennen nnns 311 Capturing Data and Perf
77. For RF input the maximum expected voltage level is defined by the reference level For analog baseband input the maximum expected voltage level for each component User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 44 Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface I or Q is defined by the full scale level The full scale level defines the maximum power you can input at the BASEBAND INPUT connector without clipping the signal The full scale level can be defined manually or automatically such that the power of I and Q does not exceed the reference level If probes are connected the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed voltage For details on probes see chapter 5 3 Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface on page 42 When converting the measured voltage into dBm an impedance of 50 Q is assumed Triggering The following trigger sources are supported for analog baseband input see Trigger Source on page 156 e External e Baseband power e Time Power sensor Gating Gating is not supported for analog baseband input Calibration A special calibration signal is available for analog baseband input and can be activated in the general instrument settings If activated an internal DC or AC calibration signal is input to the Analog Baseband Interface For details see the R amp S FSW User Manual High accuracy timing For measurements which require a timing prec
78. HARMonic BAND PRESet essere nennen ennt 238 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VAbLue 2 221 R hann h naris na 238 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH ISTATe 2 2 ide erac cocotte tede eua ec eec aac c eR aun edad 239 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue essere nennen nnns 239 SENSeJMIXeprPIATSMOnDGEE d 239 SENSeTMIXGERARMODIGE EON odio eed ner Rete onec ce uet e eterne 240 Isis TK Bel Me 240 SENSE MIX LOSS TABLE RIGH e eid ttr ree dengan tco einn ae PER aan SES 240 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW ccce tette tenente nets 240 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW eee tette tet tette te ttt 241 E ER POR t 241 ISGENZGe Mixer RFOVerrangel STATel renes 241 SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover Frequency This command defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency for each band can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 235 Parameters Frequency numeric value Example MIX ON Activates the external mixer MIX FREQ HAND 78 0299GHz Sets the handover frequency to 78 0299 GHz Manual operation See Handover Freq on page 105 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band starts Configuring I Q Analyzer Measuremen
79. If probes are connected the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power For details on probes see chapter 5 4 3 Using Probes on page 51 Remote command INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO on page 231 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel on page 231 6 4 3 Scaling the Y Axis The individual scaling settings that affect the vertical axis are described here Access Overview gt Amplitude gt Scale tab or AMPT Scale Config Amplitude Amplitude Scale Range Scaling Logarithmic Range 100 dB v Ld Linear Percent rig sv Ese 100 0 Yo d Linear with Unit Auto Scale Once ese plo E 152 feele leed 153 Range Defines the displayed y axis range in dB The default value is 100 dB Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 283 Ref Level Position Defines the reference level position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis in where 0 corresponds to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 284 Scaling Defines the scaling method for the y axis Logarithmic Logarithmic scaling only available for logarithmic units dB and A V Watt Linear Unit Linear scaling in the unit of the measured signal Linear Per Linear sc
80. Interface S f B BW max 2 Fig 5 14 Spectrum in real baseband mode This mode is useful for pulse measurements for example Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Analog Baseband signals The analog baseband input is sampled internally by the R amp S FSW at a rate of 200 MHZ As a result 200 megasamples of values and 200 megasamples of Q val ues can be obtained per second The actual sample rate required by the application however may be lower in which case the data is downsampled Depending on the application used to process the data the required sample rate is defined by the appli cation itself or by the user The sample rate also determines the analysis bandwidth that is the bandwidth range in which the signal remains undistorted in regard to ampli tude characteristic and group delay and can be used for accurate analysis by the R amp S FSW The sample rate and the analysis bandwidth are interdependant and are adapted according to the following formula in the I Q Analyzer see also chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 25 Analysis bandwidth 0 8 sample rate For or Q only Analysis bandwidth 0 4 sample rate Bandwidth extension options The standard R amp S FSW equipped with the optional Analog Baseband Interface can analyze a maximum bandwidth of 40 MHz input per connector i e an 80 MHz analysis bandwidth for a complex baseband signal The bandwidth extension option
81. Level numeric value Range 1 UV to 7 071 V RST 1V Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 115 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Full Scale Level on page 115 The availa bility of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters Level VOLT DBM DBPW WATT DBMV DBUV DBUA AMPere RST Volt Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 115 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the optional Digital Baseband Interface see Input Sample Rate on page 115 Note the final user sample rate of the R amp S FSW may differ and is defined using TRAC 1Q SRAT See TRACe 10 SRATe on page 305 Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 115 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital UO input signal is set automatically by the con nected device This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 115 OUTPut DIQ State This command turns continuous
82. MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chap ter 10 4 5 Configuring Data Acquisition on page 299 Sample alg curet E te ve ee luec e ruens an Pn Dd ceux POE Ea uade 164 Analysis Bandwidth AAA 165 EE sten ee L Sov faces crecen ted dd ance tte Svea ce ne e erit da 165 Omitting the Digital Decimation Filter No Filter 166 Maas TIMO EE 166 Record Length ES 166 Swap P EE 167 NEE 167 Advanced FFT mode Basic eeitings een 168 L Transformation Abee energie ttti tetto restet dated troie tta 168 i cg4 MM 168 L Window Fette eei mter oet e eege 168 L Window Overlap eerte tette n 169 L Window d o MNT 169 ecouter EL rer eee re eee ere eee reere eee ce 169 Sample Rate Defines the UO data sample rate of the R amp S FSW This value is dependent on the defined Analysis Bandwidth and the defined signal source Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settings Up to the Maximum Bandwidth the following rule applies sample rate analysis bandwidth 0 8 For details on the dependencies see chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usa ble UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 25 In particular note the irregularity mentioned in chapter 5 1 1 9 Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated UO Bandwidth Extension Option B500
83. Note that you have to disconnect the signals from the power sensor input before you start to zero the power sensor Otherwise results are invalid Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters ONCE Example CAL PMET2 ZERO AUTO ONCE WAI Starts zeroing the power sensor 2 and delays the execution of further commands until zeroing is concluded Usage Event Manual operation See Zeroing Power Sensor on page 134 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude lt RefValue gt This command defines the reference value for relative measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt RefValue gt Range 200 dBm to 200 dBm RST 0 Example CALC PMET2 REL 30 Sets the reference value for relative measurements to 30 dBm for power sensor 2 Manual operation See Reference Value on page 135 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE This command sets the current measurement result as the reference level for relative measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters ONCE Example CALC PMET2 REL AUTO ONCE Takes the current measurement value as reference value for rel ative measurements for power sensor 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas gt Ref on
84. OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 171 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 321 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 324 Suffix n irrelevant Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 324 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Suffix n irrelevant Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE Mode This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 324 A detailed programming example is p
85. REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 313 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY WIND2 REPL MTAB Replaces the result display in window 2 with a marker table 10 6 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Different measurement procedures o Two different procedures to capture UO data remotely are available e Measurement and result query with one command see TRACe 10 DATA on page 354 This method causes the least delay between measurement and output of the result data but it requires the control computer to wait actively for the response data e Setting up the instrument starting the measurement via INIT and querying the result list at the end of the measurement see TRACe 10 DATA MEMory on page 355 With this method the control computer can be used for other activities during the measurement However the additional time needed for synchronization via service request must be taken into account Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps MSRA MSRT operating mode Note that in MSRA MSRT operating mode
86. Remote command SENSe MIXer LOPower on page 236 Signal ID Activates or deactivates visual signal identification Two sweeps are performed alter nately Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band USB of the LO the test sweep trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band LSB i e the reference sweep Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in the VSA the I Q Analyzer or the Real Time application for instance Mathematical functions with traces and trace copy cannot be used with the Signal ID function Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 236 Data Input and Output Settings Auto ID Activates or deactivates automatic signal identification Auto ID basically functions like Signal ID However the test and reference sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak values of each sweep point The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if Signal ID is active at the same time If Signal ID is not active the result can be displayed in any of the traces 1 to 3 Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this calculated trace Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 236 Auto ID Threshold Defines
87. SENSe ICGORRSsction C VIE BAIND intro tte o tid te e Rr utpat SENSe CORRection GVLIBIAS As iret rero Reserven een te eee va ue o Edu ode cian Anaad SENSe GORRSsction ee RT KEE 243 SENSe GORRection CVLE GEBAF ccce ten ettet tee E Pr pe ce tp ee ED D Bep ee bs 243 EIS eet ee el 243 SENSE CORRECHIONC EAE p 244 SENSe CORRection CVIEARMORIG core oreet ert ette edocet cet rita ae bre 244 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs SENSe CORRection CVL S ELS Ct societe ertt gra rc pd en cp o ee Ee e ce E 245 SENSe CORRSction C VIE SNUMADBALR 2 cca cott tcr Pera EY We E a E RD a na eu ed 245 SENSE CORRection METH o o D 258 SENSe IGORRSction RECalli tpe te ett GEET 258 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerator essere eren rennen eene innen 259 SENSe CORRection STATe SE SENSe FREQ ehcy CEMTSL rtr rtr ra ner tenent E cr de e X IE ee e XT TENER ERN SENSe FREQU ncy CENTerSTEPA cn couper pr rae care enc rhe reu ete Yada nd ee ca ere an 286 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AU TQ counters renes E RETE ek r ERR SERRE SEE R cix Re EE 286 SENS FRE QUe OFFSOL ertt ep ec tege EE cate cece dde ee Lec t pue te De bad 287 SENSe IIQ BANDwidth BWIDth le tcr co etr coe iore ter entre Ree io doct EE ERE 299 SENSe IQ BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution nipin nennen nennen nnne 300 SENSe IQ FFT ALGorithm SENSE IQ E RT E
88. SEQuence BE Veld OP OWPEF EE 291 TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling essere 291 TRIGSer SEQuence EEVelREPOWSE odierna en ace pre trate rec re eo reete 291 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPBSe E 292 TRiGger e Ee BI 292 TRIGger SEQuenceJ TIME RINTerval esses enne nennen nnne 294 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the baseband power trigger event The command requires the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband Interface Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 289 command for new remote control programs Parameters Period Range 150 ns to 1000s RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 using the baseband power trigger BBP the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to avoid unintentional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range O sto 10 0s RST 0s Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 160 TRIGger SEQuenc
89. Setting up iurc Trigger mode tere ettet rtr tnn Unit Scale Using KT M Preamplifier SOLOING e 148 SOfIKGy secte ere re tenes 148 Preset Bands External Mixer remote control 238 External MIXET tnr rre re diiin 105 Presetting Channels Ol Etettgger nisasie AE eg Eege 161 Probes Common Mode Offset 52 Connectots 42 Microbutton 25 119 Settings iore eer eee nr ten rn opi 118 Programming examples External MIXET ier aces 246 UO Analyzer Protection RF Tue E RF input remote Q Quick Config Reie 180 R R amp S DiglCORf iuis iiie rient npe ue nsn 17 115 R amp S Digital Baseband Interface B17 see Digital Baseband Interface B17 15 R amp S EX IQ BOX DIGIC ONT cies t err ri n ot nr et cie thc eerte R amp S NRP FOE EES T 131 R amp S Power Viewer Plus interiit none te ann 131 R amp S SMA External generator o cesse tei met ein dee 66 R amp S SMW External generatorima n testo 66 Range d RBW hardware setting sssn 14 Real Imag I Q Evaluation metliOd uota tin teri e teint 20 e Analyzer accesos ti iati date rH diede 20 Rec Length hardware setting sessessssss 13 Recalling Calibration settings external generator 125 Record length BIEL Le M 25 lem
90. TAT O EE INPUEFIL Per dE EH RN NEE OT Ee e E INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first For details on the protection mechanism see chapter 5 4 1 RF Input Protection on page 50 Usage Event INPut CONNector lt ConnType gt Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF input connector or the optional Analog Baseband connector This command is only available if the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed and active for input It is not available for the R amp S FSW67 or R amp S FSW85 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Parameters lt ConnType gt RF RF input connector AIQI Analog Baseband connector RST RF Example INP CONN AIQI Selects the analog baseband input Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Connector on page 102 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input The command is not available for measurements with the option
91. TRACe 10 SET sample rate defined by TRACe 10 SRATe Range 1 Max samples RST 1 Example TRAC IQ EGAT GAP 2 TRACe IQ EGATe LENGth lt GateLength gt This command defines the gate length for gated measurements with the UO analyzer Defines the gate length in samples in edge mode For details see chapter 10 4 4 3 Configuring UO Gating on page 296 Parameters lt GateLength gt lt numeric value gt Max 440 MS sample rate 200MHz 1 pretrigger samples defined by TRACe 10 SET sample rate defined by TRACe 10 SRATe Range 1 Max samples RST 100 Example TRAC IQ EGAT LENG 2000 TRACe IQ EGATe NOFgateperiods Number This command defines the number of gate periods after the trigger signal for gated measurements with the I Q analyzer Parameters Number Range 1 to 1023 RST 1 Example TRAC IQ EGAT NOF 2 TRACe IQ EGATe TYPE Type This command selects the gate mode for gated measurements with the UO analyzer Note The IF power trigger holdoff time is ignored if you are using the Level gate mode in combination with an IF Power trigger Parameters Type LEVel EDGE RST EDGE Example TRAC IQ EGAT TYPE LEV 10 4 5 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Configuring Data Acquisition The following commands are required to capture data in the UO Analyzer QD MSRA MSRT operating mode Note that in MSRA MSRT operating mode configuring
92. Trace Settings Quick Config Commonly required trace settings have been predefined and can be applied very quickly by selecting the appropriate button Function Trace Settings Preset All Traces Trace 1 Clear Write Traces 2 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold Man us in Trace 2 Average Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold Max Nine quin Trace 2 Clear Write Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys Displays the Traces settings and focuses the Mode list for the selected trace Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 327 Copy Trace Access Overview gt Analysis gt Traces gt Copy Trace or TRACE gt Copy Trace Copies trace data to another trace The first group of buttons labelled Trace 1 to Trace 6 select the source trace The second group of buttons labelled Copy to Trace 1 to Copy to Trace 6 select the destination Remote command TRACe lt n gt COPY on page 329 7 2 0 d QD 7 2 1 7 2 1 1 Marker Usage Marker Usage The following marker settings and functions are available in the I Q Analyzer applica tion For UO Vector displays markers are not available In the UO Analyzer application the resolution with which the frequency can be mea sured with a marker is always the filter bandwidth which is derived fro
93. UO input see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual AIQ Analog Baseband signal only available with optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For details on Analog Baseband input see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 100 See I Q Input File State on page 103 See Digital UO Input State on page 114 See Analog Baseband Input State on page 117 10 4 1 2 Input from UO Data Files The input for measurements can be provided from UO data files The commands required to configure the use of such files are described here Currently this input source is only available in the R amp S FSW Pulse application For details see chapter 5 4 6 Basics on Input from UO Data Files on page 75 Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere INPut SELect on page 224 10 4 1 3 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Remote commands exclusive to input from UO data files POG REAR AMR EE 225 INPut FILE PATH lt FileName gt This command selects the I Q data file to be used as input for further measurements The UO data must have a specific format as described in chapter A 4 I O Data File Format iq tar on page 381 For details see chapter 5 4 6 Basics on Input from UO Data Files on page 75 Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file The file extension is iq tar Example INP FILE PATH C
94. Usage Manual operation Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements SINGIe One FFT is calculated for the entire record length if the FFT length is larger than the record length see SENSe IO FFT LENGth and TRACe 1Q RLENgth zeros are appended to the captured data AVERage Several overlapping FFTs are calculated for each record the results are averaged to determine the final FFT result for the record The user defined window length and window overlap are used see SENSe IQ FFT WINDow LENGth and SENSe IQ FFT WINDOow OVERlap RST AVER IQ FFT ALG SING SCPI confirmed See Transformation Algorithm on page 168 SENSe IQ FFT LENGth lt NoOfBins gt Defines the number of frequency points determined by each FFT calculation The more points are used the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes but the longer the calculation takes Parameters lt NoOfBins gt Example Usage Manual operation integer value Range 3 to 524288 RST 4096 IQ FFT LENG 2048 SCPI confirmed See FFT Length on page 168 SENSe IQ FFT WINDow LENGth lt NoOfFFT gt Defines the number of samples to be included in a single FFT window when multiple FFT windows are used Parameters lt NoOfFFT gt Example Usage Manual operation integer value Range 3 to 1001 RST 1001 IQ FFT WIND LENG 500 SCPI confirmed See Window Length on page 169 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurement
95. User Manual Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 351 MSRT mode SENSe RTMS CAPTure OFFSet on page 353 6 7 2 Sweep Settings The sweep settings are configured via the SWEEP key or in the Sweep tab of the Bandwidth dialog box R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Configuration Data Acquisition Sweep Sweep Points Sweep Count gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Bandwidth button in the configuration Overview and switch to the Sweep tab e Select the SWEEP key and then the Sweep Config softkey VO PDITB TE 170 sweep Average la EE 170 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT c cccccssssccecssscceceesssseeeeessseeaeeessesseaeeesssnsaaeesesseaaeess 171 Single Sweep RUN GINGLE A 171 Continue SINGIS SWE ibs eorr tet e tu ee tri rte pd v e aae ee e e no ee teens 172 Sweep Points In the UO Analyzer application a specific frequency bandwidth is swept for a specified measurement time During this time a defined number of samples Record Length are captured These samples are then evaluated by the applications Therefore in this case the number of sweep points does not define the amount of data to be acquired but rather the number of trace points that are evaluated and displayed in the result dia grams Note As opposed to previous versions of the UO Analyzer the sweep settings are now window specific For some result displays the sweep points may not be
96. V Sets the level for value 1 to 2 V INP DIQ RANG COUP ON Adjusts the reference level to the full scale level automatically after every change S J RIG SOUR BBP RIG SEQ LEV BBP 20 2 j Aus Trigger on baseband power of 20 dBm RAC IQ SRAT 32MHZ S J Defines the sample rate RAC IQ RLEN 1000 2 J Sets the record length number of samples to capture to 1000 samples RAC IQ BWID 2 j Programming Examples Queries the bandwidth of the resampling filter determined by the sample rate FORM DATA REAL 32 Formats the data as 32 byte real values TRAC TO DATA FORM IQP Lists all I values first then all Q values in the trace results TRAC IO AVER ON Defines averaging for the I Q trace TRAC IQ AVER COUN 10 Defines an average over 10 sweeps DISP TRAC1 MODE WRIT DISP TRAC2 MODE MAXH DISP TRAC3 MODE MINH Changes the trace modes INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished TRAC DATA TRACE1 TRAC DATA TRACE2 TRAC DATA TRACE3 Returns the magnitude for each sweep point 10 11 4 Converting an RF Signal to a Digital UO Signal via the Optional Dig ital Baseband Interface In the following example an RF signal is measured at the RF input and then output as digital UO data via the Digital Baseband Interface which requires an additional hard ware option The following signal is to be measured Table 10 4
97. aae reete mode t ette een eec ada 285 SENSe FREQuesncy GENTSr STEP eoi oec a EAA ONET EE aA AES 286 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO vrii aaa aS 286 E Ee Tel 287 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CENTer This command matches the center frequency to the frequency of a marker If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC CENT Sets the center frequency to the frequency of marker 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Center Frequency Marker Frequency on page 189 SENSe FREQuency CENTer lt Frequency gt This command defines the center frequency Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters Frequency The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center Frequency on page 118 See Center frequency on page 153 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Y
98. advantage of the extended frequency range by overriding the defined start and stop frequencies by the maximum possible values RF Overrange option Additional ranges If due to the LO frequency the conversion of the input signal is not possible using one harmonic the band must be split An adjacent partially overlapping frequency range can be defined using different harmonics In this case the sweep begins using the har monic defined for the first range and at a specified frequency in the overlapping range handover frequency switches to the harmonic for the second range Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Two port and Three port Mixers External mixers are connected to the R amp S FSW at the LO OUT IF IN and IF IN con nectors When using three port mixers the LO signal output from the R amp S FSW and the IF input from the mixer are transmitted on separate connectors whereas for two port mix ers both signals are exchanged via the same connector LO OUT IF IN Because of the diplexer contained in the R amp S FSW the IF signal can be tapped from the line which is used to feed the LO signal to the mixer User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 54 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Two port mixer Three port mixer LO IF External External Mixer RF Mixer RF RF INPUT INPUT In both cases the nominal LO level is 15 5 dBm 5 4 4 3 Bias Current Single diode
99. affects the y axis scaling in the diagram it has no effect on the expected input power level or the hardware settings The normalized trace 0 dB directly after calibration is displayed on this reference line indicated by a red line in the diagram If you shift the reference line the normalized trace is shifted as well Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 284 Reference Value Defines the reference value to be displayed at the specified Result Frequency Start This setting can be used to shift the reference line and thus the normalized trace simi lar to the Shifting the Display Offset defined in the Amplitude settings shifts the ref erence level in the display Shifting the normalized trace is useful for example to reflect an attenuation or gain caused by the measured DUT If you then zoom into the diagram around the normal ized trace the measured trace still remains fully visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue on page 257 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Configuration 6 3 1 8 Settings for 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 Access INPUT OUTPUT B2000 Config The I Q Analyzer application supports the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 if installed For details on prerequisites and restrictions see chapter 5 4 7 Basics on the 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 Option
100. also used to reduce the number of calculated frequency points defined by the FFT length to the defined num ber of sweep points By default the Autopeak trace detector is used Note Using a detector other than Auto Peak and fewer than 4096 sweep points may lead to wrong level results For details see Combining results trace detector on page 88 Trace Settings Auto Selects the optimum detector for the selected trace and filter mode This is the default setting Type Defines the selected detector type Note If the EMI R amp S FSW K54 measurement option is installed and the filter type CISPR is selected additional detectors are availa ble even if EMI measurement is not active Remote command SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion on page 328 SENSe WINDow n DETector lt t gt FUNCtion AUTO on page 329 Hold If activated traces in Min Hold Max Hold and Average mode are not reset after specific parameter changes have been made Normally the measurement is started again after parameter changes before the mea surement results are analyzed e g using a marker In all cases that require a new measurement after parameter changes the trace is reset automatically to avoid false results e g with span changes For applications that require no reset after parameter changes the automatic reset can be switched off The default setting is off Remote command DISPlay WINDow
101. amp S FSW itself is ready to trigger The trigger signal can be output by the R amp S FSW automatically or manually by the user If itis provided automatically a high signal is output when the R amp S FSW has trig gered due to a sweep start Device Triggered or when the R amp S FSW is ready to receive a trigger signal after a sweep start Trigger Armed Manual triggering If the trigger output signal is initiated manually the length and level high low of the trigger pulse is also user definable Note however that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is provided User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 83 0 5 4 10 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual IF and Video Signal Output The measured IF signal or displayed video signal i e the filtered and detected IF sig nal can be provided at the IF VIDEO DEMOD or IF OUT 2 GHZ output connector The video output is a signal of 1 V It can be used for example to control demodula ted audio frequencies The IF output is a signal of the measured level at a specified frequency The IF OUT 2 GHZ output is a signal with a bandwidth of 2 GHz at the frequency 2 GHz This outpu
102. an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This function is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 147 INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly This function is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 147 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 281 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This command requires the electronic attenuation
103. and Output Settings 0 6 3 For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FSW User Manual jue t P 98 D ent 98 doo PM UU 98 LGE DERE M 98 Import Provides functions to import data UO Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note that the I Q data must have a specific format as described in the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual UO import is not available in MSRA MSRT mode Remote command MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe on page 362 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export UO Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process I Q data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Da
104. be adjusted automatically in the MSRA Master not in the MSRA applications SEIN Eug UE EE 308 SENSeJTADJusECONFIgUme DIRIGE aac it Do eet een ev eti eee ctae 309 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE essere nennen 309 IGENZGelADlust CONEioure Hv teresle LOMer enne 309 SENSe JADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPeV ccccceceeeeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeaeaeaaaenneteneeens 310 SENSeJADJUSHICONFiguire T RI Gnir nren nr EEEE Aa N NA T A 310 SENSeJADJust FREQUENCY cniinn ar En Re be RV SEENEN 310 SENSeTABJUstEEWVel 2 4 enira cce e p eme s Rena eene Fete etre bana te pad AEN 311 SENSe ADJust ALL This command initiates a measurement to determine and set the ideal settings for the current task automatically only once for the current measurement This includes e Reference level Example ADJ ALL Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All on page 173 Configuring I Q Analyzer Measurements SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation Duration In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command defines the length of the measurement if SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual Parameters Duration Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the m
105. can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command 10 1 6 2 10 1 6 3 Introduction Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in
106. capturing data is only possible for the MSRA Master channel In UO Analyzer application channels the sweep configuration commands define the analysis interval Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before using these commands PBOR E 319 INiTiatesn gt rel 320 INiTiatesi gt CONTINUOUS E 320 EINEN SOEN traen orar teen do ea tue ec xai e ere coacta 321 INITiatexn SEQuencer ABORI csse nennen nnne enn enne e sse s ense nnns 321 INITiatexn SEQuencer IMMediate cesses nnne nne nemen nennen nnne nnne 321 Nitiate lt n SEGQuencer MODE odit cre a re e e ne dan 322 INITiate n SEQuencer REFResh ALL eeeeeeee eene nnne 323 SENSe SWEep COUNt eieiei eege 323 SENSe SWEep COUNt CUpRbent therein enhn en nennt nnns ns ntn tn trt unnan ea 324 Ei LE el 324 SENSe SWEep TIME tette tette tet teet te tette tst nas 324 SVS SEQUOFID BE cdvcrt ede Cer re pr tn tauri dd uda rn gr e Cun Ea nre vie ege EENS e naa 324 ABORt This command aborts the measurement in the current measurement channel and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAT command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt command
107. case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 10 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 210 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM Common Suffixes 10 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 10 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate th
108. complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex sam ples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 I 2 Real sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 Q 0 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 Q 1 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 I 2 21 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 Phi l Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 UO Data File Format iq tar Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data channel no time index Q channel no time index 01 0 Otol 0 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 1 0 Q 1 0 Channel 1 Complex sample 0 2 0 Q 2 0 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 O 1 Q 0 1 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 ITT gir Channel 1 Complex sample 1 2 1 O 2111 Channel 2 Complex sample 1 01 2 1 Q 01 21 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 11 21 QI 11 2 Channel 1 Complex sample 2 2 215 OQI2112 Channel 2 Complex sample 2
109. connector of the R amp S FSW is connected to the CH1 input of the oscilloscope e An external reference for example the REF OUTPUT 10 MHZ connector of the R amp S FSW is connected to the REF IN connector of the oscilloscope e Theoscilloscope is connected to the R amp S FSW via LAN e Optionally the TRIG OUT connector of the R amp S FSW or any other trigger sig nal is connected to the CH3 input connector of the oscilloscope Note In previous firmware versions the external trigger was connected to the CH2 input on the oscilloscope As of firmware version R amp S FSW 2 30 the CH3 input on the oscilloscope must be used On the R amp S FSW press the INPUT OUTPUT key Select the B2000 Config softkey In the B2000 tab of the Input dialog box enable the State of the B2000 option to activate its use If necessary enter the IP address or computer name of the connected oscillo Scope Check the alignment status displayed under the IP address or computer name of the oscilloscope How to Export and Import UO Data If UNCAL or an error message is displayed perform an alignment first as described in How to align the IF OUT 2 GHz connector and the oscilloscope for initial use on page 201 If the green alignment message is displayed the R amp S FSW is ready to perform a measurement 7 Define the measurement settings as described in chapter 8 1 1 How to Capture Baseband l Q Data as RF Input on page 194 To use an extern
110. converting measurements or harmonics measurements The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator The default setting is 0 Hz Offsets other than 0 Hz are indicated by the FRQ label in the channel bar see also chapter 5 4 5 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 74 Swept frequency range The Fanalyzer Values for the calibration sweep start with the start frequency and end with the stop frequency defined in the Frequency settings of the R amp S FSW The resulting output frequencies Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop are displayed in the External Generator gt Measurement Configuration for reference If the resulting frequency range exeeds the allowed ranges of the signal generator an error message is displayed see chapter 5 4 5 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 74 and the Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop values are corrected to comply with the range limits The calibration sweep nevertheless covers the entire span defined by the R amp S FSW however no input is received from the generator outside the generator s defined limits Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output TTL synchronization Some Rohde amp Schwarz signal generators support TTL synchronization when connec ted via GPIB The TTL interface is included in the AUX CONTROL connector of the External Generator Control option When pure GPIB connections are used between the R amp S FSW and
111. data acquisition is only possible for the MSRA MSRT Master channel In UO Analyzer application channels these com mands define the analysis interval Be sure to select the correct measurement chan nel before using these commands For more commands related to the MSRA operating mode see chapter 10 7 4 Config uring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only on page 349 For more commands related to the MSRT operating mode see chapter 10 7 5 Config uring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only on page 351 Useful commands for UO data acquisition described elsewhere SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 323 SENSe SWEep POINts on page 324 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 324 Remote commands exclusive to I Q data acquisition SENSe IQ BANDwidth BWIDth MODE enseesseeseeeneien nennen nnne n enhn nn nnne nn nnne 299 EE lee T Me ER un RE e DEE 200 ISENSe el 300 BENSE IQ FFT LENG nicin Iu I m 301 I SENSelGEFFTAWINDOW IEENGIHD 2 prt retainer ir vete in etn cepere pred nei nen 301 SENS amp JIG EFT WINBOW OVERlap 4 2i cuc inrer orden inue ENEE 302 SENSE lee e eh ere ei e 302 SENSe SWAPiQ ntt tnnt tinta ttt tu ta tdt ta t dne dta a 302 Epi BMD RES 303 Duos Ee CR LM UTERE E 303 TRAGEIOUIREENgll EE 303 BR EE 304 NEI ee m aa 305 KR NET 306 RRE ER e E 306 BEE MEET TR Ke DEET 307
112. data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged The application channel must be selected before this command can be executed see INSTrument SELect on page 219 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant IO Analysis Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INST SEL IQ ANALYZER Selects the IQ Analyzer channel INIT REFR Refreshes the display for the UO Analyzer channel Usage Event SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters Offset This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to Record length RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 169 10 7 5 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only In MSRT operating mode only the MSRT Master actually captures data the MSRT applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line i
113. each sweep point in the specified window for example the frequency in frequency domain or the time in time domain measurements This is especially useful for traces with non equidistant x values Query parameters lt TraceNumber gt Trace number TRACE1 TRACE6 Example TRAC3 X TRACE1 Returns the x values for trace 1 in window 3 Usage Query only Retrieving Marker Results The following commands are required to retrieve the results of markers Useful commands for retrieving marker results described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 333 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 334 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEeaks X on page 346 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEeaks Y on page 346 Remote commands exclusive to retrieving marker results CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEeaks X eessssessisesessesee seen nannten nnne 359 CALCu latesn MARKer lt m gt FUNCton FPEeakS Y senten 360 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz SREL ative seen senes nn enne nnns 360 GALOulate n DELTamarketsemo Y eet orba dio Ese rA en ean EA sen nad eR A DEER 360 CAL CGulatesmsMARKerFSImIPDY EE 361 MMEMory el c L 361 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEeaks X This command queries the position of the peaks on the x axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt
114. editable as they are determined automatically or restrictions may apply For the I Q vector result display the number of UO samples to record Record Length must be identical to the number of trace points to be displayed Sweep Points Thus the sweep points are not editable for this result display If the Record Length is edited the sweep points are adapted automatically For record lengths out side the valid range of sweep points i e less than 101 points or more than 32001 points the diagram does not show valid results Using fewer than 4096 sweep points with a detector other than Auto Peak may lead to wrong level results For details see Combining results trace detector on page 88 Remote command SENSe SWEep POINts on page 324 Sweep Average Count Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 170 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Configuration P M o If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set this value also deter mines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed o
115. essere nennen 284 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis for all traces t is irrelevant Parameters Range Range 1dB to 200 dB RST 100 dB Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Range on page 152 See Y Axis Max on page 153 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once then switched off again for all traces t is irrelevant Usage SCPI confirmed DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis for all traces t is irrelevant When the display update during remote control is off this command has no immediate effect Parameters Mode ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABSolute Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL Manual operation See Scaling on page 152 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Exa
116. goce tev cet eterne pecus DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE essent DlGblavt WiNDow nzUTR ACect vlSCALelMODE eene nennen DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe PDlVision essen eene DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVEl nennen enne DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition eese nennen DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue eseeeseeseeeeeseeee eerte nennen nennen nennen DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe eeeseeeseeseeeeeseeeeeeenne nennen nennen ethernet nennen DISPlayEWINBoOWstis ZOOM AREA edd DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA eee neneenneee nennen DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe essent nennen DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe EXPort WAV Eon DIS Pla EE KETTER E 264 FORMat DEXPort DSEPafalor trem rte tr e terne e rriv peg eadi saii 357 FORMat DATA e INITiate lt n gt CONMeas INITiatesn CONTIDUOUS ect tn n rnnt rentrer en et rr erre ENEE SNE ere 320 INITiate E E EE 350 IR NEE SEQUencer ET GE 321 INiTiat esns SEQuencer E E 321 INI TilatesmsSEQuencer e EE INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer REFResh ALL m Jl MEIER BIEN MIN UE AN REENEN Jl IN REI LTE EA Le ME INPut AT Ten ation PROTection e lee Ee I
117. horizontal position to the same value Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links the delta marker 4 to the marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 183 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MODE lt Mode gt This command defines whether the position of a delta marker is provided as an abso lute value or relative to a reference marker for all delta markers lt m gt is irrelevant Note that when the position of a delta marker is queried the result is always an abso lute value see CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 333 Parameters Mode ABSolute Delta marker position in absolute terms RELative Delta marker position in relation to a reference marker RST RELative Example CALC DELT MODE ABS Absolute delta marker position CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF Reference This command selects a reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1 The reference may be another marker or the fixed reference Parameters Reference 1 to 16 Selects markers 1 to 16 as the reference FIXed Selects the fixed reference as the reference Example CALC DELT3 MREF 2 Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 are relative to marker 2 Manual operation See Reference Marker on page 183 IO Analysis CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers o
118. ieece retenir ree 69 P Parameters INPUESIQMAl trn rito rer tr mcn OUTPUT E Peak GxCUESIOD 42 esit detti etate tarte edd Peak list Configuring Displaying 00 00 00 Evaluation method eene e Marker numbers 2 ect eremi cbe od ge Maximum number of peaks Peak exculsloh geesde Remote Control oiriin asee eaaa Sort mode LLG ere A AE E EEE EE E Peak search MOG earair rae T E a E E 187 Retrieving results remote ssssssse 359 le RE 187 ZOOM IMIS sessir R 188 Peaks Marker positioning crore 189 NOX 189 inci T 189 Performance FFT parameters eege en eere 90 Performing UO Analyzer measurement s e 194 Ports External Mixer Remote control 241 Be UE CET Activating Deactivating Applications Average count Configuration softkey Configuring Configuring as trigger eee COMMOCHING e Continuous Value Update Duty ge EE External power trigger neret External trigger level Frequenoy cisini Frequency Coupling Measurement time Number of readings R amp S NRP tie at tete dr mda a e e a de R amp S Power VIeWSr n retten Reference level Reference level offset Res lts ne Selecting
119. is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix trd under c r_s instr trd The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between the start and stop frequency This is useful for example to determine the effects of a particular device component and then remove these effects from a subsequent measurement which includes this component For an example see the External Generator Control Measurement Examples section in the R amp S FSW User Manual Thus if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration without changing any settings the transducer factor will be O dB for the entire span by definition of the nor malized trace o Note that the normalized measurement data is stored not the original reference trace 5 4 5 6 Reference Trace Reference Line and Reference Level Reference trace The calibration results are stored internally on the R amp S FSW as a reference trace For each measured sweep point the offset to the expected values is determined If normali User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 70 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing zation is activated the offsets in the reference trace are removed from the current measurement results to compensate for the inherent distortions Reference line The reference line is defined by the Reference Value and Reference Position in the External Generator Sou
120. level remote UO Vector Evaluation Method tinet masaa 20 e BEE 20 Markers p Y axis Scalilig WE 153 IF frequency supe 84 140 el Bue M E 277 IF OUT 2 GHz COMMOCIOR EE IF Out Frequency ss IF OUt enna a dl Baud REMOTE EEN IF OVLD E EE e ET e 69 74 IF Power let GE 157 Trigger level remote mnn 290 IF power trigger EA RE 80 IF WIDE OUTPUT COMMOCION e 165 IF VIDEO DEMOD GOMMOCION 84 OUTPUT E eee 141 Impedance cio cce 223 SEWING e 100 Importing eh EI E UO data remote STEEN site cae dE ESO Input Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 116 B2000 Connector remote 2000 eene 221 iere sro 100 Coupling remote eee 222 Digital Baseband Interface settings 114 ek EE EE 103 Overload a D I Overload remote 221 Digger A 100 Settings oo etes Ced eda 98 99 148 Signal paramleters 2 eerte irent 50 GE 98 Source Configuration softkey 5 99 Source connection errors 366 Source displayed we 14 Source Radio frequency RE 99 Input sample rate ISR DEMHON 2 5 20 o re tiere rerba eee ce Dat oce ieee 25 39 Digital I O NEE 115 Input sources Analog Baseband eren 117 Digital UO ek EI UE 103 UO data file remote AAA 225 UO data files d
121. marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 189 IO Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 189 Positioning Delta Markers The following commands position delta markers on the trace CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz M AimumlEEFT nennen enne 342 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT esee nnne 342 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK cessisse 342 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzM AimumbRIGHt eene nnn 343 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkermz MiNimum LEET 343 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimumNENT eene nn ennt nans 343 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eese 343 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz
122. mixers generally require a DC voltage which is applied via the LO line This DC voltage is to be tuned to the minimum conversion loss versus frequency Such a DC voltage can be set via the BIAS function using the D A converter of the R amp S FSW The value to be entered is not the voltage but the short circuit current The current is defined in the Bias Settings or set to the value of the conversion loss table see Bias Settings on page 108 and Bias on page 112 U 2 0 2 0 V serial data Ua 0 5 0 5 V to LO OUT IF IN Fig 5 16 Bias circuit of the R amp S FSW The voltage U at the output of the operational amplifier can be set in the range 2 0 to 2 0 V An open circuit voltage Us of 0 5 to 0 5 V is obtained accordingly at the output of the voltage divider A short circuit current of lsnort Uo 200 Q 10 mA to Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output 10 mA is obtained for a short circuit at the output of the voltage divider In order to use biasing it is not important to know the exact current flowing through the diode since the conversion loss must be set to a minimum with the frequency Therefore it makes no difference whether the setting is performed by an open circuit voltage or by a short cir cuit current A DC return path is ensured via the 66 O resistor which is an advantage in some mixers 5 4 4 4 Conversion Loss Tables Conversion loss tables consist of value
123. on page 244 Mixer S N Specifies the serial number of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied Data Input and Output Settings The specified number is checked against the currently connected mixer number before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber on page 245 Mixer Type Specifies whether the external mixer for which the table is to be applied is a two port or three port type This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs on page 245 Position Value Each position value pair defines the correction value for conversion loss for a specific frequency The reference values must be entered in order of increasing frequencies A maximum of 50 reference values can be entered To enter a new value pair select an empty space in the Position Value table or select the Insert Value button Correction values for frequencies between the reference values are obtained by inter polation Linear interpolation is performed if the table contains only two values If it con tains more than two reference values spline interpolation is carried out Outside the frequency range covered by the table the conversion loss is assumed to be the same as that for the first and last reference value The current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value e
124. on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores the captured UO data to the specified file Manual operation See UO Export on page 98 Querying the Status Registers The R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer uses the standard status registers of the R amp S FSW The following status registers of the R amp S FSW status reporting system are used by the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 The commands required to query the sta tus registers specific to the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 are described with the registers For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual Querying the Status Registers o RST does not influence the status registers DIQ ACPLimit SYNC LMARGin LIMit CALibration ZUNCAL FREQuency Digital UO Input Connection Protocol error TEMPerature Digital VO Input Connecti
125. own conversion loss tables Imported tables are checked for compatibility with the current settings before being assigned Conversion loss tables are configured and managed in the Conver sion Loss Table tab For details on conversion loss tables see the External Mixer descrip tion in the R amp S FSW User Manual For details on importing tables see Import Table on page 110 Remote command Average for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW on page 241 Table for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW on page 240 Average for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH on page 240 Table for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH on page 240 Data Input and Output Settings Basic Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Basic Settings or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Basic Settings The basic settings concern general use of an external mixer They are only available if the External Mixer State is On Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Bias Settings Range 1 Signal ID Bias Settings Range 2 Auto ID Bias Value LITOSURITIS EE 10 0 dB BiS SONNO na Na 108 L write to lt CVL table name 108 LO Level Defines the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Possible values are from 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm in 0 1 dB steps Default value is 15 5 dB
126. pairs that describe the correction values for conversion loss at certain frequencies Correction values for frequencies between the reference values are obtained by interpolation Linear interpolation is performed if the table contains only two values If it contains more than two reference values spline interpolation is carried out Outside the frequency range covered by the table the con version loss is assumed to be the same as that for the first and last reference value see figure 5 17 gt Frequency Conversion loss outside the range covered by the table em em B Conversion loss Bottom limit d table _ _ Topimtottabe Fig 5 17 Conversion loss outside the band s frequency range Predefined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R amp S FSW Alternatively you can define your own conversion loss tables Conversion loss tables are configured and managed in the Conversion loss Table Settings tab of the External Mixer Configuration dialog box see Managing Conversion Loss Tables on page 108 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing e M M ae d M M 5 4 4 5 User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 57 B2000 specific conversion loss tables External mixers can be used together with the optional 2 GHz ban
127. possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product that is with all options instal led Thus some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par ticular product configuration Starting the UO Analyzer Application 2 Welcome to the l Q Analyzer Application The R amp S FSW UO Analyzer is a firmware application that adds functionality to perform UO data acquisition and analysis to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer features e Acquisition of analog UO data e Optionally acquisition of digital UO data via the optional Digital Baseband Interface e Optionally acquisition of analog baseband data via the optional Analog Baseband Interface e Import of stored UO data from other applications e Spectrum magnitude UO vector and separate and Q component analysis of any UO data on the instrument e Export of I Q data to other applications e Optionally direct output of digital UO data via the optional Digital Baseband Inter face This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application pro vides including remote control operation All functions not discussed in this manual are the same as in the base unit and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Installation
128. recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt e xyz a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 e xyz eal 1ch int16 xyz complex 16ch int8 Q Data File Format iq tar Element UserData Description Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content PreviewData Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the UO data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FSW For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as in t16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical valu
129. reference values of the selected conversion loss tables The values are entered as a set of frequency level pairs A maximum of 50 frequency level pairs may be entered Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 245 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt Freq gt numeric value The frequencies have to be sent in ascending order lt Level gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL DATA 1MHZ 30DB 2MHZ 40DB Manual operation See Position Value on page 113 SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic lt HarmOrder gt This command defines the harmonic order for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 245 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 65 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 112 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer Type This command defines the mixer name in the conversion loss table This setting is che
130. single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Single ended setting must be used for all probes Single Ended l Q data only Differential l Q and inverse I Q data Not available for R amp S FSW85 Remote command INPut IQ BALanced STATe on page 231 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband RF and external trigger signals 6 3 1 6 Data Input and Output Settings Note Prerequisites for previous models of R amp S FSW For R amp S FSW models with a serial number lower than 103000 special prerequisites and restrictions apply for high accuracy timing To obtain this high timing precision trigger port 1 and port 2 must be connected via the Cable for High Accuracy Timing order number 1325 3777 00 e As trigger port 1 and port 2 are connected via the cable only trigger port 3 can be used to trigger a measurement Trigger port 2 is configured as output if the high accuracy timing option is active Make sure not to activate this option if you use trigger port 2 in your measurement setup When you first enable this setting you are prompted to connect the cable for high accuracy timing to trigger ports 1 and 2 If you cancel this prompt the setting remains disabled As soon as you confirm this prompt the cable must be in place the firmware does not check the conn
131. sweep point LAY REPL WIND 1 RIMAG Changes the result display to Real Imag I Q 10 11 2 Programming Examples CALC MARK SEAR MAGN Configures searches to search both I and Q branches CALC MARK Y Queries the result of the peak search on both branches TRAC IQ DATA MEM 0 500 Returns the first 500 samples of the stored I Q data for the measurement For each sample first the I value then the Q value is listed TRAC IQ DATA MEM 500 500 Returns the second half of the 1000 captured sample values Basic UO Analysis with Improved Performance This example demonstrates how to configure and perform a basic UO data acquisition and analyze the data using the UO Analyzer in a remote environment dees Activating the I Q Analyzer application RST Reset the instrument INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode TRACE IQ ON Switches the operating mode of the current measurement channel to I Q Analyzer while retaining the relevant parameters from the Spectrum mode TRACE IQ SET NORM 0 32000000 1IQP PO 0 1000 Configures the sample rate as 32 MHz IQP trigger positive trigger slope no pretrigger samples 1000 samples to capture FORM REAL 32 The data is formatted as real values TRAC IQ EGAT ON Turns on gated measurement TRAC IQ EGAT TYPE LEV Select the level gate type TRAC IQ EGAT LENG 20 Sets the gate length to 20 samples TRAC IQ EGAT GAP 20 Sets
132. the R amp S FSW and how to analyze data in the UO Analyzer application How to perform a measurement in the time or frequency domain on UO data in MSRA MSRT mode only is described in the R amp S FSW MSRA MSRT User Manual e How to Capture Baseband UO Data as RF Input 194 e How to Analyze Data in the UO Analyzer sss 195 How to Capture Baseband I Q Data as RF Input By default the UO Analyzer assumes the I Q data is modulated on a carrier frequency and input via the RF INPUT connector on the R amp S FSW 1 Select the MODE key and select the I Q Analyzer application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for an I Q Analyzer mea surement 3 Select the Input button to select and configure the RF Input signal source 4 Select the Amplitude button to define the attenuation reference level or other set tings that affect the input signal s amplitude and scaling 5 Select the Frequency button to define the input signal s center frequency 6 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an IQ Power trigger to start capturing data only when a specific power is exceeded 7 Select the Bandwidth button and define the bandwidth parameters for data acqui sition How to Perform Measurements in the UO Analyzer Application e Sample rate or Analysis Bandwidth the span of the input signal to be cap tured for analysis or the r
133. the new trace 7 2 1 2 Marker Usage The marker can also be assigned to the currently active trace using the Marker to Trace softkey in the Marker menu If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m TRACe on page 334 Select Marker The Select Marker function opens a dialog box to select and activate or deactivate one or more markers quickly Selected State Selected State Selected State m n oa EC a oo a Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 333 General Marker Settings Some general marker settings allow you to influence the marker behavior for all mark ers R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Settings Marker Table ce Fixed m Se Level 200 dBm Marker Stepsize Frequency 13 25 GHz Standard Eis Standard Esc Marker Table Display ctrca reed ettet tti n etri ct v ree rs 185 Muir dijo 185 Marker EE 185 Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Auto Default
134. threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on page 310 Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page 309 Configuring an I Q Analyzer as an MSRA MSRT Application 6 10 Configuring an UO Analyzer as an MSRA MSRT Appli cation In principle the UO Analyzer in MSRA MSRT mode is configured as in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode However the I Q Analyzer application not Master in MSRA MSRT mode can also perform measurements on the captured UO data in the time and frequency domain see also chapter 5 7 UO Analyzer in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode on page 92 Which type of measurement is to be performed conventional UO data analysis or a time or frequency domain measurement is selected in the Select Measurement dia log box which is now displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe I Q Analyzer menu select the Select Meas
135. time domain measurements RST right diagram border Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 187 10 7 2 4 IO Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits ZOOM STATe State This command adjusts the marker search range to the zoom area for all markers in all windows lt m gt n are irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK X SLIM ZOOM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz Manual operation See Using Zoom Limits on page 188 CALCulate lt n gt THReshold lt Level gt This command defines a threshold level for the marker peak search for all markers in all windows n is irrelevant Parameters Level Numeric value The value range and unit are variable RST 120 dBm Example CALC THR 82DBM Sets the threshold value to 82 dBm Manual operation See Search Threshold on page 187 CALCulate lt n gt THReshold STATe State This command turns a threshold for the marker peak search on and off for all markers in all windows n is irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC THR STAT ON Switches on the threshold line Manual operation See Deactiva
136. trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Setting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HYSTeresis on page 270 Trigger Holdoff Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command SENSe PHETer p TRIGger HOLDoff on page 270 Drop Out Time Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Slope Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command SENSe PHETer p TRIGger SLOPe on page 271 How to Work With a Power Sensor The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to set up a power sensor For details on individual functions and settings see chapter 6 3 2 2 Power Sensor Set tings on page 132 The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chap ter 10 4 1 8 Working with Power Sensors on page 261 Power sensors can also be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level e g from a signal generator This is described in How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External
137. trigger signal the gate period is defined by a gate length and a gate dis tance All data in the gate period is captured until the required number of samples has been captured Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Number of gate periods Gate delay Gate period Gate distance Level triggered capturing After a trigger signal all data is captured in which the gate signal is set to 1 which means it has exceeded a level In this case the gate signal can be generated by the IFP trigger for example each time the IFP level is exceeded the IFP trigger signal is set to 1 and the samples in this area are captured as gate samples 2 ug CR HS AR The number of complex samples to be captured prior to the trigger event can be selected see TRACe 10 SET on page 304 for all available trigger sources except for Free Run TRACe IQ EGATe State This command turns gated measurements with the UO analyzer on and off Before you can use the command you have to turn on the I Q analyzer and select an external or IF power trigger source Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example TRAC IQ EGAT ON TRACe IQ EGATe GAP Samples This command defines the interval between several gate periods for gated measure ments with the UO analyzer Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters Samples numeric value Max 440 MS sample rate 200MHz 1 pretrigger samples defined by
138. zoom gt AREA on page 348 Restore Original Display Restores the original display that is the originally calculated displays for the entire capture buffer and closes all zoom windows Remote command single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 347 multiple zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 348 for each multiple zoom window R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates any zoom mode Tapping the screen no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 347 multiple zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00OM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 348 for each multiple zoom window 7 4 Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode The data that was captured by the MSRA or MSRT Master can be analyzed in the UO Analyzer application Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode The analysis settings and functions available in MSRA MSRT mode are those descri bed for common Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Analysis line settings In addition an analysis line can be positioned The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA MSRT applications To hide or show and position the analysis line a dialog box is available To display the Analysis Line dialog box tap the AL icon in the toolbar only available in MSRA MSRT mode The current position of the analysis line is indicated on the icon FOS MUD C
139. 0 alignment starts This may take a few minutes For the second alignment step the connector must be disconnected from the REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ connector and instead connected to the FSW B2000 ALIGNMENT SIGNAL SOURCE input connector on the R amp S FSW Then the alignment process can be continued in the dialog box If both alignment steps were performed successfully the alignment data is stored on the oscilloscope and the date it was performed is indicated in the B2000 dialog box on the R amp S FSW For a description of possible errors see table 9 4 After alignment the cable from the ALIGNMENT SIGNAL SOURCE INPUT can be dis connected and instead connected to the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector on the R amp S FSW Data Acquisition Once the B2000 option has been aligned and activated the R amp S FSW measurement applications can process UO data with a bandwidth of up to 2 GHz with a center fre quency starting at 8 GHz up to the maximum frequency supported by the instrument model the useful range may be restricted see data sheet The record length may be restricted by the connected oscilloscope see its data sheet The analysis bandwidth is defined in the data acquisition settings of the application as usual Note that the maximum bandwidth cannot be restricted manually as for other bandwidth extension options Currently the following applications support the B2000 option e R amp S FSW IO Analyzer R amp S FSW VSA e R amp S FSW Analog D
140. 1 MODE WRIT DISP TRAC2 MODE MAXH DISP TRAC3 MODE MINH Changes the trace modes INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished 2 J RAC IQ DATA FORM IQBL RAC IQ DATA et J Retrieves the captured I samples 1000 values followed by the captured Q samples 1000 values Q samples are all 0 because of I Q mode Low IF RAC2 DATA TRACE1 et J AS Returns the power levels for each sample y values from Spectrum display RAC2 DATA X TRACE1 2 J Returns the frequency for each sample x values from Spectrum display Description of the LVDS Connector A Annex Reference A 1 Description of the LVDS Connector eeeeseeseeeesseeeeeee ener nnne nnn nnne 377 A 2 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format 378 A 3 Reference Format Description for UO Data Files esssseesss 379 AA VQ Data File Format iq tar eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeen nnne nnne nnn nnns 381 AA UO Parameter XML File Specification esses 382 A42 OQ Data Binary Eegeregie Eeer 385 A 1 Description of the LVDS Connector The R amp S Digital Baseband Interface is a proprietary LVDS serial interface For adap tion to industrial standard interfaces use the R amp S EX IQ BOX see the R amp S EX IQ BOX External Signal Interface Module Manual The LVDS Connector is a 26 p
141. 175 6449 02 19 128 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Configuration The required connections between the R amp S FSW and the oscilloscope are illustrated in the dialog box For details see chapter 5 4 7 2 Prerequisites and Measurement Setup on page 77 Alignment consists of two steps The first step requires a temporary connection from the REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ connector on the R amp S FSW to the CH1 input on the oscil loscope To perform the alignment select the Alignment button If necessary in particular after the firmware on the oscilloscope has been updated a self alignment is performed on the oscilloscope before the actual B2000 alignment starts This may take a few minutes If the oscilloscope and the oscilloscope ADC are aligned successfully a new dialog box is displayed Oscilloscope CH1 to FSW REF OUT 640 MHz Please connect RTO CH1 to FSW B2000 Alignment Signal Source Oscilloscope FSW Rear Panel Le a DH a ES H Continue Alignment For the second alignment step the connector must be disconnected from the REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ connector and instead connected to the FSW B2000 ALIGNMENT SIGNAL SOURCE connector on the R amp S FSW To continue the alignment select the Continue Alignment button After the second alignment step has been completed successfully a new dialog box is displayed User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 129 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Con
142. 2 See Restore Original Display on page 192 See R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 192 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applica tions For the UO Analyzer application the commands to define tha analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 10 4 5 Config uring Data Acquisition on page 299 Be sure to select the correct measurement chan nel before executing these commands Useful commands for configuring the analysis interval described elsewhere TRACe IQ SRATe on page 305 TRACe IQ BWIDth on page 303 TRACe IO RLENgth on page 303 SENSe SEWEep TIME on page 324 Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels CAL Gulate lt ne MSRASALING SHOW os lire eine oen erii er e ite eer fes 349 CAL Culate nzMSbRA AL INelVAl ue 350 CAL Culate nzMSbRA WlNDow cnzc MAL 350 IER EE 350 SENS amp MSRA GAPTUre OFF Sel annn lance io Toe eee LEE Dae EE AE E Ri 351 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRA applicatio
143. 25 For digital input via the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 the valid number of samples is described in chapter 5 2 3 Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Digital UO Data on page 39 RST 1001 Example TRAC IQ RLEN 256 Manual operation See Record Length on page 166 TRACe IQ SET NORM 0 lt SampleRate gt lt TriggerMode gt lt TriggerSlope gt lt PretriggerSamp gt lt NumberSamples gt This command sets up the R amp S FSW for UO measurements If you do not use this command to set up I Q measurements the R amp S FSW will use its current settings for UO measurements If the I Q Analyzer has not been turned on previously the command also switches to the UO Analyzer For more information on triggering measurements see chapter 6 6 Trigger Settings on page 154 You can set the trigger level with TRTGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower For details on trigger parameters see chapter 10 4 4 Triggering on page 287 Note If you use the default settings with TRACe 10 DATA the following minimum buffer sizes for the response data are recommended ASCII format 10 kBytes 4 Binary format 2 kBytes Parameters NORM This value is always NORM 0 This value is always 0 lt SampleRate gt Sample rate for the data acquisition Range 100 Hz to 10 GHz continuously adjustable RST 32000000 lt TriggerMode gt Selection of the trigger source used for the measurement IMMediate EXTernal EXT2 EX
144. 28 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 228 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO on page 227 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 227 Connected Instrument Displays the status of the Digital Baseband Interface connection If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face Used port e Sample rate of the data currently being transferred via the Digital Baseband Inter face e Level and unit that corresponds to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level if provided by connected instrument Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 226 DiglConf Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This function is available in the In Output menu but only if the optional software is installed Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the Digital Baseband Interface connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 20 360 86 Build 170 or higher is required 6 3 1 5 Data Input and Output Settings To return to the R amp S FSW application press any key The R amp S FSW application is dis played with the Input Output menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R a
145. 311 e Capturing Data and Performing Gweens enne 318 e VO EE 325 e REMEVING RESUS ic erre Pene Ee eee rer d ER ve En 353 e Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results 362 e Querying the Status E 363 e Programming Examples ciet cen tr cene ted ENEE 369 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Remote Commands to Perform Measurements with UO Data Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FSW Remote command examples No
146. 7 M dz NENNT 157 L Baseband ewer eertroeeg DEENEN EENEG 158 E iu PERMET 158 dro Ls T TU 158 aii zl RENI 159 L E EN 159 E m Rem D 160 Ereegnes Eege 160 E Posen d RIAL EE 160 L Drop Out Tipg usessssiassccicedias ise odus citati aal ids ca a b dtc 160 FRNA UNI coca ee T 160 eer 161 EE ee 161 L Trigger GUN Lan corio ei bise eo adbissioacabiinaveiivideeaintvibeusabeadd 162 Eoo NENNEN 162 et E 162 LE 1 EEN 162 a NORUNT IEEE TET E E ES 163 BEN LIE o RETE 163 L Send TOGET aes aa TM 163 Trigger Source The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger Source Trigger Source Selects the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is dis played in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated For gated measurements this setting also selects the gating source Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 292 Free Run Trigger Source Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 292 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 160 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically sele
147. A operating mode In MSRA operating mode with active B500 bandwidth extension the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz Table 5 4 Maximum record length with activated I Q bandwidth extension option B500 Sample rate Maximum record length 100 Hz to 10 GHz 440 MSamples MSRA master 100 Hz to 600 MHz 5 1 1 10 Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated UO Bandwidth Extension Option B2000 The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B2000 provides measurement bandwidths up to 2 GHz MSRA operating mode MSRA operating mode is not available if the R amp S FSW B2000 bandwidth extension option is active Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 10 kHz to 10 GHz proportional up to maximum 2 GHz UO bandwidths for RF input Usable UO bandwidth GHz Activated Output sample rate fout GHz Fig 5 8 Relationship between maximum usable I Q bandwidth and output sample rate for active R amp S FSW B2000 Maximum record length with activated UO bandwidth extension option B2000 The maximum record length provided by the R amp S FSW depends on the data rate that can be processed by the oscilloscope which in turn depends on the memory updates installed on it Assuming the oscilloscope allows for the maximum of 400 MSamples the maximum record length can be estimated approximately as Table 5 5 Maximum record length with activated HO bandwid
148. ATUS QUESionable S NCICON Te n opea oer E avete p dane Pc STa pu CAVE Te Pa trav u a sat aas 365 SGTATusOUEGponable SNCENABle ener nnn nnne nnn erre an 365 STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition eese ener nnn nena 365 STATUus QUEStonable SYNG PTRAPDSIBON EE 366 STATus QUEStionable SYNCOEEVENI J 2 222 c2 cocinero rre idarra EE 366 STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVEN section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This com
149. Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Name string Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup STATe Queries if the probe at the specified connector is active detected or not active not detected To switch the probe on i e activate input from the connector use INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 224 Suffix lt p gt Return values lt State gt Usage 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I DETected NDETected RST NDETected Query only SENSe PROBe p SETup TYPE Queries the type of the probe 10 4 1 7 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input I 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values Type String containing one of the following values None no probe detected active differential active single ended Usage Query only External Generator Control External generator control commands are available if the R amp S FSW External Genera tor Control option R amp S FSW B10 is installed For each measurement channel one external generator can be configured To switch between different configurations define multiple meas
150. Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 160 Configuring I Q Analyzer Measurements TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the UO data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV Top 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 160 TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling lt CoupType gt Configures the coupling of the external trigger to the oscilloscope Parameters lt CoupType gt Coupling type DC Direct connection with 50 O termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal CDLimit Direct connection with 1 MO termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal AC Connection through capacitor removes unwanted DC and very low frequency components RST DC Manual operation See Coupling on page 161 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is a
151. COMM RDEV OSC ALIG STEP Result 1 Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment DATE Returns the date of alignment of the IF OUT 2 GHZ to the oscilloscope for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Return values Date Returns the date of alignment Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC DATE Result 2014 02 28 Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope IDN Returns the identification string of the oscilloscope connected to the R amp S FSW Return values lt IDString gt Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz RTO 1316 1000k14 200153 2 45 1 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See TCPIP Address or Computer name on page 128 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope LEDState Returns the state of the LAN connection to the oscilloscope for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Return values lt Color gt GREEN Connection to the instrument has been established successfully GREY Configuration state unknown for example if you have not yet started transmission RED Connection to the instrument could not be established Check the connection between the R amp S FSW and the oscillo scope and make sure the IP address of the oscilloscope has been defined see SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip on page 274 Example SYST COMM RDE
152. Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FSW except for the default Spectrum application channel Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 219 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the tool bar These functions are only available if no measurement is running Qs In particular if Continuous Sweep RUN CONT is active the import export functions are not available Some functions for particular data types are also available via softkeys or dialog boxes in the corresponding menus e g trace data or marker peak lists Data Input
153. Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 192 10 7 3 2 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA essent 348 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztZOOM ML Tiple z0oomzGTATe eee eerererereesrsrnrnene nrn ne ne 348 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm e 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 192 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off SSS eS anal User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 348 10 7 4 IO Analysis Suffix zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 19
154. Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 174 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 311 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted automatically Parameters Threshold Range 0 dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 174 SENSe JADJust CONFigure TRIG State Defines the behaviour of the measurement when adjusting a setting automatically using SENS ADJ LEV ON for example See Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements on page 173 Parameters lt State gt ON 1 The measurement for automatic adjustment waits for the trigger OFF 0 The measurement for automatic adjustment is perfo
155. E SENSE IO wg E ee BE EE 301 SENSO FFT WINDOW OVERIAp cce freno arti eec be et trt ii Et ved e eod 302 SENSe IQ FFT WINDow TYPE SENSE IMIXer BIAS AG DEE TEE ETH e UE SENSe MIXer FREQuency BANDOWVSLr 2 ont tener eher retire re y ENEE EES EY Ee d eias 237 SENSE De igo e Pn Ao fte 237 SENSe MIXer FREQUCNCY S TOP terere tactic ni PE ddp Oe Deve do t e d Ca d 238 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESE eege nette eege EVEN 238 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH S TAT Esiri eh rennen aret irat nea eaa ERR Ferrand 239 SENSE lege E ele lee ET 239 SENSe MIXer HARMoniCG T YE ror rere nni rentre rte rn n x eH PX Re en na en SENSe MIXer HARMonic Ba 2 iot rettet rene nk acta rh perat etn e eicere SENSE MIXG rE OR OW M SENSe MIXer LOSS AIG ET SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH SENSe MIXer EOSS TABEe LOW crane eerta ert roc te FERE Eph ERO Fe HE TET eei erat oce SENSe amp MIXer EOSS EOW ntn ttt tren rre ert ren peri rrr net rn tn rer ene rea El E JMX PORT Sirris SENSE le ee E ER KE ME E 241 SENSe MIXer SIGNal terere A n etn etr enero Pee ae YE AEAT SENSe MIXer THReshold SENSe MIXer STATe SENSe MSRA GAPTU tG OFFSOL ctm inter pta tee n o td e ne E vette ve SEE c pp el 351 SENSe IPMETersp DOYGCIe VALUG ines nice reete o rad id R
156. E 330 TRACIO BWID TRAGeG IQIDATA FORMal ctt transition ett ctp eei C eei pn en Ele v eot pee eee cn d TRACe IQ DATA MEMory Re e ENEE HES e ET Ree E E EE TRACe IQ EGATe NOFgateperiods TRACe IQ EGATe TYPE TRACE IQ EVAL T X TRACE ee e EE TRAC e KEE Ree Le RN E Re e alle EE 206 TRAC BERT RH EE 307 Ree E IEN KE 206 Eeer EK EE 220 TRACO NA CORY eee 329 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe t irt t trn rr th hr rentrer nn erre hn casveasenstedsvbcyscencesitettaeisogs 288 TRIGger SEQuenice FHOL DOT TIME ceo aire ttti peteret eoe bipes ke toque 288 TRIGger SEQuerice IFPower HOLDBDJofF irre tr nter rtr rn neto rri 289 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis n ioter terr nee nere rte Pene 289 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower i TRIGger SEQuernce LE EVelIFPOWSLE ect rtr tnter rn enr e tren n re rne e Ras TRIGger SEQuence D EVel IQPOWer 3 rtr tree mr rne tert Ir Er RR EE tor TRiIGger SEQuence HEVElLRE ROWS ctore tora reper EEE E stirbt evo REEE DRY d cue De TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernalsport tort tnr ree 290 TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling aon rn tn etn rr e etienne tnn cin 275 RRE ee E ele kee eer ET ne D 291 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe TRIG Ger SEQUENCE SOURCe 2 irem rte epe tra eere oci a a ED EVEN
157. EE 25 39 Di ital He m 115 Digital UO remote Digital UO data Digital output Displayed UO Analyzer l Q data zs mdi qae e MAXIMU RE Relationship to bandwidth EE cs oer erte et ee eegen Scalar reflection measurement External generator gege e Don rere e tent 65 Scaling elle UC Le E K Y axis B2000 Y axis remote control sisisi uurea 284 Search limits Activating WE 187 DeactlValtilig acento iode erento ire e trt i oc 188 Search settings fie P Myra m 188 Searching elle UCL 186 E e T 184 icri E 12 Aborting remote Activating remote Mode remote o d22 RE e 320 Setup files External goenerator sineira 68 120 121 Short circuit reflection measurement Calibration external generator sss 125 Signal ID External MIXET gie n cero etti lice Dread 107 External Mixer Remote control 236 Signal processing Diagram eter E 24 Signal source REMOTE EN 224 Single sweep Softkey in a E E 171 Single ZOM BEE 191 Slope Power serisor tigger ege tct ee eret 137 Trigger ss Trigger Power sensor esee 137 SOW Sazani Shue eh aces beens vente cd pals caver EEEE 39 Smoothing Traces QrOUP GElay etin t rts 179 Softkey Calibrate Reflection Open remote control Calibrate Reflection Short remote control
158. EO c lp en n 249 SENSe PROBe sp SETup CMOPF set ir terr t eere teat i er eere n Rn er ere EE gue 248 SENSE TE E ERT le 249 SENSe PROBesps SETUp NAME cti tette cr Decitre ep ec EET c ot ep E Ee 250 SENSE TEEN KE 250 SENSE PROB6 lt p gt SETUP d TE 250 SENSe RTMS CAPTure OFFSet xs EE ET DEE SENSE Ee ere E E SENSe ISWEep COUNECURR ORE rite ecc ENEE Add 324 CAL Culate lt n gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt iAO FE vsscsscecccssewecsie riae oer rore roe che sce scene deed cora 331 CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz UNK 331 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TOMAbkercmz eene 332 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MA NimumRIGHt A 343 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK essent 342 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT e CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker cmz MiNimumNENT A CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmmum HIGH CALCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eese 343 GALCulate n DEETamarkersmo s MOLDE iret Era eei Eee er kiere es aped ex ee vtt CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF CALCulate sn DELTamarkersemo zTRAGO 12 cece treten p dp cob o cb dap gta coe Pag aad CAL Culatesn gt DEL Tamarkersin gt X ini ii derer esi cree sartor ea Bn e ir eo EM aoi Eee eH ROW E eed 333 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz SREL
159. Eate BEPLAGG arredi eet t pere See nere Te et EENS 216 INS TramentDEL6le eerte eerte teret cerae et a Re A 217 INS rrGmebibld SEQ eege Ee 217 INSTr mentRENSNIe i riri sten SEENEN ENEE EENS Sc 218 Ewe Tiet SELE E 219 SYSTem PRESetCHANnsIEEXEQCute 21201 Litres erp rado ENEE SEENEN 219 Eee RH c 220 TRACES EE 220 CALCulate lt n gt IQ MODE lt EvalMode gt This command defines whether the captured UO data is evaluated directly or if it is converted via FFT to spectral or time data first lt n gt is irrelevant It is currently only available for UO Analyzer applications in multistandard mode not the MSRA Master Activating UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt EvalMode gt TDOMain Evaluation in time domain zero span FDOMain Evaluation in frequency domain IO Evaluation using UO data INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e creates a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement set tings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecutive number e g IQAnalyzer gt IQAnalyzer2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command This command is not available if the MSRA MSRT Master channel is selected Example INST SEL IQAnalyzer INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel
160. F Input ccrte eee cttm 23 e Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 35 e Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface ssesssss 42 e Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output 50 e VO Datalmport and EXBOI c eese ceder Rene e rm e ec s 85 E Of FP ER 86 e UO Analyzer in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode 92 e Measurements in the Time and Frequency Domain seen 93 Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input Complex baseband data In the telephone systems of the past baseband data was transmitted unchanged as an analog signal In modern phone systems and in radio communication however the baseband data is modulated on a carrier frequency which is then transmitted and must be demodulated by the receiver When using modern modulation methods e g QPSK QAM etc the baseband signal becomes complex Complex data or Q data con sists of an imaginary I and a real Q component Sweep vs sampling While the standard Spectrum application on the R amp S FSW performs frequency sweeps on the input signal and measurements in the frequency and time domain other appli cations on the R amp S FSW are capable of sampling and processing the individual and Q components of the complex signal Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input UO Analyzer processing complex data from RF input The I Q Analyzer is a standard application used to
161. GPIB RDEVice GENerator ADDRESS nenne 255 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTerface SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator LIINK 2 tern teh rote rn tna SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator T Y BE norton era terraa IETT GvGfemCOMMunicateRDEVice OGCloscope Al WGnment DATEN 273 GvGfemCOMMunicateRDEVice OGCloscope Al Gnment GTEPIZSTATelg 273 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCillosc ps IDN 274 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope LEDState 0 ee ce cece cee eee eens rene etneeeeeeteaeeneeees 274 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip 33 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VDEViCe eee ec eee eee ereraa n runaa 275 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VFlIRmware essen enne 275 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope STATE siisiresiriisriiinsisniriieitiasisi vidiniai ada 273 SYST m cGoMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNE t ree t tetro Dp e ci ER 262 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p CONFigure AUTO STATe eene 261 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETerxsp DEFine entities 262 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRESS enne 256 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXEQCute eese essen nennen nnne nennen EATEN 219 SYS ToM SEQUES eoe arde Het neta eer eee tn tp e t Vb da T c pl er Beca tt RR A tcd 324 RR Ger IQAPCOM EE 234 TRACe IQ APCon B RBE er sep sni 233 Ree E COUN TE 330 Ree e RE ECK R
162. INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conversion Loss Table In this tab you configure and manage conversion loss tables Conversion loss tables consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for conversion loss at certain Data Input and Output Settings frequencies The correction values for frequencies between the reference points are obtained via interpolation The currently selected table for each range is displayed at the top of the dialog box All conversion loss tables found in the instrument s C r_s instr user cvl direc tory are listed in the Modify Tables list on E Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Now ET 109 zo I2io RMH 109 Delete Ee o 110 Insel dace 110 New Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to configure a new conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 110 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 245 Edit Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to edit the selected conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 110 Note that only common conversion loss tables in ac1 files can be ed
163. ISITION E 23 SU le E 18 UO Vector evaluation isnin 20 Magnitude evaluation a18 Maximum bandwidth nta nantes 25 rr 215 Programming example esses 370 371 Real Imag I Q evaluation sessssssse 20 eelsten 18 Sample ralte reme etre x nette cire regen 25 Spectr m evaliatiory 5 5 es rto terne eren 19 UO data Analog processing eeeeeeee 23 42 Digital proCessilig un cci the onte i ret deren cis 35 Export file binary data description 385 Export file parameter description 382 Exporting 95 98 Exp rtinig remote eere dct eee ta 362 Exporting Importing 203 File format description noe orc etes 379 IMPON EE Importing remote Importing EXportihg eccoee a tret maet entere ces 85 Inputfile i cheese maet eerta cech eni aed ee tia ta iei ses 103 Input file remote ueste tentent 225 Input files 75 102 Maximumbandwidth 2 oett 25 Measurements in time and frequency domain i93 Sample rate ege Deve aditu ated 25 Trigger point in sample TPIS ssss 306 U nfiltered cde intret ener e xn reet eret id 40 WOKING WIUD iioc ote cir de reete 194 UO gating Edge triggered Level triggered UO measurements Ou E 318 UO modes Analog Baseband Interface sessssssss 46 UO Power ale CT Trigger
164. Increasing the reference level Reference Level in the Amplitude menu 5 4 6 Basics on Input from UO Data Files The I Q data to be evaluated in a particular R amp S FSW application can not only be cap tured by the application itself it can also be loaded from a file provided it has the cor rect format The file is then used as the input source for the application For example you can capture UO data using the UO Analyzer application store it to a file and then analyze the signal parameters for that data later using the Pulse applica tion if available The I Q data must be stored in a format with the file extension iq tar For a detailed description see chapter A A UO Data File Format iq tar on page 381 As opposed to importing data from an UO data file using the import functions provided by some R amp S FSW applications e g the I Q Analyzer or the R amp S FSW VSA applica tion the data is not only stored temporarily in the capture buffer where it overwrites the current measurement data and is in turn overwritten by a new measurement Instead the stored UO data remains available as input for any number of subsequent measurements Furthermore the temporary data import requires the current mea surement settings in the current application to match the settings that were applied when the measurement results were stored possibly in a different application When the data is used as an input source however the data acquisi
165. InistallatiQn eret nter rrr eerte IQBlock VQ data TEE 379 IQPair eh EIER UE 379 K Keys LINES not USed ccrt e teta ir xen 95 MKR eeens MKR gt aa Peak Search RUN CONT RUN SINGLE L Level eet Ge Bet 296 Limit lines Peak sear hina cicne is rese inse eo Ix exei aes 187 Linking OI E 183 LO IHarmornics eir recen tret dete reta 53 Level External Mixer remote control 236 Level External Mixer ss 107 LO feedthrough soe 101 Lower Level Hysteresis rrr 174 LVDS connector pape S 377 LVL Externial generator iis accedente tee 74 M Magnitude Evaluation metliOd unit ot ino torti hr nnt e ti rt 18 VQ EE 18 Marker peak list see Peak list iesms racial sec ect br qned t er emanate 190 Marker search area Remote control iaceo etri tt olere 336 Marker table Evaluation metliOd nott entorno i n eto 21 Marke to Tita Ce i accen ON Ete temen ea eod tere tunes 183 Markers Assigned tate russiini aan ga aia eee eia 183 Basic settings Conflg tratiOni EE 181 184 Configuration remote Control 331 Deactivating veh Delta MAN ers ne tiang naor ne 183 Fixed reference remote control 335 UO vector E BINA Minimum Minimum remote control ae Kl dutt UI Next minimum remote control 336 339 Next peak Next peak remote contro
166. Input PLL unlocked This bit is set if the PLL of the Digital UO input is out of lock due to missing or unstable clock provided by the connected Digital UO TX device To solve the problem the Digital UO connection has to be newly initialized after the clock has been restored 4 Digital UO Input DATA Error This bit is set if the data from the Digital I Q input module is erroneous Possible reasons Biterrors in the data transmission The bit will only be set if an error occurred at the current measurement e Protocol or data header errors May occurred at data synchronization problems or vast transmission errors The bit will be set constantly and all data will be erroneous To solve the problem the Digital UO connection has to be newly initialized NOTE If this error is indicated repeatedly either the Digital UO LVDS connection cable or the receiving or transmitting device might be defect 5 not used 6 Digital UO Input FIFO Overload This bit is set if the sample rate on the connected instrument is higher than the input sam ple rate setting on the R amp S FSW Possible solution Reduce the sample rate on the connected instrument Increase the input sample rate setting on the R amp S FSW 7 not used 8 Digital UO Output Device connected This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the Digital UO Output 9 Digital UO Output Connection Protocol in progress This bit is set while the connection
167. Length 3 8i RBW 30 0 kHz TRG 1 1 Spectrum 4096 pts 3 2 MHz Span 32 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH FREQ see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 313 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 357 Se ae a User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 19 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Measurement and Result Displays pae ee H HU l SS jenen I Q Vector Displays the captured samples in an l Q plot The samples are connected by a line MultiView Spectrum Spectrum 2 IQ Analyzer Ref Level 223 61 mv AQT 31 3ps SRate 32 0 MHz Att 10dB Freq 30 0MHz RecLength 1001 TRG IFP 3 TO Vector ae teg Note For the UO vector result display the number of I Q samples to record Record Length must be identical to the number of trace points to be displayed Sweep Points for UO Analyzer 1001 For record lengths outside the valid range of sweep points the diagram does not show valid results For input from the optional Analog Baseband Interface in real baseband mode the UO vector is a constant line as one component is 0 for all sweep points For more information see chapter 5 3 3 UO Processing Modes on page 46 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH VECT See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 313 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 357 Real Imag UO Displays the and Q values in separate diagrams User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 20 R amp S FSW UO Analyze
168. MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum AUTO CALCulatesn MARKer mo MINimumilEF T cz tne ntpote EENEG CALCulatesn gt MARKer lt m gt MINImUMINEX Tice 1a tatio tace Reip ect et aus sieeve CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHLE esses nennen nennen nennen nnn rnnt rennes CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK CAL Culatesn MARKerem PEXGUFESIOn EE CALCulatesnz MARKer m SEARCh eec rette ntn nite anna tanen EO EEA eR E eras E MSRP A ARP DREA CALGCulatesns MARKer mo TRAGO cte brennt c esas er a e Ce nee opt rp edd GAL Culatesn gt iMARKGrSIM gt 2X auci norte centi bases alan deinen Yasar esas 334 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits LEFT ei e A E 338 CAL Culate nz MAbkercmz XG Mis ZOOMIGSTATel een nnn nnne nennen nnne 339 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits STATe eese rennen NATEN 337 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SSIZe e redimi gege 361 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe GALGulatesn MSRA ALING SHQONW trit ttt trito tre ree rta EE EE Peg ASETAT PE EEYM oS RR RGB GAL Culate n sMSRAALING VALUE tress ce nccncasncanccmcssconawrrecarsiven ERE ee eee rk orc ehe etx EES UA e etx esa ATEEN 350 GALGCulate sn MSRA WINDowsn IMAL uie rtt tn tnter tren rh rr ree ERE Rega 350 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELAtIVE STA T cissccscscesst
169. MiNimum RICH 343 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 189 IO Analysis CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Nex
170. NPULGOU PING E INPut DIQ CDEVice INPUEDIQ RANGE C OUPIING EE INPUt DIO RANGEUPPRER E INPut DIOG RANGe UPP r E AUTO rh e neret er os caiesaViabevecseasaaghavaceavevecss cazeshanateaneniceees INPut iDIQ RANGe UPBPer UNIT oie nro rip neut enki rae ae men EINE Een seneencea cons sod BE NEKE ENE ll ie Sci yup S INPut DIG SRATG AUT O EE INPut DPATh E lyon INPUIEAT EE e INPUEEATTS TATG ciet miro repete Neo eneen Eegeedteeeeer er INPUCRILE PATH p INPut FIETeGHPASSES TATe ienris cere hern terere ener teo rece eh ier aie reve CO EP dr c P ER REPRE nga INPUt FIL HEP YG EES HEIIIE E ll e INPut GAINEVALUS 5 eerte cree rte en rer eer ver Fera ever thi eer erc e a erri rec re REOR RR en NEE INPut IQ BALanced STATe ttn ntt retten net nr e rere ner p p nete INPut 1Q FULLscale AUTO INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel INPUtIO Rd zz INPUUSEL M INS Tr ment CREate DUPLicale E INSTrument CREateREPLACO iere entere eset ete pra eret vd depu puce tace estes INSTr ment CREate NEW 5 rrt entrer reri irre rh re kr th reor rer Rea ee P Rd FCR EYE RR SN ETSA INSTrument DELete INS a Iso ag
171. ORMat on page 354 Retrieving Results For details on formats refer to chapter A 3 Reference Format Description for UO Data Files on page 379 RES Te DATA EE 354 RES RR un deli m tame 354 TRAC ENER EE 355 TRACe IQ DATA This command queries the captured data from measurements with the UO Analyzer To get the results the command also initiates a measurement with the current settings of the R amp S FSW Note Using the command with the RST values for the TRACe 10 SET command the following minimum buffer sizes for the response data are recommended ASCII format 10 kBytes binary format 2 kBytes Return values Results Measured voltage for and Q component for each sample that has been captured during the measurement For analog baseband input in real baseband mode the results for the irrelevant component are all 0 For more information see chapter 5 3 3 I Q Processing Modes on page 46 The number of samples depends on TRACe 10 SET In ASCII format the number of results is 2 the number of samples The data format depends on TRACe 10 DATA FORMat on page 354 Default unit V Example TRAC IQ STAT ON Enables acquisition of UO data TRAC IQ SET NORM 10MHz 32MHz EXT POS 0 4096 Measurement configuration Sample Rate 32 MHz Trigger Source External Trigger Slope Positive Pretrigger Samples 0 Number of Samples 4096 FORMat REAL 32 Selects format of respo
172. ORPER TR T 193 STONES LEE 193 Position Defines the position of the analysis line in the time domain The position must lie within the measurement time of the multistandard measurement Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe VALue on page 350 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS ALINe VALue on page 352 Show Line Hides or displays the analysis line in the time based windows By default the line is displayed Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW on page 349 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS ALINe SHOW on page 352 How to Perform Measurements in the UO Analyzer Application 8 How to Work with UO Data 8 1 8 1 1 The following step by step procedures demonstrate in detail how to perform various tasks when working with UO data e How to Perform Measurements in the UO Analyzer Application 194 e How to Capture or Output UO Data via Optional Interfaces 196 e Howto Configure Data Acquisition via the Optional 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension RES FSW B2000 E 200 e Howto Export and Import VO Dalal ege etcetera eae to D ntes 203 How to Perform Measurements in the I Q Analyzer Application The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to capture UO data on
173. ORt NORMal LONG RST NORMal Example PMET2 MTIM SHOR Sets a short measurement duration for measurements of station ary high power signals for the selected power sensor Manual operation See Meas Time Average on page 135 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage COUNt lt NumberReadings gt This command sets the number of power readings included in the averaging process of power sensor measurements Extended averaging yields more stable results for power sensor measurements espe cially for measurements on signals with a low power because it minimizes the effects of noise Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt NumberReadings gt An average count of 0 or 1 performs one power reading Range 0 to 256 Increment binary steps 1 2 4 8 Example PMET2 MTIM AVER ON Activates manual averaging PMET2 MTIM AVER COUN 8 Sets the number of readings to 8 Manual operation See Average Count Number of Readings on page 136 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage STATe State This command turns averaging for power sensor measurements on and off Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 MTIM AVER ON Activates manual averaging Manual operation See Meas Time Average on page 135 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements SENSe PMETer lt p gt ROFFset STATe State This command includes or excludes the refe
174. OUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 292 Baseband Power Trigger Source Trigger Source Defines triggering on the baseband power for baseband input via the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband interface For more information on the Digital Baseband Interface see chapter 5 2 Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface on page 35 For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface see chapter 5 3 Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface on page 42 Remote command TRIG SOUR BBP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 292 UO Power Trigger Source Trigger Source This trigger source is only available in the UO Analyzer application and in applications that process UO data This trigger source is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface or optional Analog Baseband Interface is used for input It is also not available for analysis band widths 2 160 MHz Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled UO data exceeds the trigger threshold The trigger bandwidth corresponds to the bandwidth setting for UO data acquisition See Analysis Bandwidth on page 165 Remote command TRIG SOUR IQP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 292 Digital I Q Trigger Source Trigger Source For applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applica tions and only if the optional Digital Baseband Inter
175. PUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conversion Loss Table New Table Edit Table Conversion loss tables can be newly defined and edited A preview pane displays the current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries Data Input and Output Settings Table File Name USERTABLE Comment User defined conversion loss table for USER band Band Settings Band Harmonic Order Bias 55 00000000000 GHz 75 00000000000 GHz MX CET 112 DAU EE 112 UD cac 113 Ell 113 Insert Value en t ve deterrere eei o a dr a E ve ua eg 113 elec OT 113 ice EE 113 UE 113 cp U W Wu E E W U aUMrWMMMMM 114 File Name Defines the name under which the table is stored in the C r_s instr user cvl directory on the instrument The name of the table is identical with the name of the file without extension in which the table is stored This setting is mandatory The ACL extension is automatically appended during storage Data Input and Output Settings Note When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 special conversion loss tables are required These tables are stored with the file exten sion b2g Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 245 Comment An optional comment that d
176. R amp S9FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Interfaces User Manual Ymax 9 988 mV 1175 6449 02 19 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S FSW models with firmware version 2 30 and higher R amp S9 FSWS 1312 8000K08 R amp S9FSW13 1312 8000K13 R amp S FSW26 1312 8000K26 R amp S FSW43 1312 8000K43 R amp S FSW50 1312 8000K50 R amp S FSW67 1312 8000K67 R amp S FSWS85 1312 8000K85 In addition to the base unit the following options are described R amp S9 FSW B10 1313 1622 02 R amp S9FSW B13 1313 0761 02 R amp S9FSW B17 1313 0784 02 R amp S FSW B21 1313 1100 XX R amp S FSW B24 1313 0832 XX R amp S FSW B25 1313 0990 02 e R amp S FSW B28 1313 1645 02 R amp S FSW B40 1313 0861 02 R amp S FSW U40 1313 52505 02 R amp S FSW B80 1313 0878 02 R amp S9FSW U80 1313 5211 02 R amp S FSW B160 1313 1668 02 R amp S FSW U160 1313 3754 02 R amp S FSW B160 1325 4850 04 R amp S FSW U160 1325 5357 04 R amp S FSW B320 1313 7172 02 R amp S FSW U320 1313 7189 02 R amp S FSW B320 1325 4867 04 R amp S FSW B500 1313 4296 02 R amp S FSW B2000 1325 4750 02 R amp S FSW B71 1313 1651 XX 1313 6547 02 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89
177. RDEVice OSCilloscope STATe State Activates the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Note Manual operation on the connected oscilloscope or remote operation other than by the R amp S FSW is not possible while the B2000 option is active Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 Option is active OFF 0 Option is disabled RST 0 Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC ON Manual operation See B2000 State on page 127 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment STEP STATe Performs the alignment of the oscilloscope itself and the oscilloscope ADC for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 The correction data for the oscilloscope including the connection cable between the R amp S FSW and the oscillo scope is recorded As a result the state of the alignment is returned Alignment is required only once after setup If alignment was performed successfully the alignment data is stored on the oscilloscope Thus alignment need only be repeated if one of the following applies e Anew oscilloscope is connected to the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector of the R amp S FSW e Anew cable is used between the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector of the R amp S FSW and the oscilloscope e Anew firmware is installed on the oscilloscope Return values lt State gt Returns the state of the second alignment step ON 1 Alignment was successful OFF 0 Alignment was not yet performed successfully Example SYST
178. RR COLL ACQ THR WAI Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Retrieve the measured frequencies 10 Hz 600 kHz TRAC DATA X TRACE1 Retrieve the measured power levels 0 between 10 Hz and 100 kHz below generator minimum frequency nominal 5dBm as of 100 kHz TRAC DATA TRACE1 Retrieve the normalized power levels power offsets from calibration results Should be 0 for all sweep points directly after calibration SENS CORR STAT ON TRAC DATA TRACE1 p 2 2 22 Changing the display of the calibration results Shift the reference line so the 5 dB level is displayed in the center DISP TRAC Y SCAL RVAL 5DB DISP TRAC Y SCAL RPOS 50PCT 10 4 1 8 Working with Power Sensors The following commands describe how to work with power sensors e Configuring Power Gensors enne enne nennen nis 261 e Configuring Power Sensor Measurement cccscccccessssseeeessscaeeeessessaeesesssaaeess 263 Triggering with Power EE 269 Configuring Power Sensors This command turns automatic assignment of a power sensor to the power sensor index on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET CONF AUTO OFF Manual operation See Select on page 134 Configuring I Q Analyzer Measurements SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt This command queries the number of power sensors currently connected to
179. S 333 CAL Culate nz M Abker mz LUNKTOMAbRkercmz essa nn nsns nnns nans 334 CALCulatesmMARKersm D STAT 3a e ctae i eue eut euet err t e e eb etd 334 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACE cccccccccessseceencceceesecesssceseascceseaceeeseeeeeeaceeeseaeessaees 334 GAL Culatesn gt MARKES m gt X i cesscccaadessicdadacasdecadaadeassadscceaehccadadessanndccessceedeadeesandeacdsetens 334 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF This command turns all delta markers off lt m gt is irrelevant Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK State This command links delta marker lt m gt to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position x value of marker 1 delta marker m changes its horizontal position to the same value Tip to link any marker to a different marker than marker 1 use the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt or CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt commands Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 LINK ON Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 183 IO Analysis CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt State This command links delta marker m1 to any active normal marker m2 If you change the horizontal position of marker m2 delta marker m1 changes its
180. SCilloscope ALIGnment STEP STATe 273 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment DATE sss 273 Sv Tem CGOMMunicateRDEVice OGCHoscope IDN 274 Gv Tem CGOMMunicateRDEVice OGCHoscope LEDGtate se seeeeseeereee reese erneer eneren 274 Gv Tem CGOMMunicateRDEVice OGCHloscope TChim nnne 274 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VDEVice essen 275 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VFIRmware esee 275 TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling EEEEEEREEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEREEEE ENNER KEENT 275 EXPort WAVeform DISPlayoff lt FastExport gt Enables or disables the display update on the oscilloscope during data acquisition with the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 As soon as the R amp S FSW B2000 is activated see B2000 State on page 127 the display on the oscilloscope is turned off to improve performance during data export As soon as the R amp S FSW closes the connection to the oscilloscope the display is reacti vated and the oscilloscope can be operated as usual However if the LAN connection is lost for any reason the display of the oscilloscope remains deactivated Use this command to re activate it Parameters lt FastExport gt ON OFF ON Disables the display update for maximum export speed OFF Enables the display update The export is slower RST ON Configuring I Q Analyzer Measurements SYSTem COMMunicate
181. SW If necessary you can optimize the reference level further by manually decreasing the attenuation level to the lowest possible value before an overload occurs then decreas ing the reference level in the same way When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 the level measurement is performed on the connected oscilloscope Y axis scaling on the oscil loscope is limited to a minimum of 5mV per division You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 174 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 311 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto Resets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the default value Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 309 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual This function allows you to change the measurement duration for automatic setting adjustments Enter the value in seconds Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 309 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 309 Upper Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower
182. Sensor Config softkey 2 Selectthe tab that is assigned to the power sensor you want to zero 3 Press the Zeroing Power Sensor button A dialog box is displayed that prompts you to disconnect all signals from the input of the power sensor 4 Disconnect all signals sending input to the power sensor and press ENTER to con tinue 5 Wait until zeroing is complete A corresponding message is displayed How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External PSE Trigger The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to configure a power sensor to be used as an external power sensor trigger To configure a power sensor as an external power sensor PSE trigger 1 Connect a compatible power sensor to the Power Sensor interface on the front panel of the R amp S FSW For details on supported sensors see Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Trigger on page 131 2 Setup the power sensor as described in How to Set Up a Power Sensor on page 137 3 In the Power Sensor tab of the Input dialog box select the External Power Trig ger option 4 Enter the power level at which a trigger signal is to be generated External Trigger Level and the other trigger settings for the power sensor trigger 5 Press the TRIG key and then select Trigger Gate Config 6 In the Trigger and Gate dialog box select Signal Source PSE The R amp S FSW is configured to trigger when the defined conditions for the power sensor oc
183. Signal ID lower side band Auto ID Tolerance for the comparison of test sweep and reference Since the LO frequency is displaced downwards in the reference sweep the conver sion loss of the mixer may differ from that of the test sweep This is due to the fact that the LO output power of the R amp S FSW varies with the frequency and also due to the non ideal characteristics of the mixer A certain tolerance should therefore be permitted for the comparison of the signal levels in the test sweep and reference sweep A user defined threshold is used to determine deviations Auto ID detection threshold Real input signals are displayed at the same frequency in the test and reference sweeps i e theoretically identical signal levels are expected at the frequency of the real mixer product in both sweeps If the level difference is lower than the the user defined threshold the signal obtained in the test sweep is displayed If a signal occurs only in the test sweep or reference sweep it is an unwanted mixer product The level of this signal is compared to the noise floor in the other sweep If the S N ratio is suffi ciently large the threshold is exceeded This means that the signal with the lower level i e noise in this case is displayed Note that the Auto ID method operates according to the fail safe principle i e unwan ted mixer products may not be detected as such but signals which are in fact real input signals are not b
184. Signal parameters for programming example carrier frequency 5GHz peak power 10 dBm bandwidth 22MHz Note For a bandwidth of 22 MHz a sampe rate of 27 5 MHz is required Table 10 5 Required I Q data acquisition parameters for TRAC IQ SET command Filter type Normal Sample Rate 27 5 MHz Trigger Source External 10 11 5 Programming Examples Trigger Slope Positive Pretrigger Samples 0 Number of Samples 1000 jenes Preparing the instrument RST Sets the instrument to a defined default status FREQ CENT 5GHz Sets the center frequency to 5 GHz DISP TRAC1 Y RLEV 10dBm Sets the reference level to 10 dBm TRACE IQ STATE ON Enables acquisition of I Q data TRAC IQ SET NORM 50MHz 27 5MHz EXT POS 0 1000 Configures the measurement Only the sample rate and trigger source settings are relevant to the digital baseband interface The other parameters can be set to their default values as listed above OUTPUT DIQ ON Enables digital I Q data output interface 5sssessseess Performing the measurement INIT IMM Starts data acquisition and transmission to the output connector Output via the Optional Digital Baseband Interface This example demonstrates how to output I Q data to a connected instrument via the optional Digital Baseband Interface using the I Q Analyzer in a remote environment The data to outp
185. T 311 ESSI aec eseu EES ENEE SEH 312 DISPlay FORMat Format This command determines which tab is displayed Configuring the Result Display Parameters Format SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGle Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Example DISP FORM SPL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on page 315 Parameters lt Size gt LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG 10 5 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channe
186. T3 IFPower For IMM mode gating is automatically deactivated RST IMM Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements lt TriggerSlope gt Used trigger slope POSitive NEGative RST POS lt PretriggerSamp gt Defines the trigger offset in terms of pretrigger samples Nega tive values correspond to a trigger delay This value also defines the interval between the trigger signal and the gate edge in samples Range 461373339 to 461373339 RST 0 lt NumberSamples gt Number of measurement values to record including the pretrig ger samples See chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 25 For digital input via the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 the valid number of samples is described in chapter 5 2 3 Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Digital UO Data on page 39 RST 1001 Example TRAC IQ SET NORM 0 32MHz EXT POS 0 2048 Reads 2048 l Q values starting at the trigger point sample rate 32 MHz trigger External slope Positive TRAC TO SET NORM 0 4 MHz EXT POS 1024 512 Reads 512 I Q values from 1024 measurement points before the trigger point filter type NORMAL sample rate 4 MHz trigger External slope Positive Manual operation See Record Length on page 166 TRACe IQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command sets the final user sample rate for the acquired UO data Thus the user sample rate can be modified without affecting the actual dat
187. TE EYE ER oed TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval eese nennen arae eE KVERNET STEEP 294 UNIT n PMET6ersp POWE vvhen ir rere th rrt rene et ne ee E a re a aTa UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer RATio Index Symbols user M 287 A Aborting KU MTECM 171 172 ACIDE Coupling EE 100 Activating VQ Analyzer E 214 Active probe MICKODUTON EE 119 Alignment B2000 EE 78 128 Amplitude Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 148 V el ue UCL TE 144 ife rro 152 Iur 144 Analog Baseband Amplitude settings n caer en tnn 148 Input e lee due EE 116 Signal processing EE 42 Analog Baseband B71 Full scale level rre 151 Tied edeeoastiierseceactes 117 Input type remote control seeees 232 Analog Baseband connector RF IDDIE e 50 Analog Baseband Interface BASICS R teats Cali rato oec Connectors Full scale level etc EE Input sis oampl rate orte ner ciere nes 44 lee Gin E 45 Analog Baseband Interface B71 Amplitude settings erre tne 148 Input settings eter eterne 116 Analog input Analog Baseband Interface sssssssss 44 Analysis Bandwidth rre ren ence Bandwidth definition seeeesssessssss l Q data remote E Interval MSRA MSRT
188. TP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMW200A 101190 CODER 1 IN 0 200000000 Passed Done 0 0 Manual operation See Output Settings Information on page 143 See Connected Instrument on page 144 10 4 1 4 Configuring Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface The following commands are required to control the optional Analog Baseband Inter face in a remote environment They are only available if this option is installed For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface see chapter 5 3 Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface on page 42 For a programming example see chapter 10 11 6 Data Acquisition via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface on page 375 Useful commands for Analog Baseband data described elsewhere INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 224 SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 285 Commands for the Analog Baseband calibration signal are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands exclusive to Analog Baseband data input and output INPutiO ET KN RE EEN INPUEIO RTE H e E 231 Elle BEER EE EEN INPut IQ TYPE EE 232 CALibratiom AIQ DCOFfSet 2 recited rare eh a tre rn aa aa a aiia aTa a Eaa EE 232 e Ee Ke Kier ee EE 232 CALibration AIQ HATiming S TATe 222 2 2 222 20 rendisni aaia 233 RE Ge APCO STATO EE 233 Niro eH 234 TRACEIQAPCOODB EE 234 Eire IQAPCOm RESU M 234 Configuring UO Analyze
189. The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a posi tive edge NEGative The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a neg ative edge RST POSitive Example PMET2 TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 137 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger STATe State This command turns the external power trigger on and off This command requires the use of an R amp S NRP Z81 power sensor Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF 10 4 1 9 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Example PMET2 TRIG ON Switches the external power trigger on Manual operation See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 136 Configuring the 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 The following commands are required to use the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 For details on prerequisites and restrictions see chapter 5 4 7 Basics on the 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 Option on page 76 See also the command for configuring triggers while using the optional 2 GHz band width extension R amp S FSW B2000 TRIGger SEQuence 0OSCilloscope COUPling on page 275 Remote commands exclusive to configuring the 2 GHz bandwidth extension EXPortWAWVeforntDISPIayelT ecibeesa qa ie e geess EES 272 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope STATel ne eenen eeesrerersre e 273 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice O
190. Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is high lighted Remote command Selected via numeric suffix of TRACe lt 1 6 gt commands DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 327 Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Average Count determines the number of averaging procedures View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 326 Detector Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis The trace detector is used to combine multiple FFT window results to create the final spectrum Note in previous versions of the R amp S FSW the I Q Analyzer always used the linear average detector If necessary the trace detector is
191. UN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 320 Display Configuration The captured signal can be displayed using various evaluation methods All evaluation methods available for the current application are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode when you do one of the following Select the EJ SmartGrid icon from the toolbar Select the Display Config button in the Overview e Select the Display Config softkey in the main application menu For a description of the available evaluation methods see chapter 4 Measurement and Result Displays on page 18 Up to 6 evaluations can be displayed in the UO Analyzer at any time including several graphical diagrams marker tables or peak lists The selected evaluation method not only affects the result display in a window but also the results of the trace data query in remote control see TRACe n DATA on page 357 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings In order to do so a measurement is performed The duration of this measurement can be defined automatically or manually To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where
192. UO BW 10 MHz 28 MHz B28 U28 40 MHz B40 U28 U40 or B28 U40 80 MHz B80 U28 U40 U80 or B28 U40 U80 or B40 U80 Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input Max usable Required B option Required U option s UO BW 160 MHz B160 U28 U40 U80 U160 or B28 U40 U80 U160 or B40 U80 U160 or B80 U160 320 MHz B320 U28 U40 U80 U160 U320 or B28 U40 U80 U160 U320 or B40 U80 U160 U320 or B80 U160 U320 or B160 U320 500 MHz B500 See data sheet 2000 MHz B2000 B2000 5 1 1 2 Relationship Between Sample Rate Record Length and Usable UO Bandwidth Up to the maximum bandwidth the following rule applies Usable LO bandwidth 0 8 Output sample rate Regarding the record length the following rule applies Record length Measurement time sample rate Maximum record length for RF input The maximum record length that is the maximum number of samples that can be cap tured depends on the sample rate For activated option B320 or U320 see table 5 3 For activated option B500 see table 5 4 Table 5 1 Maximum record length without HO bandwidth extension options B320 U320 B500 Sample rate Maximum record length 100 Hz to 200 MHz 440 MSamples precisely 461373440 440 1024 1024 samples 200 MHz to 10 GHz 220 MSamples upsampling MSRA master 200 MHz to 600 MHz MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz 160
193. UO enhanced mode on page 40 The only data source that can be used for digital baseband output is RF input For details on digital UO output see chapter 5 2 2 Digital Output on page 37 Remote command OUTPut DIQ on page 229 Output Settings Information Displays information on the settings for output via the optional Digital Baseband Inter face The following information is displayed Maximum sample rate that can be used to transfer data via the Digital Baseband Interface i e the maximum input sample rate that can be processed by the con nected instrument IESSE User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 143 Amplitude e Sample rate currently used to transfer data via the Digital Baseband Interface e Level and unit that corresponds to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level Remote command OUTPut DIQ CDEVice on page 229 Connected Instrument Displays information on the instrument connected to the optional Digital Baseband Interface if available If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed e Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face e Used port Remote command OUTPut DIQ CDEVice on page 229 6 4 Amplitude The amplitude is configured in the Amplitude dialog box Amplitude settings are iden tical to the Spectrum application except for a new scaling function for UO Vector and Real Imag results see Y Axis Max on page 153
194. Up to two markers are displayed in the diagram area If more markers are active the marker table is displayed automatically Remote command DISPlay MTABle on page 335 Marker Info Turns the marker information displayed in the diagram on and off 1Pk Clrw Remote command DISPlay MINFo STAT on page 335 Marker Stepsize Defines the size of the steps that the marker position is moved using the rotary knob Standard The marker position is moved in Span 1000 steps which corre sponds approximately to the number of pixels for the default display of 1001 sweep points This setting is most suitable to move the marker over a larger distance User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 185 7 2 2 QD 7 2 2 1 Marker Usage Sweep The marker position is moved from one sweep point to the next This Points setting is required for a very precise positioning if more sweep points are collected than the number of pixels that can be displayed on the Screen It is the default mode Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m X SSIZe on page 336 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions Access Overview gt Analysis gt Marker gt Search or MKR TO Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily or to use the current marker position to define another characteristic value In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search res
195. User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 21 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Measurement and Result Displays 2 Marker Peak List NG Stimuli 1 o Tip To navigate within long marker peak lists simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PEAK see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 313 Results CALCulate n MARKercm X on page 334 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 361 User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 22 Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input 5 Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Pro 5 1 cessing Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used when describing UO data acquisition on the R amp S FSW in general and in the UO Analyzer application in par ticular is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration set tings The UO Analyzer provides various possibilities to acquire the UO data to be analyzed e Capturing analog UO data from the RF INPUT connector e Capturing digital UO data from the optional Digital Baseband Interface e Capturing analog UO data from the optional Analog Baseband Interface for exam ple from active probes e Capturing analog UO data from the optional Analog Baseband Interface and redi recting it to the RF input path e Importing UO data from a file Background information for all these scenarios and more is provided in the following sections e Processing Analog I Q Data from R
196. V OSC LEDS Result GREEN Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip Address Defines the TCPIP address or computer name of the oscilloscope connected to the R amp S FSW via LAN Note The IP address is maintained after a PRESET and is transferred between appli cations Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters Address computer name or IP address Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC TCP 192 0 2 0 Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC TCP FSW43 12345 Manual operation See TCPIP Address or Computer name on page 128 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VDEVice Queries whether the connected instrument is supported by the 2 GHz bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B2000 For details see chapter 5 4 7 2 Prerequisites and Measurement Setup on page 77 Return values State ON 1 Instrument is supported OFF 0 Instrument is not supported Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC VDEV Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VFIRmware Queries whether the firmware on the connected oscilloscope is supported by the 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 option Return values lt State gt ON 1 Firmware is supported OFF 0 Firmware is not supported Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC VFIR Usage Query only TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling lt CoupType gt Configures the coupling of the external trigger to the osc
197. a capturing settings on the R amp S FSW Note The smaller the user sample rate the smaller the usable UO bandwidth see chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 25 In order to ensure a minimum usable UO bandwidth use the TRACe 10 WBANd MBWIDTH on page 307 command Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt SampleRate gt The valid sample rates are described in chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 25 RST 32 MHz Manual operation See Sample Rate on page 164 TRACe IQ TPISample This command queries the time offset between the sample start and the trigger event trigger point in sample TPIS Since the R amp S FSW usually samples with a much higher sample rate than the specific application actually requires the trigger point determined internally is much more precise than the one determined from the down sampled data in the application Thus the TPIS indicates the offset between the sam ple start and the actual trigger event TPIS sample trigger start event This value can only be determined in triggered measurements using external or IFPower triggers otherwise the value is 0 This command is not available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active and not for bandwidths 80 MHz Example TRAC IQ TPIS Result for a sample rate of 1 MHz between 0 and 1 1 MHz i e between 0 and 1 us
198. a is to be acquired is configured in the Bandwidth dialog box LE Ei Poesie e EE 163 EE e IUE 169 Data Acquisition The data acquisition settings define which parts of the input signal are captured for fur ther evaluation in the applications They are configured in the Data Acquisition tab of the Bandwidth dialog box gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Bandwidth button in the configuration Overview e Select the BW key and then the Data Acquisition softkey e Select the Data Acquisition softkey in the I Q Analyzer menu Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settings tMiewr S Spectrum gt TD SCDMA BTS 4 IQ Analyzer 1 Data Acquisition Sweep Data Acquisition ES Iv Advanced Fourier Transformation Params Sample Rate Transformation Analysis Bandwidth Algorithm Averaging ABW FFT Length 4096 Maximum Bandwidth Vd ER Te E Flattop amplitude acc Window Overlap 0 75 Meas Time Window Length 4096 Record Length S SES Visualization Swap I Q Frequency Resolution RBW Fig 6 4 Data acquisition settings with advanced FFT parameters MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the UO Analyzer application in MSRA MSRT mode define the analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW
199. a new measurement single sweep or new sweep start in continuous sweep mode is started bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 is installed e digital output is activated atrigger is activated e anoutput sample rate greater than 100 MHz is used Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Digital UO Data Definitions Clock rate the rate at which data is physically transmitted between the R amp S FSW and the connected device both instruments must be able to process data at this rate the clock rate of the R amp S FSW at the output connector is 142 9 MHz using the Digital UO enhanced mode a data transfer rate of up to 200 Msps is possible Input sample rate ISR the sample rate of the useful data provided by the con nected instrument to the digital input User Output Sample rate SR the sample rate that is defined by the user e g in the Data Aquisition dialog box in the I Q Analyzer application and which is used as the basis for analysis or sent to the digital output e Usable UO Analysis bandwidth the bandwidth range in which the signal remains unchanged by the digital decimation filter and thus remains undistorted this range can be used for accurate analysis by the R amp S FSW Slow UO measurements When captured data is transferred and further processed with a slower rate than the rate with which the signal was sampled this is referred to as a Slow I Q measurement For example assume an analog signal is sample
200. a o rne redire edie 41 5 2 1 Digital Input Digital UO data can be used as an alternative data input source for measurements with the R amp S FSW Connecting the digital input instrument The instrument that provides digital input must be connected to the R amp S Digital Base band Interface on the R amp S FSW Information on the detected input instrument is shown in the Digital UO Input Source configuration dialog You can configure the basic connection settings e g the input sample rate It is recommended that you use the R amp S SMU Z6 1415 0201 02 cable to connect other devices to the Digital Baseband Interface of the R amp S FSW Processing digital input The digital UO data stream is fed into the analyzer via the connector of the optional dig ital baseband interface There is no need to equalize any IF filter or mix the signal into the complex baseband The digital hardware just has to ensure that the final I Q data stored in the record buffer has the correct sample rate The digital input signal is brought to the desired sample rate using a downsampling fil ter and fractional resampling The word length of the data is 18 bits fixed point for each and Q The resulting data can be processed by the selected application As illustrated in figure 5 9 the usable sample rate for analysis is dependent on the input sample rate Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface Data acquisition hardware Input Sample
201. a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps on the Trace tab if necessary increase the Average Count e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the signal on the Marker tab How to Capture or Output I Q Data via Optional Interfaces 8 2 How to Capture or Output UO Data via Optional Inter faces 8 2 1 The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to capture UO data on the R amp S FSW using the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 How to Capture Data via the Optional Digital Baseband Interface 196 How to Capture Analog Baseband Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Inter face RES E Ai RE 197 How to Capture Data from the Optional Baseband Input Connectors R amp S FSW B77 aS RF WOU m 199 How to Output UO Data via the Optional Digital Baseband Interface 200 How to Capture Data via the Optional Digital Baseband Interface Alternatively to capturing analog UO data from the standard RF Input connector of the R amp S FSW digital UO data can be captured from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face if installed The digital input and output cannot be used simultaneously Connect the device that provides digital input to the DIGITAL BASEBAND INPUT connector at the rear of the R amp S FSW Press the INPUT OUTPUT key o
202. able below for available parameter values Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY ADD 1 LEFT MTAB Result y 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See Magnitude on page 18 See Spectrum on page 19 See Q Vector on page 20 See Real Imag I Q on page 20 See Marker Table on page 21 See Marker Peak List on page 21 Table 10 3 lt WindowType gt parameter values for IQ Analyzer application Parameter value Window type FREQ Spectrum MAGN Magnitude MTABle Marker table PEAKIist Marker peak list RIMAG Real Imag UO VECT UO Vector Configuring the Result Display LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active mea surement channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result At 2 1 1 Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Q
203. acsacesecetevscssscassetssceaecsenesasteecacresnenedasseesassazontentersedoe 264 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude 0 0 cece cece eeene teres cere tees teeeseeeteeeseeeeteeeeeaeeneeees 263 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE cece cece eeee eee eens eee eeeneeeneeeenes 264 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS ALINe SHOW ee EE RUE E ERC 352 GALGulate sn RTMS WINBowWs t IVAL n conata erret rn ntt dr n reno etn Penes 352 GALGulate n THReshold to rrr ere rather tnnc enero rr ae Re rong e a dba Do AVS ah 339 CALC latesnz D br chao c M 339 GAL e En E UNIT POW E 279 VE AE le Ile H re e E 232 CALibration AIQ DCOFfset Q GALibration AIQ BIATiming S TAT isset rne err nen nir tire tr erre rts GALibration PMETer p ZERO AUTO ONGE 6 rhet ri rrt ere traheret pha erar roin n d ER DIAGNOStic SERVICE NS OUNCE T DISPlay EE e SE e Ibis ECH KREE II ORT DISPlay WINDowsri SIZE err rtr t teret ert o cn doe eter n npo DISPlay WINDowsn TRAGCe xt MODE nn tenerent ri hinh then tnr cnin DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE HCONtinuous essent DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SMOothing APERture DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SMOothing STATe DISPlay WINDow lt n TRACES X Te ME DISPlay WINBDowsrn TRACest Y SCALe eetui ttt tnter de
204. active see chapter 6 3 1 8 Settings for 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 on page 127 For details see chapter 5 4 7 6 Triggering on page 79 Note Since the external trigger uses a second channel on the oscilloscope the maxi mum memory size and thus record length available for the input channel 1 is reduced by half For details see the oscilloscope s data sheet and documentation Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 292 IF Power Trigger Source Trigger Source The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or UO measurements the third IF represents the center frequency This trigger source is only available for RF input It is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband Interface The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered Trigger Settings When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 with an IF power trigger For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG S
205. age 255 GPIB Address TCP IP Address For LAN connections TCP IP address of the signal generator For GPIB connections GPIB address of the signal generator Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RDEVice GENerator ADDRess on page 255 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRess on page 256 Reference Selects the internal R amp S FSW or an external frequency reference to synchronize the R amp S FSW with the generator default internal Remote command SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator SOURce on page 254 Edit Generator Setup File Displays the setup file for the currently selected Generator Type in read only mode in an editor Although the existing setup files are displayed in read only mode in the editor they can be saved under a different name using File gt SaveAs Be careful however to adhere to the required syntax and commands Errors will only be detected and displayed when you try to use the new generator see also chap ter 5 4 5 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 74 For details see chapter 5 4 5 3 Generator Setup Files on page 68 Frequency Min Frequency Max For reference only Lower and upper frequency limit for the generator Level Min Level Max For reference only Lower and upper power limit for the generator Data Input and Output Settings Measurement Settings The measurement settings for external generator control are configured in the Mea sur
206. ained in the capture buffer Range pretrigger time to min posttrigger time sweep time RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 169 10 8 Retrieving Results The following commands can be used to retrieve the results of the UO Analyzer mea surement Storing large amounts of UO data When storing large amounts of UO data to a file consider the following tips to improve performance e f capturing and storing the I Q data is the main goal of the measurement and eval uation functions are not required use the basic HO data acquisition mode see TRACe IQ STATe on page 220 e Use a HiSlip or raw socket connection to export the data from the R amp S FSW to a PC e Export the data in binary format rather than ASCII format see chapter A 2 For mats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 378 e Use the Compatible or IQPair data mode see chapter A 3 Reference Format Description for UO Data Files on page 379 e If only an extract of the available data is relevant use the TRACe lt n gt DATA MEMory command to store only the required section of data e j elrevirig Captured VO DAA cott tnter Cerda rt dt reti 353 e dRetneving VQ Trace Data cinereo ie eR 356 Retrieving Marker Resulls EE 359 10 8 1 Retrieving Captured UO Data The captured UO data is output in the form of a list three different formats can be selected for this list see TRACe 10 DATA F
207. al Baseband Baseband Baseband Baseband output input output input ua Je IT a data R amp S Ex I Q Box Signal and Spectrum Analyzer R amp S FSW Output of digital UO data to a device with a user specific interface using an R amp S EX IQ BOX see the R amp S9EX IQ BOX External Signal Interface Module Man ual LVDS LVDS Digital Digital Custom Custom Baseband Baseband Baseband Baseband output input output input gt eee ig l ces ae data R amp S Ex I Q Box Signal and Spectrum Analyzer R amp S FSW o R amp S EX IQ BOX and R amp S DiglConf The R amp S EX IQ BOX is a configurable interface module that converts signal properties and the transmission protocol of the R amp S instruments into user defined or standardized signal formats and vice versa The latest R amp S EX IQ BOX model 1409 5505K04 provides the configuration software R amp S DiglConf which can be installed directly on the R amp S FSW The software R amp S Dig IConf Digital Interface Configurator for the R amp S EX IQ BOX version 2 10 or higher controls the protocol data and clock settings of the R amp S EX IQ BOX independently from the connected R amp S instrument Besides basic functions of the user defined proto cols this software utility supports the settings for standardized protocols as e g CPRI OBSAI or DigRF Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN to the R amp S FSW in a
208. al Digital Baseband Interface Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 100 INPut DPATh lt State gt Enables or disables the use of the direct path for frequencies close to 0 Hz Parameters lt State gt AUTO 1 Default the direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to 0 Hz OFF 0 The analog mixer path is always used RST 1 Example INP DPAT OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Direct Path on page 101 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional high pass filter hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP FILT HPAS ON Turns on the filter Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 101 INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special condit
209. al Generator Control option is installed For each measurement chan nel one external generator can be configured To switch between different configura tions define multiple measurement channels To display this dialog box press the INPUT OUPUT key and then select External Generator Config For more information on external generator control see chapter 5 4 5 Basics on Exter nal Generator Control on page 62 Data Input and Output Settings e Interface Configuration Settings eren eene ne ehe 120 e Measurement Le EE 122 e Source Calibration FUNctions enne nnns 124 Interface Configuration Settings The interface settings for the connection to the external generator are defined in the Interface Configuration subtab of the External Generator tab rat i E ep D in Ahm paw Input Source Power Sensor External Generator Probes Interface Settings Source Capabilities Measurement Configuration Generator Type Frequency Min Interface Interface Frequency Max Configuration TTL Handshake Level Min Source Calibration GPIB Address Level Max Reference Edit Generator Setup File For more information on configuring interfaces see the Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols section in the R amp S FSW User Manual EMT RE TE 120 lusum 120 NEL EE 121 GPIB Address ee El tret rete rete ett ne 121 aiio m E 121 Edt Generator Selup PIG ite rr rn rtt rere e ie 121 Frequency Min Frequency Max 121
210. al operation See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 123 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator Value This command defines the numerator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the ana lyzer Source Freq RE Numerator Offset Denominator Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST 1 Example SOUR EXT FREQ NUM 4 SOUR EXT FREQ DEN 3 Sets a multiplication factor of 4 3 i e the transmit frequency of the generator is 4 3 times the analyzer frequency Manual operation See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 123 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines the frequency offset of the generator with reference to the ana lyzer frequency Select the offset such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the analyzer Numerator Source Freq RF 4 Offset Denominator Parameters lt Offset gt numeric value gt specified in Hz kHz MHz or GHz rounded to the nearest Hz RST 0 Hz Ex
211. al operation See Unit Scale on page 135 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer RATio lt Unit gt This command selects the unit for relative power sensor measurements lt n gt is irrele vant Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Unit gt DB PCT RST DB Example UNIT PMET POW RAT DB Manual operation See Unit Scale on page 135 Triggering with Power Sensors SENS amp TPMETersps TRIGGER TMG ca o tote peto venti etta ede ttis 269 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HOLDOoff 2 2 mi rici eint eeeco cocco oe tano ENER EEN 270 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HYSTeresis esiste 270 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger LEVel esses ai aiad aaia 271 BENSE PME Ters p gt TRIGO e 271 SENSe PMETer lt sp gt TRIGgern STAT E nnii EEN dca 271 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger DTIMe Time This command defines the time period that the input signal has to stay below the IF power trigger level before the measurement starts Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Time gt Range Os to 1s Increment 100 ns RST 100 us Example PMET2 TRIG DTIMe 0 001 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HOLDoff lt Holdoff gt This command defines the trigger holdoff for external power triggers Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Holdoff gt Time period that has to pass between the trigger event and the s
212. al trigger use the External CH3 trigger source and define which type of coupling the trigger connector on the oscilloscope is to use 8 Start a new sweep with the defined settings 8 4 How to Export and Import UO Data UO data can only be exported in applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Capturing and exporting UO data 1 Press the PRESET key 2 Press the MODE key and select the I Q Analyzer application or any other applica tion that supports UO data Configure the data acquisition Press the RUN SINGLE key to perform a single sweep measurement Select the EJ Save icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Export softkey In the file selection dialog box select a storage location and enter a file name o no OF o Select Save The captured data is stored to a file with the extension iq tar Importing UO data 1 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports UO data If necessary switch to single sweep mode by pressing the RUN SINGLE key Select the FJ Open icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Import softkey gx EB oo mw Select the storage location and the file name with the iq tar file extension How to Export and Import I Q Data 6 Select Open The stored data is loaded from the file and displayed in the current application Previewing the UO data in a web browser The iq tar file format allows you to previ
213. aling in percentages from 0 to 100 cent Absolute The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the refer ence level not available for Linear Percent 6 5 Frequency Settings Relative The scaling is in dB relative to the reference level only available for logarithmic units dB The upper line of the grid reference level is always at 0 dB Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SPACing on page 284 DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe MODE on page 283 Y Axis Max Defines the maximum value of the y axis in the currently selected diagram in either direction in Volts Thus the y axis scale starts at lt Y Axis Max and ends at lt Y Axis Max The maximum y axis value depends on the current reference level If the reference level is changed the Y Axis Max value is automatically set to the new reference level in V This command is only available if the evaluation mode for the UO Analyzer is set to IQ Vector or Real Imag Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe on page 283 Frequency Settings Access Overview Frequency or FREQ gt Frequency Config Freq Center Stepsize Value Frequency Offset Value 0 0 Hz In Le EE 153 Center Frequency EE 154 Fregueney OSEE E 154 Center frequency Defines the center frequency of the signal in Hertz 6 6 Trigger Settings The allowed range of values for the center freq
214. amp S FSW B2000 Option on page 76 viDeo The displayed video signal i e the filtered and detected IF sig nal 200mV is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output con nector This setting is required to provide demodulated audio frequen cies at the output RST IF OUTP IF VID Selects the video signal for the IF VIDEO DEMOD output con nector Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Manual operation See IF Video Output on page 140 OUTPut IF IFFRequency Frequency This command defines the frequency for the IF output of the R amp S FSW The IF fre quency of the signal is converted accordingly This command is available in the time domain and if the IF VIDEO DEMOD output is configured for IF If the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector is used TRACe IQ WBANd ON see TRACe 10 WBANd STATe on page 306 this command is available as a query only It returns the used IF output frequency which is defined automatically by the application accord ing to the center frequency For more information see chapter 5 4 10 IF and Video Signal Output on page 84 Parameters Frequency RST 50 0 MHz Manual operation See IF Wide Out Frequency on page 141 10 4 2 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling The following commands are required to configure the amplitude and vertical axis set tings in a remote environment e Amplitude ec r ndgp m 278 Gohfigurimng the ABBIiallbpl TEE 280 e Configuring a Preamplifl
215. ample SOUR EXT FREQ OFFS 10HZ Sets an offset of the generator output frequency compared to the analyzer frequency of 10 Hz Manual operation See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 123 SOURce EXTernal POWer LEVel lt Level gt This command sets the output power of the selected generator Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters Level numeric value RST 20 dBm Example SOUR EXT POW 30dBm Sets the generator level to 30 dBm Manual operation See Source Power on page 122 SOURce EXTernal STATe State This command activates or deactivates the connected external generator Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Source State on page 122 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a level offset for the external generator level Thus for exam ple attenuators or amplifiers at the output of the external generator can be taken into account for the setting Parameters Offset Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example SOUR POW OFFS 10dB Sets the level offset of the external generator to 20 dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Source Offset on page 122 Interface Configuration The following commands are required to configure the interface for the connection to the external generator ee NEI e Ee ET D 254 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RDEVice GENerator ADDRess
216. an be expor ted for further analysis in external applications For details see chapter 5 5 I Q Data Import and Export on page 85 LEE Senis one eX VAEEEEEEEREEEENEREEEEEEEEEREENEEEEERENNNEEEEEEEEEREEREEEENEEEEEERNKEEEEEn 95 e ImporUEXpOrt lee 97 e Data Input and Output Gettngs nennen 98 CEP ito RE 144 e FREQUENCY SOUINGS cerro ende coe d ta nc i e d oce buds eds 153 e Tugger Settilugjs erectio eere P Peri eid ete E Saar id Vena d eed 154 e Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Gettngs AAA 163 Display Kopntgetenm m 172 e Adjusting Settings Automatically 172 e Configuring an UO Analyzer as an MSRA MSRT Application 175 6 1 Configuration Overview Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus E n gt Ca Overview Configuration Overview Ref Level Level Offset Center Dig BB Out Sample Rate Trigger Out Moos Time Record Length Fig 6 1 Configuration Overview for I Q Analyzer Master In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The individual configuration steps are displayed in the order of the data flow Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel f
217. an be hidden from view manually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not orange AL the line lies within the interval white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e no AL the line lies outside the interval 1 Magnitude Analysis Interval CF 994 9 MHz For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual 5 8 Measurements in the Time and Frequency Domain The UO Analyzer application not Master in multistandard mode can also perform measurements on the captured UO data in the time and frequency domain In order to do so the I Q Analyzer performs an FFT sweep on the captured UO data providing power vs frequency results or uses the RBW filter to obtain power vs time zero span results This data is then used for the common frequency or time domain measure ments provided by the R amp S FSW Spectrum application such as ACLR SEM or CCDF User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 93 Measurements in the Time and Frequency Domain Configuration Apart from the data capturing process the measurements are identical in the Spectrum and UO Analyzer applications They are configured using the same settings and pro vide the same results The Magnitude
218. and Bandwidth Settings e 5 Term Remote command SENSe IQ FFT WINDow TYPE on page 302 Window Overlap Advanced FFT mode Basic settings Defines the part of a single FFT window that is re calculated by the next FFT calcula tion when using multiple FFT windows Remote command SENSe IQ FFT WINDow OVER1lap on page 302 Window Length Advanced FFT mode Basic settings Defines the number of samples to be included in a single FFT window in averaging mode In single mode the window length corresponds to the Record Length on page 166 Values from 3 to 4096 are available in Manual mode in Advanced FFT mode val ues from 3 to 524288 are available However the window length may not be longer than the FFT Length Remote command SENSe IQ FFT WINDow LENGth on page 301 Capture Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA MSRT operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger time 0 In MSRT mode the offset may be negative if a pretrigger time is defined For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum Application and MSRT Operating Mode
219. annel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 218 Activating UO Analyzer Measurements lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN TQAnalyzer2 IQAnalyzer3 Renames the channel with the name IQAnalyzer2 to IQAna lyzer3 Usage Setting only INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command activates a new measurement channel with the defined channel type or selects an existing measurement channel with the specified name Also see INSTrument CREate NEW on page 216 Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 217 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel Example INST IQ Activates a measurement channel for the I Q Analyzer applica tion evaluation mode To start a channel in the simple UO Analyzer mode see Differ ent remote modes available on page 215 use TRACe IQ STATe on page 220 INST MyIQSpectrum Selects the measurement channel named MylQSpectrum for example before executing further commands for that channel Usage SCPI con
220. ardware R amp S FSW R amp S FSW analog IF equalizer filter IF ix downsampler ber sample rate Application 10 GHz 10 GHz sampling clock External Reference Fig 5 26 Signal processing using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 The RF input signal to the R amp S FSW may also be provided from an imported UO data file The data evaluated by the R amp S FSW with the 2 GHz bandwidth extension can also be exported for further processing in another application For details see chapter 5 5 I Q Data Import and Export on page 85 5 4 7 2 Prerequisites and Measurement Setup Use of the 2 GHz bandwidth extension is only available if the following prerequisites apply e R amp S FSW model with at least 26 GHz e The R amp S FSW B2000 option and the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector are installed on the R amp S FSW Asupported R amp S oscilloscope see data sheet with sampling rate 10 GHz or higher bandwidth 4 GHz or more the external reference option B4 a firmware version 2 45 1 1 or higher e The connector of the R amp S FSW is connected to the CH1 input of the oscilloscope Anexternal reference for example the REF OUTPUT 10 MHZ connector of the R amp S FSW or a reference from a signal generator is connected to the REF IN con nector of the oscilloscope The oscilloscope is connected to the R amp S FSW via LAN and the oscilloscope s address is made known to the R amp S FSW e Opt
221. arger than the window length multiple windows are combined the FFT length is 4096 A Flatop window function is used Advanced FFT mode The RBW is determined by the advanced FFT parameters depending on the selected FFT Calculation Methods method FFT Calculation Methods FFT calculation can be performed using different methods Single In single mode one FFT is calculated for the entire record length that means the win dow length is identical to the record length If the defined FFT Length is larger than the record length zeros are appended to the captured data to reach the FFT length IO Analyzer in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode Fig 5 30 FFT parameters for single FFT calculation Averaging In averaging mode several overlapping FFTs are calculated for each record the results are combined to determine the final FFT result for the record The number of FFTs to be combined is determined by the Window Overlap and the Window Length Fig 5 31 FFT parameters for averaged FFT calculation 5 7 UO Analyzer in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode The UO Analyzer can also be used in MSRA and MSRT operating mode The MSRA Master channel is implemented as an UO Analyzer application Only this channel cap tures data in MSRA mode Thus the functions and settings described for data acquisi tion in the UO Analyzer application also apply to the MSRA Master Furthermore the UO Analyzer can be used to analyze data in MSRA mode Thus the resu
222. arly if signals with low power are measured This setting can be used to minimize the influence of noise in the power sensor measurement Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage COUNt on page 267 Duty Cycle Sets the duty cycle to a percent value for the correction of pulse modulated signals and activates the duty cycle correction With the correction activated the sensor calculates the signal pulse power from this value and the mean power Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle STATe on page 265 SENSe PHETer p DCYCle VALue on page 265 Using the power sensor as an external trigger If activated the power sensor creates a trigger signal when a power higher than the defined External Trigger Level is measured This trigger signal can be used as an external power trigger by the R amp S FSW This setting is only available in conjunction with a compatible power sensor Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger STATe on page 271 TRIG SOUR PSE see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 292 External Trigger Level Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the trigger level for the power sensor trigger For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger LEVel on page 271 6 3 2 3 Data Input and Output Settings Hysteresis Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the distance in dB to the
223. as a function of the LO frequency and the selected harmonic of the first LO as follows fin N flo fie R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing pme MM Mr M P SS ae 5 4 4 2 where fin frequency of input signal n order of harmonic used for conversion f o frequency of first LO 7 65 GHz to 17 45 GHz fip intermediate frequency variable defined internally depending on RBW and span Thus depending on the required frequency band the appropriate order of harmonic must be selected For commonly required frequency ranges predefined bands with the appropriate harmonic order setting are provided By default the lowest harmonic order is selected that allows conversion of input signals in the whole band For the band USER the order of harmonic is defined by the user The order of har monic can be between 2 and 61 the lowest usable frequency being 16 53 GHz The frequency ranges for pre defined bands are described in table 10 2 Changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function A Preset band function allows you to restore the original band settings Extending predefined ranges In some cases the harmonics defined for a specific band allow for an even larger fre quency range than the band requires By default the pre defined range is used How ever you can take
224. as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 313 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix in the active measurement channel Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtifyl WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY WIND2 IDEN Queries the name of the result display in window 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow n REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix n from the display in the active measurement channel Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps The result of this command is identical to the 1 3 yout REMove WINDow command Example LAY WIND2 REM Removes the result display in window 2 Usage Event LAY out WINDow lt n gt
225. as for calibration Although approximate normalization is possible it is important to consider the required User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 71 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output frequencies for calibration in advance The frequencies and levels supported by the connected signal generator are provided for reference with the interface configuration Two different methods are available to define the frequencies for calibration that is to couple the frequencies of the R amp S FSW with those of the signal generator Manual coupling a single frequency is defined Automatic coupling a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW the RF fre quency range covers the currently defined span of the R amp S FSW unless limited by the range of the signal generator Automatic coupling If automatic coupling is used the output frequency of the generator source frequency is calculated as follows Numerator Offset Denominator Source Freq RF Output frequency of the generator 5 1 where F cenerator OUtput frequency of the generator Fanalyzer Current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW Numerator multiplication factor for the current analyzer frequency Denominator division factor for the current analyzer frequency Forse frequency offset for the current analyzer frequency for example for frequency
226. aseband is only available if the optional Analog Baseband Interface is instal led Remote command INPut SELect on page 224 UO Mode Defines the format of the input signal For more information see chapter 5 3 3 I Q Processing Modes on page 46 jQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two inputs are required for a complex signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature component Only Low IF I The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT I connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband l If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF I Q Only Low IF Q The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT Q connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband Q If a center frequency greater than O Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF Q Remote command INPut IQ TYPE on page 232 Input Configuration Defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all four Analog Base band connectors or as a plain UO signal via two simple ended lines Note Both
227. at image frequen cies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW which may lead to image frequency display User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 101 6 3 1 2 Data Input and Output Settings Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz There fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Note For the following measurements the YIG Preselector is off by default if available Q Analyzer and thus in all applications in MSRA operating mode Real Time and thus in all applications in MSRT operating mode Multi Carrier Group Delay GSM VSA Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 223 Input Connector Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF INPUT connector default or the optional BASEBAND INPUT I connector This setting is only available if the optional Analog Baseband Interface is installed and active for input It is not available for the R amp S FSW67 or R amp S FSW85 For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command INPut CONNector on page 221 Settings for Input from UO Data Files Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt IQ fi
228. ataType float32 or f1oat64 DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter A 4 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 385 The following data types are allowed int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data float32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary UO data itself has no unit To get an I Q sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed NumberOfChan nels Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the UO data binary file For multi channels the UO samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the UO data file see chapter A 4 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 385 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the UO data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is
229. ate at which samples are captured both values are correlated e Optionally if R amp S FSW B160 B320 is installed the Maximum Bandwidth depending on whether you require a larger bandwidth or fewer spurious emis sions e Measurement Time how long the data is to be captured e Record Length the number of samples to be captured also defined by sam ple rate and measurement time 8 Select the Display Config button and select up to six displays that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 9 Exit the SmartGrid mode 10 Start a new sweep with the defined settings In MSRA MSRT mode you may want to stop the continuous measurement mode by the Sequencer and perform a single data acquisition a Select the Sequencer icon B from the toolbar b Set the Sequencer state to OFF c Select the RUN SINGLE key 8 1 2 How to Analyze Data in the UO Analyzer 1 Select the MODE key and select the I Q Analyzer application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for an UO Analyzer mea surement 3 Select the Display Config button and select up to six displays that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 4 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 5 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analy sis functions in the displays e Configure
230. ative AA 360 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y E GALCulate n DELTamarker m S TATE sisri rater enr etur hen iae rete does jene reser CAL GCulatesn MARKer me AQOEE tr tree reped ee tp pe tegeret ria d peat e bec dep oe gaude GAL Culate n MARKer m FUNCtiOn GENTE coa ou eeu ccena reca met terrere tete ros cec er CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe CAL Culate nz MAbkercmzFEUNGCionFptake OUNEN CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE esses nennen CAL Culate cnz MAh ker mz FUNGCion bake GOHRT eene nnne nnne CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STATe zs CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate eene CAL Culate cnz M Ah ker mzFUNGCionFbteake vg 346 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEeaks X sess seen iea 359 CAL Culate nz MAbkercmzEUNGCiontbteake Vd 346 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEeaks Y CAL Culate nzMAbkercmzFEUNGCionRtterence AA CAL Culate nz MAbkercmz LINK TOMAbkercmz seen K iaia aiaia ia aa inis CALCulatecnz MAbker mzLOEvdude A CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum AUTO o CAL Culatesn gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimuUM EE dg iioc een ri Eder CAL Culate cnz MAh ker mz MAximum NENT CAL Culate nz MAbkercmz MANimumbRlGHt A CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt
231. ator Control Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used for external genera tor control is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration set tings 0 External generator control is only available in the Spectrum UO Analyzer Analog Demodulation and Noise Figure applications External Generator Connections 2 nci ridi reet ee esce cedes 63 Overview of Supported Generators enne 66 Generator Setup Eiles nennen entente 68 Calibration Mechiahlis mi eee i cec credi EE eda a et b d de 68 leien ET re 69 Reference Trace Reference Line and Reference Level 70 Cobpling die le Ee 71 Displayed Information and EITOrS 2 1 eee eere t eco rh aereis 74 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output 5 4 5 1 External Generator Connections The external generator is controlled either via a LAN connection or via the EXT GEN CONTROL GPIB interface of the R amp S FSW supplied with the option For more information on configuring interfaces see the Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols section in the R amp S FSW User Manual TTL synchronization In addition TTL synchronization can be used with some Rohde amp Schwarz generators connected via GPIB The TTL interface is included in the AUX CONTROL connector of the External Generator Control option Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control because the frequency stepping of t
232. available MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA and MSRT operating mode settings related to data acquisition can only be adjusted automatically for the MSRA MSRT Master not the applications Adjusting Settings Automatically When you select an auto adjust function a measurement is performed to determine the optimal settings If you select an auto adjust function for a triggered measurement you are asked how the R amp S FSW should behave e default The measurement for adjustment waits for the next trigger o Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements The measurement for adjustment is performed without waiting for a trigger The trigger source is temporarily set to Free Run After the measurement is com pleted the original trigger source is restored The trigger level is adjusted as fol lows For IF Power and RF Power triggers Trigger Level Reference Level 15 dB For Video trigger Trigger Level 85 96 Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure TRIG on page 310 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All 173 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq esses 173 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 174 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto 174 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual
233. aximum RBW is restricted by the Analysis Bandwidth or by the following equa tion whichever is higher RBW Normalized Bandwidth Sample Rate max 3 If a higher spectral resolution is required the number of samples must be increased by using a higher sample rate or longer record length SSS eee User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 90 5 6 5 Basics on FFT The minimum achievable RBW depends on the sample rate and record length accord ing to the following equation RBW NormalizedBandwidth Sample Rate SE min 4096 Re cord Length To simplify operation some parameters are coupled and automatically calculated such as record length and RBW RBW mode Depending on the selected RBW mode the resolution bandwidth is either determined automatically or can be defined manually Auto mode This is the default mode in the UO Analyzer The RBW is determined automatically depending on the Sample Rate and Window Length where the window length corre sponds to the Record Length or a maximum of 4096 If the record length is larger than the window length multiple windows are combined the FFT length is 4096 A Flatop window function is used Manual mode The RBW can be defined by the user The Window Length is adapted to comply with equation 5 2 Since only window lengths with integer values can be employed the Sample Rate is adapted if necessary to obtain an integer window length value If the record length is l
234. band Incirie m 373 e Output via the Optional Digital Baseband Intertarce A 374 e Data Acquisition via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface 375 Programming Examples 10 11 1 UO Analysis with Graphical Evaluation This example demonstrates how to configure and perform a basic UO data acquisition and analyze the data using the UO Analyzer in a remote environment eege Activating the I Q Analyzer application RST Reset the instrument INST CRE IQ IQANALYZER Creates a new measurement channel named IQANALYZER INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode TRAC IQ SRAT 32MHZ Defines the sample rate TRAC IQ RLEN 1000 Sets the record length number of samples to capture to 1000 samples TRAC IO BWID Queries the bandwidth of the resampling filter determined by the sample rate FORM DATA REAL 32 Formats the data as 32 byte real values TRAC TO DATA FORM IQP Lists all I values first then all Q values in the trace results TRAC IQ AVER ON Defines averaging for the I Q trace TRAC IQ AVER COUN 10 Defines an average over 10 sweeps DISP TRAC1 MODE WRIT DISP TRAC2 MODE MAXH DISP TRAC3 MODE MINH Changes the trace modes INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished TRAC DATA TRACE1 TRAC DATA TRACE2 TRAC DATA TRACE3 Returns the magnitude for each
235. basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACel Setting up Probes Probes can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed SENSe PROBesp SETup GMOPFfsel 2 2 2 cedo crochet iit ee dona uc EEN 248 E Ee lt p gt Ter 249 SENS amp e Te ou 249 SENSe PROBesp SETup MODE 2 2 ci i taii di nnno ci beendet oae d RR aa UE Rad 249 SENSE PROBe Ne E 250 SENSe PROBesp SET p S LAT6 7 iiic dare Teck ap eene a patum cec aptae ee Ra Ra e RA RER ends 250 SENSeTPROBESpS SE TUBE VRE E 250 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup CMOFfset lt CMOffset gt Sets the common mode offset The setting is only available if a differential probe is connected to the R amp S FSW If the probe is disconnected the common mode offset of the probe is reset to 0 0 V For details see chapter 5 4 3 1 Common Mode Offset on page 52 Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Parameters lt CMOffset gt Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 1E 3 RST 0 Default unit V Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Manual operation See Common Mode Offset on page 119 SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID PARTnumber Q
236. basic terms and principles used with external mixers is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings e WBPibqgusnoy E le EE 53 e Two sport and Three port E 54 AS CUM RP 55 e Conversion BE EE 56 e Automatic Signal Identification erre recreo eic 57 Frequency Ranges In a common spectrum analyzer rather than providing one large and thus inaccurate filter or providing several filters to cover the required frequency range of the input sig nal at a high cost a single very accurate filter is used Therefore the input signal must be converted to the frequencies covered by the single accurate filter This is done by a mixer which converts and multiplies the frequency of the input signal with the help of the local oscillator LO The result is a higher and lower intermediate frequency IF The local oscillator can be tuned within the supported frequency range of the input sig nal In order to extend the supported frequency range of the input signal an external mixer can be used In this case the LO frequency is output to the external mixer where it is mixed with the RF input from the original input signal In addition the harmonics of the LO are mixed with the input signal and converted to new intermediate frequencies Thus a wider range of frequencies can be obtained The IF from the external mixer is then returned to the spectrum analyzer The frequency of the input signal can be expressed
237. bed in chap ter A A I Q Data File Format iq tar on page 381 The default storage location for UO data files is C R_S Instr user Remote command INPut FILE PATH on page 225 External Mixer Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer If installed the optional external mixer can be configured from the UO Analyzer applica tion Note that external mixers are not supported in MSRA MSRT mode For details on using external mixers see the R amp S FSW User Manual LEM Eso TD 103 cec UID 107 e Managing Conversion Loss Tables ici edet R 108 e Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables E 110 Mixer Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Mixer Settings or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Mixer Settings In this tab you configure the band and specific mixer settings Data Input and Output Settings Input Source Radio Frequency Mixer Settings Basic Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Band Settings Mixer Type RF Start m RF Stop Handover Freq RF Overrange Preset Band Mixer Settings Range Harmonic Type Harmonic Order Conversion Loss CENNDINEE EE Cr FRE E le EE 105 uicit RN p 105 gg Ke 105 Mixer Settings Harmonics C
238. between analyzer and digital UO data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 10 Digital UO Output Connection Protocol error This bit is set if an error occurred while the connection between analyzer and digital UO data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 11 Digital UO Output FIFO Overload This bit is set if an overload of the Digital UO Output FIFO occurred This happens if the output data rate is higher than the maximal data rate of the connected instrument Reduce the sample rate to solve the problem 12 14 not used 15 This bit is always set to 0 SE User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 367 Querying the Status Registers STATus QUESEBonable DIG CONDIOR acies Deu tbe er da et neo acte pta debui cues 368 STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABle 2 nimis NA Anna RR RR EEE 368 STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRAMNSItiON eese enne nnne 368 STATUS QUESHGnable e MERL Le DEE 369 STATus QUEStlonable DIGDEVENI 1o uiae te erroe tco ha eoa aac P NEEN AER 369 STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active chann
239. button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate on page 296 Digital UO Output Settings The optional Digital Baseband Interface allows you to output UO data from any R amp S FSW application that processes UO data to an external device The configuration settings for digital UO output can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dialog box These settings are only available if the Digital Baseband Interface option is installed on the R amp S FSW Digital UO output is also available with bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 However see the note regarding Digital UO output and B500 option on page 39 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Configuration Output Meas Time 31 28i us Gate 2 Mo Output Digital IQ Digital Baseband Output Output Settings Max Sample Rate 100 MHz Sample Rate 32 MHz Full Scale Level 0 dBm Instrument Device Name SMBV100A Serial Number 257374 Port Name Dig BB In For details on digital UO output see chapter 5 2 2 Digital Output on page 37 Digital Baseband OUtDUl linee aeree eter rmn nette L2 un dd ca 143 Output Settings ten E Le DE 143 Connected Instraimelit EE 144 Digital Baseband Output Enables or disables a digital output stream to the optional Digital Baseband Interface if available Note If digital baseband output is active the sample rate is restricted to 200 MHz max 160 MHz bandwidth See also Digital
240. calculation of the average power consumption For details see chapter 5 3 5 Average Power Consumption on page 49 Parameters lt ConvFact gt numeric value RST 0 0 TRACe IQ APCon RESult Queries the average power consumption for an analog baseband input This value is only calculated at the end of the UO data measurement if the TRACe 10 APCon STATe command is set to ON before the measurement is performed For details see chapter 5 3 5 Average Power Consumption on page 49 Parameters Average numeric value Default unit W Usage Query only 10 4 1 5 Using External Mixers The commands required to work with external mixers in a remote environment are described here Note that these commands require the R amp S FSW B21 option to be installed and an external mixer to be connected to the front panel of the R amp S FSW In MSRA MSRT mode external mixers are not supported Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements For details on working with external mixers see the R amp S FSW User Manual e Basic Settings dedic cedi a Pei ai cte a de e 235 e Mixer Geitnnge eene neenmmr snnt nn sensn nnne ntrente nnns nnns 237 Conversion Loss Table Settiligs ctc teet teh tede 241 e Programming Example Working with an External Mixer 246 Basic Settings The basic settings concern general usage of an external mixer E EI KEN KT 235 BENSE MIXT cile m 235 SENSe MIXer BIAS LLOW
241. capture and analyze UO data on the R amp S FSW By default it assumes the I Q data is modulated on a carrier frequency and input via the RF INPUT connector on the R amp S FSW The A D converter samples the IF signal at a rate of 200 MHz The digital signal is down converted to the complex baseband lowpass filtered and the sample rate is reduced An equalizer filter before the resampler compensates for the frequency response of the analyzer s analog filter stages which would otherwise add to the modu lation errors The continuously adjustable sample rates are realized using an optimal decimation filter and subsequent resampling on the set sample rate A special memory capture buffer is available in the R amp S FSW for a maximum of 400 Ms 400 1024 1024 of complex samples pairs of and Q data The number of com plex samples to be captured can be defined for restrictions refer to chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 25 The block diagram in figure 5 1 shows the analyzer hardware from the IF section to the processor Data aquisition hardware digital down conversion continuous decimation analog IF A D x fractional filter converter resampling analyzer IF signal NY a processor Downsampling sample rate 200 MHz sampling clock RF IF Power or arbitra External Trigger sample Pm 100Hz 10 GHz Fig 5 1 Block diagram illustrating the R amp S FSW signal pr
242. cdecnaeenevess 228 INPUt DIO RANGE DEET LEE 228 UPD SRA Tana a E EET 228 Pt DOO SRATSAUTO eu dee EEN 228 OUTP O cnca de Eed e a a a aaea 229 OUTPUE DIQ CDEV ie T 229 INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital UO input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface For details see the section Interface Status Information for the optional Digital Base band Interface in the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sample rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indica ted by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements PRBSTestState State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sample rate is displayed 1 Current samp
243. ce mode Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DET AUTO OFF The selection of the detector is not coupled to the trace mode Manual operation See Detector on page 178 TRACe lt n gt COPY lt TraceNumber gt lt TraceNumber gt This command copies data from one trace to another Parameters lt TraceNumber gt TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACE5 TRACE6 lt TraceNumber gt The first parameter is the destination trace the second parame ter is the source Note the e in the parameter is required Example TRAC COPY TRACE1 TRACE2 Copies the data from trace 2 to trace 1 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Copy Trace on page 180 IO Analysis SENSe AVERage n COUNt lt AverageCount gt TRACe IQ AVERage COUNt lt NumberSets gt This command defines the number of UO data sets that the averaging is based on Parameters lt NumberSets gt Range 0 to 32767 RST 0 Example TRAC IQ ON Switches on acquisition of UO data TRAC IQ AVER ON Enables averaging of the UO measurement data TRAC IQ AVER COUN 10 Selects averaging over 10 data sets TRAC TO DATA Starts the measurement and reads out the averaged data SENSe JAVERage lt n gt STATe lt t gt State TRACe IQ AVERage STATe State This command turns averaging of the UO data on and off Before you can use the command you have to turn the I Q data acquisition on with TRACe IQ STATe I
244. cessed in the UO Analyzer mode Simultaneously the data is written to the R amp S Digital Baseband Interface continuously Using this interface the UO data can be processed in an external instrument as an alternative to internal processing in the R amp S FSW Data acquisition hardware digital down conversion continuous decimation analog IF filter Sample Rate SR EUR Full Scale Level Reference Level Fig 5 10 Signal path using the digital output Sample rate The sample rate at the digital output corresponds to the sample rate defined by the user and which is used as the basis for analysis The current sample rate is displayed in the Digital UO Output dialog box read only when the digital output is enabled see Output Settings Information on page 143 A maximum sample rate of 200 MHz is allowed for digital output For digital output the full scale level corresponds to the defined reference level with out the reference level offset and transducer 5 2 3 d Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface Digital UO output and B500 option Digital UO output is also available with the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 In this case for output sample rates between 100 MHz and 200 MHz the B500 hardware provides the digital output Note that for technical reasons under the following conditions the continuous data stream from the B500 hardware is interrupted briefly each time
245. channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Name Parameter Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum UO Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse Analog Demodulation R amp S FSW K7 ADEM Analog Demod GSM R amp S FSW K10 GSM GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 MCGD MC Group Delay Amplifier Measurements R amp S FSW K18 AMPLifier Amplifier Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW K40 PNOISE Phase Noise Transient Analysis R amp S FSW K60 TA Transient Analysis VSA R amp S FSW K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72 BWCD 3G FDD BTS 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW K73 MWCD 3G FDD UE TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 BTDS TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW K77 MTDS TD SCDMA UE cdma2000 BTS R amp S FSW K82 BC2K CDMA2000 BTS cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW K83 MC2K CDMA2000 MS 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW K84 BDO 1xEV DO BTS 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW K85 MDO 1xEV DO MS WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN WLAN 802 11ad R amp S FSW K95 WIGIG 802 11ad LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE LTE Real Time Spectrum R amp S FSW B160R RTIM Real Time Spectrum K160RE DOCSIS 3 1 R amp S FSW K192 193 DOCSis DOCSIS 3 1 the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new ch
246. cilloscope see its data sheet e Common IF basic IF OUT 2 GHZ output and video output is not available F power and external are the only supported trigger sources For the external trig ger a drop out time cannot be defined When querying the trace data remotely the UO data can only be transferred in interleaved format 1 Q 1 Q see TRACe 10 DATA FORMat on page 354 e The I Q data can not be stored using the TRACe lt n gt DATA MEMory remote command Y axis scaling on the oscilloscope is limited to a minimum of 5mV per division e Special B2000 conversion loss tables for external mixers b2g files cannot be edited within the R amp S FSW firmware Common conversion loss tables ac1 files cannot be used with the B2000 option See also chapter 5 4 7 7 External Mixers and B2000 on page 81 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing pemm H M J Ww il 5 4 8 5 4 9 Input from Noise Sources The R amp S FSW provides a connector NOISE SOURCE CONTROL with a voltage sup ply for an external noise source By switching the supply voltage for an external noise Source on or off in the firmware you can activate or deactive the device as required External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of th
247. cked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 245 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters Type string Name of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX FS Z60 Manual operation See Mixer Name on page 112 SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs lt PortNo gt This command defines the mixer type in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 245 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 113 SENSe CORRection CVL SELect lt FileName gt This command selects the conversion loss table with the specified file name If file name is not available a new conversion loss table is created This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed
248. cts the trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector on the front panel In the UO Analyzer application only External Trigger 1 is supported If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is active only External CH3 is supported For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Trigger Settings External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 141 External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 141 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 292 External CH3 Trigger Source Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the signal fed into the CH3 input connector on the oscillo Scope meets or exceeds the specified trigger level Note In previous firmware versions the external trigger was connected to the CH2 input on the oscilloscope As of firmware version R amp S FSW 2 30 the CH3 input on the oscilloscope must be used This signal source is only available if the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is
249. cur Power measurement results are provided as usual 6 3 3 Output Settings Access INPUT OUTPUT gt Output The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters o How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Data Input and Output Settings IF Video Output IF Wide Out Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 Trigger 3 HEEM ebe edd EES 140 IF Wide Out Freouencny enne eene nnne en tnter snnt nnn 141 sik 141 Erg S 141 EDU TUER ose cep diete i Lee Zeie 141 dto E nea dated dart tates 142 hi 142 L Send eegener 142 IF Video Output Defines the type of signal available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW For restrictions and additional information see chapter 5 4 10 IF and Video Signal Output on page 84 IF The measured IF value is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector The frequency at which this value is available is defined in IF Wide Out Frequency on page 141 IF 2 GHz Out The measured IF value is provided at the IF OUT 2 GHZ output con nector if available at a frequency of 2 GHz If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 option is installed and active this is the only option available fo
250. d Good Good Weak signals and short duration 0 4 Flattop Worst Best Good Accurate single tone measurements 5 Term Good Good Best Measurements with very high dynamic range Overlapping The UO Analyzer calculates multiple FFTs per measurement by dividing one captured record into several windows Furthermore the I Q Analyzer allows consecutive win dows to overlap Overlapping reuses samples that were already used to calculate the preceding FFT result R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing pae M X eee aeree Overlap area In advanced FFT mode with averaging the overlapping factor can be set freely The higher the overlap factor the more windows are used This leads to more individual results and improves detection of transient signal effects However it also extends the duration of the calculation The size of the window can be defined manually according to the record length the overlap factor and and the FFT length With an overlap of the FFTs of 6795 for example the second data block the R amp S FSW performs the FFT on covers the last 67 of the data of the first FFT with only 33 new data The third data block still covers 3396 of the first data block and 6796 of the second data block and so on Fig 5 29 Overlapping FFTs In Manual or
251. d by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 217 Example INST CRE REPL IQAnalyzer2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named IQAnalyzer2 by a new measure ment channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer Usage Setting only INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activa ted Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL IQAnalyzer4 Deletes the channel with the name IQAnalyzer4 Usage Event INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer2 Usage Query only R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Remote Commands to Perform Measurements with UO Data Table 10 1 Available measurement channel types and default
252. d by an oscilloscope with a sample rate of 10 GHz This data is stored in a memory temporarily and then transferred to the R amp S FSW via the Digital UO Interface with a sample rate of 100 Msps Then the input sample rate on the R amp S FSW must be set to 10 GHz so the signal is displayed cor rectly Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface Digital UO enhanced mode An enhanced mode for processing data from the Digital Baseband Interface is availa ble This enhanced mode enables data transfer via the Digital UO interface with a data rate of up to 200 Msps 160 MHz bandwidth compared to the previous 100 Msps 80 MHz bandwidth The Digital UO enhanced mode is automatically used if the following prerequisites are fulfilled Digital Input The connected device must support data transfer rates up to 200 Msps Digital Output The R amp S FSW must supply the required bandwidth i e a bandwidth extension option greater than 160 MHz must be installed and active The connected device must support data transfer rates up to 200 Msps Restrictions for digital in and output The following table describes the restrictions for digital in and output Table 5 6 Restrictions for digital in and output Parameter Minimum Maximum Record length 2 complex samples 220 1024 1024 complex samples Input sample rate ISR 100 Hz 10 GHz Sample Rate SR Digital Max 100 Hz ISR 8388608 Min 10 GHz
253. d is defined via the harmonics configuration see Range 1 2 on page 105 Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue on page 238 RF Overrange If enabled the frequency range is not restricted by the band limits RF Start and RF Stop In this case the full LO range of the selected harmonics is used Remote command SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe on page 241 Preset Band Restores the presettings for the selected band Note changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function This function allows you to restore the original band settings Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet on page 238 Mixer Type The External Mixer option supports the following external mixer types 2 Port LO and IF data use the same port 8 Port LO and IF data use separate ports Remote command SENSe MIXer PORTs on page 241 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration The harmonics configuration determines the frequency range for user defined bands see Band on page 105 Range 1 2 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Enables the use of a second range based on another harmonic frequency of the mixer to cover the band s frequency range Data Input and Output Settings For each range you can define which harmonic to use and how the Conversion loss is handled Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe on page 239 Harmonic Type Mixer Setti
254. ddition to the R amp S Digital Baseband Interface connection Remote control is possible and very simple Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S EX IQ BOX automatically via the USB connection A setup file included in delivery consists of an installation wizard the executable pro gram and all necessary program and data files The latest software versions can be downloaded free of charge from the R amp S website www rohde schwarz com en prod ucts test and measurement signal generation EX IQ Box Simply execute the Setup file and follow the instructions in the installation wizard Note When using the EX IQ BOX with Digital WO Enhanced Mode see Digital UO enhanced mode on page 40 an R amp S EX IQ BOX model 1409 5505K04 with a serial number higher than 10200 is required in order to transfer data with up to 200 Msps For details on installation and operation of the R amp S DiglConf software see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Man ual 4 Measurement and Result Displays The UO Analyzer can capture I Q data The I Q data that was captured by or imported to the R amp S FSW can then be evaluated in various different result displays Select the result displays using the SmartGrid functions Up to 6 evaluations can be displayed in the UO Analyzer at any time including several
255. depending on the signal at the input connectors or how you want to interpret it R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input How to Work with UO Data pme Mr H M M M H Apo e C If necessary change the input configuration setting depending on whether a single ended or differential signal is being input Note that both differential and single ended active probes are supported How ever since a probe only uses a single connector either BASEBAND INPUT I or Q the input configuration must be set to single ended The type of probe is indicated in the Probes subtab of the Input dialog box d If necessary for example due to a mixed up connection or inverse data from the connected device swap the and Q values for correct analysis e If only one component of the input signal is of interest UO mode I only Low IF I or Q only Low IF Q define how to interpret the signal as modulated or real data For modulated data change the Center Frequency to use for down conversion Select a value between 10 Hz and 40 MHz or 80 MHz with option R amp S FSW B71E 4 Press the AMPT key and select Amplitude Config 5 Define the reference level for the input If a probe is connected consider the pro be s attenuation when defining the reference level 6 Select the maximum power level you expect to input at the BASEBAND INPUT connector as the Full
256. dwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 However special conversion loss tables are required with a 2g file extension as opposed to acl for common tables While ac1 files can be used data acquisition with the B2000 option using such con version loss tables will lead to substantial inaccuracy Using an average conversion loss for the entire range instead of a conversion loss table during data acquisition with the B2000 option will cause even more inaccuracy In both cases the UNCAL sta tus message indicates that the measurement may have inaccurate results Special B2000 tables in 52g files cannot be edited within the R amp S FSW firmware they can only be imported and deleted For more details see chapter 5 4 7 7 External Mixers and B2000 on page 81 Importing CVL tables The conversion loss table to be used for a particular range is also defined in the Exter nal Mixer Configuration dialog box All tables stored on the instrument in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory are offered for selection A validation check is then performed on the selected table to ensure that it complies with the settings In particular the following is checked the assigned band name the harmonic order the mixer type the table must contain at least one frequency that lies within the frequency range for the band Reference level The maximum possible reference level depends on the maximum used conversion loss value Thus the referenc
257. e Connected oscilloscope is not supported by the option see data sheet Make sure the connected oscilloscope supports at least a 10 GHz sample rate and 4 GHz bandwidth Oscilloscope LAN connection failed e Check LAN connection between R amp S FSW and oscilloscope Checkthe IP address of the oscilloscope defined in the B2000 settings dialog box see chapter 6 3 1 8 Settings for 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 on page 127 Oscilloscope No reference Check the connection of the external reference to the oscilloscope Invalid oscilloscope options Install the external reference option B4 on the oscilloscope Invalid oscilloscope firmware ver sion Install a firmware version 2 45 1 1 or higher on the oscilloscope then switch the B2000 state off and back on in the B2000 settings dialog box see B2000 State on page 127 Alignment failed Check the connection from the ALIGNMENT SIGNAL SOURCE INPUT connector on the R amp S FSW to the CH1 input on the oscillo Scope B2000 is not aligned Perform an alignment for the IF OUT 2 GHZ connection see Alignment on page 128 Oscilloscope is not aligned Perform the two steps of initial alignment on the oscilloscope see Alignment on page 128 Oscilloscope communication failed An error occurred during communication e g a timeout Start a new sweep Error Messages Message B2000 Waiting fo
258. e HOLDoff TIME Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters Offset For measurements in the frequency domain the range is 0 s to 30 s For measurements in the time domain the range is the negative Sweep time to 30 s RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 160 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Note If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger the R amp S FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and UO data measurements Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 162 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 161 TRIGger SEQ
259. e to perform frequency sweep measurements with single ended or differential active probes which can also be connected to the BASEBAND INPUT I connector Frequency sweep measurements on probe input You can perform RF measurements measurements in the time or frequency domain by connecting a probe to the BASEBAND INPUT I connector and switching the input source to this connector in the RF input configuration see Input Connector on page 102 The probe s attenuation is compensated automatically by the R amp S FSW using a trans ducer named Probe on Baseband Input The probe can only be connected on I as only input at the connector can be redirected to the RF path A comment is assigned User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 50 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing pme ES e 5 4 3 that includes the type name and serial number of the detected probe The transducer is deleted as soon as the probe is disconnected For details on transducers see the General Instrument Setup section in the R amp S FSW User Manual For information on using probes for input see chapter 5 4 3 Using Probes on page 51 Using Probes As an alternative means of input to the R amp S FSW active probes from Rohde amp Schwarz can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Base band Interface
260. e R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of an amplifier In this case you can first connect an external noise source whose noise power level is known in advance to the R amp S FSW and measure the total noise power From this value you can determine the noise power of the R amp S FSW Then when you measure the power level of the actual DUT you can deduct the known noise level from the total power to obtain the power level of the DUT The noise source is controlled in the Output settings see Noise Source on page 141 Receiving and Providing Trigger Signals Using one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors of the R amp S FSW the R amp S FSW can use a signal from an external device as a trigger to capture data Alter natively the internal trigger signal used by the R amp S FSW can be output for use by other connected devices Using the same trigger on several devices is useful to syn chronize the transmitted and received signals within a measurement For details on the connectors see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External trigger as input If the trigger signal for the R amp S FSW is provided by an external device the trigger sig nal source must be connected to the R amp S FSW and the trigger source must be defined as External for the R amp S FSW Trigger output The R amp S FSW can provide output to another device either to pass on the internal trig ger signal or to indicate that the R
261. e defined number of sweeps has been performed While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer If the Sequencer is active in MSRT mode the Single Sweep function does not start data capturing it merely has an effect on trace averaging over multiple sequences In this case no trace averaging is performed Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 171 6 8 6 9 Display Configuration For details on the Sequencer see the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command INITiate n IMMediate on page 321 Continue Single Sweep After triggering repeats the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count without deleting the trace of the last measurement While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the R
262. e ede cae uar Eu E RES Yd 265 SENSe PMETer p DCYCIe STATe eeeseeseesseeeeseeee eene nennen enne nene nn enne Enne Sa tnnt nns 265 SENS amp e PMETersps FREQUenCY ert rrr rr e n rnt ne ee Ed ge ee dn E en pad n 266 SENSe PMETer sps FREQuency LINK cione ti erae trt reno tk rn e pere t Eee nid 266 SENSE Te MTG c 266 SENSe PMET er p MTIMe AVER age COUNIL rct te cett te pr i t e e dn 267 SENSe PMETersp MTIMe AVERage STATE kransin iita eint ice ice E een Pre RT 267 SENSe PMETer lt p gt ROFFSset S EATe rrr trt tnnt rnnt ihren tipi NUETE EE AEn 268 SENSe PMETersp TRIGger DTIMa ertnp tt ente teet rhet ten re ign t rene gnat 269 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HOLIOTT uiae prenne eere enn rrr ree rr rein 270 SENSe PMETersp TRIGSer HYS Teresia eror ten tenera ett t pe ATSANA EE EESE xe ciens 270 SENS amp e PMETersp TRIGger DEWMel ttt ertt tent rre eee eni ner re ERI DE 271 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger SLOBe nii rere t eth cop er teatri he teer Ln ne rine ERE gek 271 SENSe PMETer ps TRIGOerE STATO oro tita geo ttn E deus emen x quete Ee Eer 271 SENSe PMETe rsp UPDate STATe 5 ertet ec tet rte ettet ec te tp reete ca 268 SENSE PME Tersp gt STATS iic cte porto rie Ec E E E eie ineo D E o nep LESER 268 E ET et ET ER GR le tal 249 SENSe PROBesps ID SRNURDOFE ctt t ertet tee Br pte ce ctp e
263. e length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 10 2 Common Suffixes The following common suffixes are used in remote commands specific to the UO Ana lyzer application Suffix Value range Description m 1 16 Marker n 1 6 Window lt t gt 1 6 Trace 10 3 Activating UO Analyzer Measurements UO Analyzer measurements require a special measurement channel on the R amp S FSW It can be activated using the common INSTrument CREate NEW or INSTrument CREate REPLace commands In this case some but not all param eters from the previously selected application are passed on to the UO Analyzer chan nel In order to retain all relevant parameters from the current application for the UO measurement use the TRACe TO STATe command to change the application of the current channel A measurement is started immediately with the default settings when the channel is activated Activating UO Analyzer Measurements Different remote modes available In remote control t
264. e level can be adjusted for each range according to the used conversion loss table or average conversion loss value If a conversion loss value is used which exceeds the maximum reference level the reference level is adjusted to the maximum value permitted by the firmware Automatic Signal Identification Automatic signal identification allows you to compare the upper and lower band results of the mixer thus detecting unwanted mixer products due to conversion Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the UO Analyzer for instance Signal ID function Two sweeps are performed alternately Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band USB of the LO the test sweep trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band LSB i e the reference sweep R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing Spectrum Ref Level 10 00 dBm RBW 3 MHz SWT 60ms YBW 3 MHz Mode Auto Sweep ExtMix U 14P Clrw SigID USB e 2AP Clrw SigID LSB 20 dBm 30 dBm 40 dBm 50 dBm GF 50 0 GHz 691 pts Span 20 0 GHz Fig 5 18 Signal identification function Signal ID with optional external mixer The reference sweep is performed using an LO setting shifted downwards by 2 IF Harmonic order Input signals in the desired sideband that are converted using the specified harmonic are displayed in both
265. e only if the output is configured for IF2 see OUTPut IF SOURce on page 277 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements For more information and prerequisites see chapter 5 4 10 IF and Video Signal Out put on page 84 Return values lt SideBand gt Example Usage NORMal The sideband at the output is identical to the RF signal INVerted The sideband at the output is the inverted RF signal sideband OUTP IF IF2 Activates output at the IF OUTPUT 2 GHZ connector OUTP IF SBAN Queries the sideband provided at the connector Query only OUTPut IF SOURce Source Defines the type of signal available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD or IF OUT 2 GHZ con nector of the R amp S FSW For restrictions and more information see chapter 5 4 10 IF and Video Signal Output on page 84 Parameters Source Example IF The measured IF value is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector The frequency at which the IF value is provided is defined using the OUTPut IF IFFRequency command IF2 The measured IF value is available at the IF OUT 2 GHZ output connector at a frequency of 2 GHz This setting is only available if the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector or the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is available It is automatically set if the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is installed and active For details see chapter 5 4 7 Basics on the 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R
266. e preamplifier on and off It requires the optional preamplifiier hardware This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 148 INPut GAIN VALue lt Gain gt This command selects the gain level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 282 The command requires the additional preamplifier hardware option Parameters lt Gain gt 15 dB 30 dB The availability of gain levels depends on the model of the R amp S FSW R amp S FSW8 13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 or higher 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification 10 4 2 4 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 148 Scaling the Y Axis bISPlayEWINDowens E TRACesteY SCALe ccce teen reae eee rtt then 283 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztTR ACects lt SCALelAUlTOONCE 283 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE eese 283 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVISION cccceeececee eee 284 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition seen 284 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SPACing
267. e search mode for the next peak search Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command chapter 10 7 2 4 Positioning the Marker on page 339 Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed the resolution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 337 Search Limits The search results can be restricted by limiting the search area or adding search con ditions Search Limits Left Right Search Limits If activated limit lines are defined and displayed for the search Only results within the limited search range are considered Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe on page 337 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits LEFT on page 338 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits RIGHT on page 338 Search Threshold Search Limits Defines an absolute threshold as an additional condition for the peak search Only peaks that exceed the threshold are detected Remote command CALCulate lt n gt THReshold on page 339 7 2 2 2 Mark
268. e span of the input signal to be captured for analysis both values are corre lated e Optionally enable No Filter to suppress the use of the digital decimation filter and increase the analysis bandwidth to the input sample rate from the connec ted device e Measurement Time how long the data is to be captured e Record Length the number of samples to be captured also defined by sam ple rate and measurement time Select the Display Config button and select up to six displays that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 12 Exit the SmartGrid mode 13 Start a new sweep with the defined settings How to Capture Analog Baseband Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Analog baseband signals can also be captured via the optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 if installed 1 Connect the device that provides analog baseband input to the BASEBAND INPUT connectors at the front of the R amp S FSW For single ended input signals use the or Q connector or both For differential input signals connect the positive input to the and Q connectors and the negative input to the T and Q connectors Press the INPUT OUTPUT key of the R amp S FSW Select Input Source Config and switch to the Analog Baseband tab to configure the Analog Baseband Interface a Set the state of the Analog Baseband signal source to On b Select the UO Mode
269. e supported For a detailed list of sup ported sensors see the data sheet Power sensors can also be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level e g from a signal generator see Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Trig ger on page 131 Fig 6 2 Power sensor support standard test setup D Using the power sensor with several applications The power sensor cannot be used from the R amp S FSW firmware and the R amp S Power Viewer Plus virtual power meter for displaying results of the R amp S NRP power sensors simultaneously Result display The results of the power sensor measurements are displayed in the marker table For each power sensor a row is inserted The sensor index is indicated in the Type col umn MultiView Spectrum Ref Level 0 00 dBm RBW Att dB SWT 40 8ms VBW 1 Frequency Sweep 1001 pts 1 36 GHz Span 13 6 GHz Stimulus Response Function Function Result 72 20 dBm PWR100057 NRP Z11 60 79 dBm PWR100393 NRP Z81 Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Trigger Power sensors can be used to trigger a measurement at a specified power level e g from a signal generator User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 131 Data Input and Output Settings e R amp S NRP Z81 R amp S NRP Z85 e R amp S NRP Z86 e R amp S NRP8S R amp S NRP18S R amp S NRP33S Ss R amp S NRP8SN R amp S NRP18SN R amp S NRP33SN o Currently only the following power sensors are supported as power tri
270. e the record length the Meas Time is automatically changed as well For FFTs performed using only a single window Single mode the record length which is then identical to the FFT length may not exceed 512k FFT Length Defines the number of frequency points determined by each FFT calculation The more points are used the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes but the longer the calculation takes In Auto or Manual mode an FFT length of 4096 is used In advanced FFT mode the FFT length can be defined by the user If you use the arrow keys or the rotary knob to change the FFT length the value is incremented or decremented by powers of 2 If you enter the value manually any integer value from 3 to 524288 is available R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing EE HW H M H JM c E If the FFT length is longer than the Window Length the sample data is filled up with zeros up to the FFT length The FFT is then performed using interpolated frequency points For an FFT length that is not a power of 2 a DFT discrete Fourier transform is per formed which requires more time for calculation but avoids the effects of interpolation In order to display all calculated frequency points defined by the FFT length the num ber of sweep points is set to the FFT length automatically in advanced FFT mode
271. e trigger Isepetitiori interval 3 reet tr aii 160 EU cote teretes ns Meca end red hrec ages 160 TPIS leg 306 Traces vos 100 Average mode ee c LEY Averaging remote control 328 Configuration EU Configuring remote control we 925 COPYING EY 180 Copying remote control seseees 329 Detector cocotte tenent 178 Detector remote control 328 ae NS 179 MO insanus wes LS Mode remote i920 Retrieving remote 2 5 3 reete te ncn 353 Settings remote control sssssses 325 Settings predefined itte e ne nets 180 Tracking see External generator sissisodan 122 Transducers Calibration with external generator 70 126 Transmission measurement Calibration external generator ssse 125 Externalige hetator n near etre pens 65 Trigger B2000 E 79 Configuration softkey 154 Coupling B2000 abil Drop out time 160 Drop out time B2000 80 Drop out time Power sensor 2 External B2000 1 erit 80 Exterrial remote 1 rede eter 292 External power gie e o e Holdoff Power sensor sese 137 Hysteresis mener 161 Hysteresis B2000 80 Hysteresis Power sensor
272. e x ScalingFac tor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215 1 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt Channel PowerVs1 Min lt Arra SEX fl l ime yOfFloat length 256 gt oat 134 float oat 142 float efl oat 140 float ArrayOfFloat Min Max lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 float 70 float float 71 float float 69 float ArrayOfFloat Max PowerVsTime Spectrum Min ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt float 133 float float 111 float AA 2 UO Data File Format iq tar lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 67 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt Spectrum gt IQ lt Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt IQ lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt UO Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed UO data all data is interleaved i e
273. eactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the sweep INIT SEQ REFR Refreshes the display for all channels Usage Event SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces In case of continuous sweep mode the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep mode the application stops the measurement and calculates the average after the average count has been reached Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 170 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent This query returns the current number of started sweeps or measurements This com mand is only available if a sweep count value is defined and the instrument is in single sweep mode Example SWE COUNt 64 Sets sweep count to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT Starts a sweep without waiting for the sweep end SWE COUN CURR Queries the number of started sweeps Usage Query only SENSe SWEep POINts lt SweepPoints gt This command defines the number of sweep points to analyze after a sweep Pa
274. easurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 174 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command selects the way the R amp S FSW determines the length of the measurement Parameters Mode AUTO The R amp S FSW determines the measurement length automati cally according to the current input data MANual The R amp S FSW uses the measurement length defined by SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 309 RST AUTO Manual operation See Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto on page 174 See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 174 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 311 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Configuring I Q Analyzer Measurements Parameters Threshold Range O dB to 200 dB RST 1 dB
275. ecce tettte t tntetettnt te ettte ttt tiis 235 E EE Ree 236 ET CN 236 SENSe MIXer THReshold 2 2 aaa Fev Le eL EHE YE ecm aai 236 SENSe MIXer STATe State Activates or deactivates the use of a connected external mixer as input for the mea surement This command is only available if the optional External Mixer is installed and an external mixer is connected Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX ON Manual operation See External Mixer State on page 104 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the high second range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 235 Parameters lt BiasSetting gt RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 108 SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the low first range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 235 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt BiasSetting gt RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 108 SENSe MIXer LOPower lt Level gt This command specifies the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Parameters Level numeric value Range 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm Increment 0 1 dB RST 15 5 dBm Example MIX LOP 16 0dBm
276. ection In remote operation the setting is activated without a prompt For more information see High accuracy timing on page 45 Remote command CALibration AIQ HATiming STATe on page 233 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency for analog baseband input For real type baseband input I or Q only the center frequency is always 0 Hz Note If the analysis bandwidth to either side of the defined center frequency exceeds the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the maximum frequency 40 MHz 80 MHz an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency or the analysis bandwidth For details on frequency ranges and the analysis bandwidth see chapter 5 3 Process ing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface on page 42 Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 285 Probe Settings Probes are configured in a separate tab on the Input dialog box which is displayed when you select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then Input Source Config Rehhevel 0 00 dBm Freq 13 25 GHz Channel Code Power Relative Subtype 0 1 A Att 10 dB Slot 0 Channel Type PILOT L m Input Source Probes Probe I Probe Q Name RT ZD10 Serial Number 201241 Part Number 1410 4715 02 S e Not Connected Type Differential Common Mode Offset 0 0 v Common Settings 6 3 1 7 Data Input and Output Settings For each possible probe connector Baseband Input Baseband Input Q the detec ted type of probe if any is displa
277. ectrum is returned The values for the missing component in the Real Imag I Q and the UO vector result displays are all 0 TRAC TRACE3 Queries the data of trace 3 SCPI confirmed See Magnitude on page 18 See Spectrum on page 19 See Q Vector on page 20 See Real Imag I Q on page 20 TRACe lt n gt DATA MEMory lt Trace gt lt OffsSwPoint gt lt NoOfSwPoints gt This command queries the previously captured trace data for the specified trace from the memory As an offset and number of sweep points to be retrieved can be specified the trace data can be retrieved in smaller portions making the command faster than the TRAC DATA command This is useful if only specific parts of the trace data are of interest If no parameters are specified with the command the entire trace data is retrieved in this case the command is identical to TRAC DATA TRACE1 Query parameters lt Trace gt lt OffsSwPoint gt lt NoOfSwPoints gt Example Usage TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACES TRACE6 The offset in sweep points related to the start of the measure ment at which data retrieval is to start Number of sweep points to be retrieved from the trace TRAC DATA MEM TRACE1 25 100 Retrieves 100 sweep points from trace 1 starting at sweep point 25 Query only 10 8 3 Retrieving Results TRACe lt n gt DATA X lt TraceNumber gt This command queries the horizontal trace data for
278. ed band ee Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON dees Configuring a new conversion loss table Define cvl table for range 1 of band as described in previous example extended V band SENS CORR CVL SEL UserTable SENS CORR CVL COMM User defined conversion loss table for USER band SENS CO SENS CO R RR CVL BAND USER R SENS COR R R R CVL HARM 6 CVL BIAS 1mA SENS CO SENS CO SENS CO CVL MIX FS Z260 CVL SNUM 123 4567 R CVL PORT 3 DH A A A A A Conversion loss is linear from 55 GHz to 75 GHz SENS CORR CVL DATA 55GHZ 20DB 75GHZ 30DB al Configuring the mixer and band settings Use user defined band and assign new cvl table SENS MIX HARM BAND USER Define band by two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 cvl table UserTable range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS TABL LOW UserTable SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 10 4 1 6 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a
279. eference material e g UO file formats and a detailed description of the LVDS connector List of remote commands Alphahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual Index User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 7 Documentation Overview 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the following parts e Printed Getting Started manual e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation DVD with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and firmware applications Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Web Help The web help provides online access to the complete information on operating the R amp S FSW and all available options without downloading The content of the web help corresponds to the user manuals for the latest product version The web help is availa ble from the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Web Help Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the DVD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instru ment Basic opera
280. el Example STAT QUES DIQ COND Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bitis 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 Usage SCPI confirmed STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Programming Examples Setting parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Positive TRansition part of a register
281. ement Configuration subtab of the External Generator tab Input Input Source Power Sensor External Generator Measurement Configuration Source State Interface Source Power Configuration Source Offset Source CIDARO Frequency Coupling Coupling State Source Freq RF Result Frequency Start Result Frequency Stop Soue StA iea ona E EENS NEEN SN 122 SOUNGE EE 122 SOMES E 122 Source Frequency ee DEE 123 Manual Source e ET 123 Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset 123 Result Frequency Statt neci ten deca ee tare EENS 124 Rosul E Ee m 124 Source State Activates or deactivates control of an external generator Remote command SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 254 Source Power The output power of the external generator The default output power is 20 dBm The range is specified in the data sheet Remote command SOURce EXTernal POWer LEVel on page 253 Source Offset Constant level offset for the external generator Values from 200 dB to 200 dB in 1 dB steps are allowed The default setting is 0 dB Offsets are indicated by the LVL label in the channel bar see also chapter 5 4 5 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 74 Data Input and Output Settings With this offset attenuators or amplifiers at the output connector of the external gener ator can be taken into account for the displayed output power values on screen or du
282. emodulation e R amp S FSW Pulse Measurements R amp S FSW Transient Measurements R amp S FS K96 OFDM Vector Signal Analysis Software Triggering Since the oscilloscope samples the data triggering is also processed by the oscillo Scope The trigger source can be either the IF level or an external trigger for example from the R amp S FSW User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 79 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output External trigger The external trigger must be connected to the CH3 input on the oscilloscope In previous firmware versions the external trigger was connected to the CH2 input on the oscilloscope As of firmware version R amp S FSW 2 30 the CH3 input on the oscillo Scope must be used All common trigger settings are available except for a dropout time In addition the coupling to be used for external trigger input to the oscilloscope can be defined Data acquisition starts when the signal fed into the CH3 input connector on the oscillo Scope meets or exceeds the specified trigger level assumes a cable the length of 1 m between the R amp S FSW and the oscilloscope Lon ger cables between the instruments must be compensated for by defining a Trigger Offset if necessary o The length of the external trigger cable affects the trigger runtime The R amp S FSW Since the external trigger uses another channel on the oscilloscope the maximum memory size and thus record length available for the input c
283. ency Marker Frequency cc ccccccccesecccsedesteceeedeetcneeeeedeceeeetedeeteeeendeas 189 Reference Level Marker Level 190 Marker Usage Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 340 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 342 Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 340 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 341 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 340 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 342 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 343 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 342 Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 341 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 343 Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCula
284. eni mone retire tine External Mer steig rino ict c nae ts 2 port vs 3 port Activating remote Control srein asn Bees ee eeneg E Basic settings Sei E E Bie le ele RE Conversion TOSS ai ieri Sepe efron en eue Conversion loss tables sssss 56 109 110 Frequency range 53 104 General information eerie 53 Handover frequency Harmonic Order Harmonic Type 106 Nang nes ce 112 Programming example sess 246 Range getut eg von 105 Restoring barids eite encres 105 RF overrange RF StarURF Stop deeg rere ree 104 Setial ni mb r iere te erre 112 TYPO 105 113 241 External mixers PAD 81 External reference External generator een epe teet 66 External generator Control 0 eee cece eeeeeeees 121 External trigger 44156 157 B2000 ET 80 Configuring power sensor wie 139 Level power sensor ve 136 Level remol8 EE 290 Power SefS0 5 cadent tee iaa ne E EORR 136 F Falling Slope Power sensor esee 137 FFT F ridamentals coeno ta tin tori s tee internet 87 Measurement speed reete nera nhau 90 Window A tute de 86 168 Files Format NQ data ceca ninii 381 UO data binary XML Q data input socer terree UO parameter XML eene 382 Filt
285. ep mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 320 The unit depends on the application of the command Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Retrieving Results Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 320 Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position The unit is variable and depends on the one you have currently set In the Real Imag I Q result display of the UO Analyzer the command returns the real part first then the imaginary part Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 In UO Analyzer application for Real Imag I Q for example 1 852719887E 011 0 Usage Qu
286. equency Resolution of FFT Results RBW on page 90 Transformation Algorithm Advanced FFT mode Basic settings Defines the FFT calculation method Single One FFT is calculated for the entire record length if the FFT Length is larger than the record length zeros are appended to the captured data Averaging Several overlapping FFTs are calculated for each record the results are combined to determine the final FFT result for the record The number of FFTs to be averaged is determined by the Window Over lap and the Window Length Remote command SENSe IQ FFT ALGorithm on page 300 FFT Length Advanced FFT mode Basic settings Defines the number of frequency points determined by each FFT calculation The more points are used the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes but the longer the calculation takes In advanced FFT mode the number of sweep points is set to the FFT length automati cally Note If you use the arrow keys or the rotary knob to change the FFT length the value is incremented or decremented by powers of 2 If you enter the value manually any integer value from 3 to 524288 is available Remote command SENSe IQ FFT LENGth on page 301 Window Function Advanced FFT mode Basic settings In the UO analyzer you can select one of several FFT window types The following window types are available e Blackman Harris e Flattop e Gauss e Rectangular Data Acquisition
287. er 2 2 2 92 ENEE anan a Ee oL NEES 282 Scaling the E TT 283 10 4 2 1 Amplitude Settings Useful commands for amplitude configuration described elsewhere SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 311 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude configuration CAL Culate nz M AbkermFUNCUonRtterence eren 278 CALC latesn e 279 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectlSCALelRLEVel nenne 279 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFF Set ecececeeceeeceeeeeeseeeeneeeees 279 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion REFerence This command matches the reference level to the power level of a marker If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Example CALC MARK2 FUNC REF Sets the reference level to the level of marker 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Reference Level Marker Level on page 190 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer Unit This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all power based measurement windows regardless of the n suf fix Parameters Unit DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm Manual operation See Unit on page 146 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level for all trac
288. er Measurements Band Frequency start GHz Frequency stop GHz V 50 0 75 0 E 60 0 90 0 Ww 75 0 110 0 F 90 0 140 0 D 110 0 170 0 G 140 0 220 0 J 220 0 325 0 Y 325 0 500 0 USER 32 18 68 22 default default The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe State This command specifies whether a second high harmonic is to be used to cover the band s frequency range Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON Manual operation See Range 1 2 on page 105 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the high second range Parameters lt HarmOrder numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band definition Example MIX HARM HIGH 2 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 106 SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE lt OddEven gt This command specifies whether the harmonic order to be used should be odd even or both Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt OddEven gt ODD EVEN EODD RST EVEN Example MIX HARM TYPE ODD Manual operation See Harmonic Type on page 106 SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the low first range Parameters
289. er Usage Using Zoom Limits Search Limits If activated the peak search is restricted to the active zoom area defined for a single zoom see Single Zoom on page 191 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits ZOOM STATe on page 339 Deactivating All Search Limits Search Limits Deactivates the search range limits Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe on page 337 CALCulate lt n gt THReshold STATe on page 339 Branch for Peak Search Defines which data is used for marker search functions in UO data This function is only available for the display configuration Real Imag I Q see Real Imag I Q on page 20 Note The search settings apply to all markers not only the currently selected one Real Marker search functions are performed on the real trace of the I Q measurement Imag Marker search functions are performed on the imaginary trace of the UO measurement Magnitude Marker search functions are performed on the magnitude of the and Q data Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SEARch on page 337 Positioning Functions Access MKR gt The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search or set other characteristic values to the current marker value Ee EE ies 189 Search Next Peak uae dade dt de d ea c c e ex c e d oa 189 Search MINIMOM DEE 189 Search Next MiniMUM EE 189 Center Frequ
290. ers Bandwidth l Q d ata creer tanc 165 Digital Baseband Interface B17 166 Digital UO remote control e He EE High pass e 223 High pass RF input jeg YIG t miotg E 223 Format Drm IE 378 RI WEE 356 WO data UE 379 Free Run ANI GT 156 Frequency elle UCL E Configuration remote esses Coupling power sensor External generator s censet etie ftit lol gm 141 Frequency coupling Automatic external generator s es 72 External generator ccccceeeeeceeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeee 71 123 Reverse sweep external generator 73 TTL synchronization external generator Ke Frequency denominator External Generator nene mentes 123 Frequency numerator External Generator 1 rentre meten 123 Frequency offset External generator eese 72 123 Frequency range Calibration sweep external generator 12 124 Extending eter een t ter een 53 External Mixte a ient 53 Frequency converting measurements External generator sssini ree 72 FRQ External Generator n nte remm 74 FSW B2000 Alignment Signal Source CORMECIOR eet 78 Full Sc le level metta 37 44 Analog Baseband B71 remote control 4 291 Analog Baseband B71 s 54 Digital e WEE 115 Digital UO remote
291. ery only Manual operation See Marker Table on page 21 See Marker Peak List on page 21 MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST lt FileName gt This command exports the SEM and spurious emission list evaluation to a file The file format is dat Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual 10 9 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR LIST test Stores the current list evaluation results in the test dat file Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results Alternatively to capturing UO data by the I Q Analyzer itself stored UO data from previ ous measurements or other applications can be imported to the UO Analyzer Further more I Q data processed in the UO Analyzer can be stored to a file for further evalua tion in other applications UO data can only be exported in applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications For details on importing and expor
292. es lt lQData gt Selects an offset at which the output of data should start in rela tion to the first data If omitted all captured samples are output starting with the first sample Range 0 to lt of samples 1 with lt of samples being the maximum number of captured values RST 0 Number of samples you want to query beginning at the offset you have defined If omitted all captured samples starting at offset are output Range 1 to lt of samples offset samples with lt of samples maximum number of captured values RST it of samples Measured value pair 1 Q for each sample that has been recor ded The data format depends on FORMat DATA Default unit V 10 8 2 Retrieving Results Example TRAC IQ STAT ON Enables acquisition of UO data TRAC IQ SET NORM 10MHz 32MHz EXT POS 100 4096 Measurement configuration Sample Rate 32 MHz Trigger Source External Trigger Slope Positive Pretrigger Samples 100 Number of Samples 4096 INIT WAI Starts measurement and wait for sync FORMat REAL 32 Determines output format To read the results TRAC IQ DATA MEM Reads all 4096 UO data TRAC IQ DATA MEM 0 2048 Reads 2048 UO data starting at the beginning of data acquisition TRAC IQ DATA MEM 2048 1024 Reads 1024 UO data from half of the recorded data TRAC IQ DATA MEM 100 512 Reads 512 UO data starting at the trigger point Pretrigger Samples was 100
293. es lt t gt is irrelevant With a reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 0 dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 145 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a reference level offset for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 145 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements 10 4 2 2 Configuring the Attenuation INSTA 280 INPutATTenaalon AU TO cope et e net nett aee dece teinte deus Enn eee atrae den cen eed dun 280 IEN RE 281 Danes up Bu d 281 NPU EAT TES TANT oet atender Ree dee te docendi e dv pa du eeu des aas eei eme ee ecd 281 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If an electronic attenuator is available and active the command defines a mechanical attenuation see 1NPut EATT STATe on page 281 If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with
294. es an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an UO parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample UO parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt DataFilename xyz complex float32 DataFilename lt UserData gt lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat gt Element Description RS IQ TAR File The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute ileFormatVersion Format that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used
295. escribes the conversion loss table The comment can be freely defined by the user Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent on page 243 Band The waveguide or user defined band for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 10 2 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BAND on page 242 Harmonic Order The harmonic order of the range for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic on page 244 Bias The bias current which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s Tip You can also define the bias interactively while a preview of the trace with the changed setting is displayed see Bias Settings on page 108 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 242 Mixer Name Specifies the name of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied This set ting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer
296. estricts the analysis bandwidth to a maximum of 80 MHz The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B160 B320 B500 is deactivated TRACe IQ WBANd STATe is set to OFF 160 MHz Restricts the analysis bandwidth to a maximum of 160 MHz The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B320 is deactivated Not available or required if bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 is installed TRACe IQ WBANd STATe is set to ON 500 MHz 320 MHz MAX All installed bandwidth extension options are activated The cur rently available maximum bandwidth is allowed see chap ter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 25 TRACe IQ WBANd STATe is set to ON RST maximum available Default unit Hz 10 4 6 d Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Example TRAC IQ WBAN MBW 82 MHZ TRAC IQ WBAN MBW Result if R amp S FSW B160 B320 is active 160000000 Example TRAC IQ WBAN MBW 82 MHZ TRAC 1Q WBAN MBW Result if R amp S FSW B500 is active 500000000 Manual operation See Maximum Bandwidth on page 165 Adjusting Settings Automatically The commands required to adjust settings automatically in a remote environment are described here The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 6 9 Adjusting Settings Auto matically on page 172 MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode settings related to data acquisition measurement time hys teresis can only
297. ew the I Q data in a web browser 1 Use an archive tool e g WinZip or PowerArchiver to unpack the iq tar file into a folder 2 Locate the folder using Windows Explorer 3 Open your web browser xzy xml file D fy xml e D x Xzy xml of iq tar file Saved by FSV IQ Analyzer Comment Here is a comment Date amp Time 2011 03 03 14 33 05 Sample rate 6 5 MHz Number of samples 65000 Duration of signal 10 ms Data format complex float32 Data filename xzy complex 1ch float32 Scaling factor 1v How to Export and Import I Q Data 4 Drag the I Q parameter XML file e g example xml into your web browser Comment Channel 1 of 1 Power vs time y axis 10 dB div x axis 1 ms div Spectrum y axis 20 dB div x axis 500 kHz div E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet http Avww rohde schwarz com Fileformat version 1 Error Messages 9 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement If the results do not meet your expectations try the following methods to optimize the measurement 9 1 Error Messages If errors occur during UO data acquisition or data output using the optional Digital Baseband Interface a message is displayed in the status bar When data acquisition errors occur a status bit in the STATus QUESTi
298. f averaging is on the maximum amount of UO data that can be recorded is 512kS 524288 samples Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example TRAC IQ ON Switches on acquisition of UO data TRAC IQ AVER ON Enables averaging of the UO measurement data TRAC IQ AVER COUN 10 Selects averaging over 10 data sets TRAC TO DATA Starts the measurement and reads out the averaged data 10 7 2 Using Markers The following commands are available for marker settings and functions in the UO Ana lyzer application o For UO Vector displays markers are not available 10 7 2 1 IO Analysis Setting Up Individual MateSls EE 331 ENEE E EE 335 e Configuring and Performing a Marker Search sese 336 Positioning te MaIKOI oon re eei ze recte d meet E nai ere da 339 e Marker Peak Lists tese ee I SE 344 Setting Up Individual Markers The following commands define the position of markers in the diagram CALEGulate ns DELTatviarkerem AOFF 2 22 32 2 2 6 co vaunted Pes RI PIOS IY a R 331 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzUNk raina nin an nenne ennt iis es nenne 331 CALCulate n DELTamarker m LINK TOMAhkercmz senes 332 er DIE RI NEE E d e RE 332 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz ME 332 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmztSTATel enne ntn tn nnn rn nan 333 CAL Culatesm DEL EE E NEE 333 CAL e DE RT EE E E E 333 GALCulate n MARKer m AOFF 2 nnan sas RR asa REESEN ENER SE
299. f the R amp S FSW Select Input Source Config and switch to the Digital IQ tab to configure the Digi tal Baseband Interface Information on the detected input device is shown under Connected Instrument Set the state of the Digital IQ signal source to On Define the Sample Rate as provided by the connected device or select Auto mode to have it set automatically according to the detected device Define the level and unit that corresponds to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 as the Full scale level or select Auto mode to have it set automatically accord ing to the input from the detected device Enable the Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level option to adjust the refer ence level to input changes continuously or press the AMPT key to define the ref erence level manually Select the Amplitude Config softkey to change the refer ence level offset or to set the level automatically only once Select the Frequency button to define the input signal s center frequency 8 2 2 10 11 How to Capture or Output UO Data via Optional Interfaces Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example a Baseband Power trigger to start capturing data only when a specific input power is exceeded Select the Bandwidth button and define the bandwidth parameters for data acqui sition e Sample rate the rate at which samples are captured or Analysis Bandwidth th
300. face is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector In the selection list you must specify which general purpose bit GPO to GP5 will provide the trigger data Note If the Digital UO enhanced mode is used i e the connected device supports transfer rates up to 200 Msps only the general purpose bits GPO and GP1 are available as a Digital UO trigger source See also Digital UO enhanced mode on page 40 A Trigger Offset and Slope on page 162 can be defined for the Digital IQ trigger to improve the trigger stability but no hysteresis or holdoff value The following table describes the assignment of the general purpose bits to the LVDS connector pins Trigger Settings For details on the LVDS connector see chapter A 1 Description of the LVDS Connec tor on page 377 Table 6 1 Assignment of general purpose bits to LVDS connector pins Bit LVDS pin GPO SDATAA P Trigger1 GP1 SDATA4_P Trigger2 GP2 SDATAO P Reserve1 GP3 SDATA4_P Reserve2 GPA SDATAO P Marker1 GPS SDATA4_P Marker2 not available for Digital UO enhanced mode Remote command TRIG SOUR GPO see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 292 RF Power Trigger Source Trigger Source Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed measurement range For this purpose the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate fre q
301. ference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 334 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 333 Reference Marker Defines a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis results delta marker values If the reference marker is deactivated the delta marker referring to it is also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF on page 332 Linking to Another Marker Links the current marker to the marker selected from the list of active markers If the x axis value of the inital marker is changed the linked marker follows on the same x position Linking is off by default Using this function you can set two markers on different traces to measure the differ ence e g between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a reference trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt on page 334 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt on page 332 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK on page 331 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace deter mines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previ ously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of
302. figuration Alignment finished Please reconnect RTO CH1 to FSW IF OUT 2 GHz Oscilloscope FSW Rear Panel K K a a a a e E In order to switch from alignment mode to measurement mode move the cable from the FSW B2000 ALIGNMENT SIGNAL SOURCE back to the IF OUT 2 GHZ connec tor so that it is then connected to the CH1 input on the oscilloscope If UNCAL is displayed alignment was not yet performed successfully If both alignment steps were performed successfully the date of alignment is indicated For a description of possible errors see table 9 4 Remote commands SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment STEP STATe on page 273 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment DATE on page 273 6 3 2 Power Sensors The R amp S FSW can also analyze data from a connected power sensor e Basics on Power Gensors enin nsskn kits n nsr sss snas assa aa as dd a aa 130 e Power Sensor SCUINGS e caesen na in cvv Lala De EES SEET EeEG 132 e How to Work With a Power Gensor nennen enne nns 137 6 3 2 1 Basics on Power Sensors For precise power measurement up to 4 power sensors can be connected to the instru ment via the power sensor interface on the front panel Both manual operation and remote control are supported User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 130 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Configuration Currently only R amp S NRP Zxy power sensors ar
303. firmed SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 97 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements TRACe IQ EVAL State This command turns UO data analysis on and off Before you can use this command you have to turn on the I Q data acquisition using INST CRE NEW IQOr INST CRE REPL or using the TRACe IO STATe com mand to replace the current measurement channel while retaining the settings Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example TRAC IQ ON Enables UO data acquisition TRAC IQ EVAL ON Enables the UO data analysis mode TRACe IQ STATe State This command changes the application of the current measurement channel to UO Analyzer activating the simple UO data acquisition mode see Different remote modes available on page 215 Executing this command also has the following effects The sweep amplitude input and trigger settings from the previous application are retained All measurements from the previous application e g Spectrum are turned off e Alltraces are set to Blank mode e Thel Q data analysis mode is turned off TRAC IQ EVAL OFF
304. fix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect 10 1 6 10 1 6 1 Introduction Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values enee UR 212 ee se ette a eee eb nae pere ba eec deen E PO b ER 213 e Character RE TEE 213 Character SINGS rece tton ret a be b RR ERE UE NIFR eR Rx XE Ie a an x a tando 214 LEN S010 DAA NORTE 214 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you
305. g maxhold or averaging functions Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 172 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous State This command controls the sweep mode for an individual measurement channel Note that in single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous Sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual If the sweep mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate n SEQuencer IMMediate on page 321 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Suffix n irrelevant Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous sweep OFF 0 Single sweep RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sweep mode to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sweep mode to continuous sweep Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 171 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC
306. ge 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 154 Triggering The following remote commands are required to configure a triggered measurement in a remote environment More details are described for manual operation in chapter 6 6 Trigger Settings on page 154 OPC should be used after requesting data This will hold off any subsequent changes to the selected trigger source until after the sweep is completed and the data is returned e Configuring the Triggering Conditionis 2 cse tote rct ea 287 e Configuring the Trigger Output onere eene trt ete aA nnne en Inn IRR RES 294 e Configuring VO Gating ir roeduceodoed ede prea cade rer Ra neut ha eor pte Ice prit p kane idend 296 Configuring the Triggering Conditions The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement TRlGoert GtOuencelDBpbower HOL Dot 288 RRE E ee DTME ttes tt ht a rea den ror tdt nett 288 TRlIGger SEQuence HOLBoff TIME kriidi ccce eese i eer etes 288 TRIGSer SEQuence IEPowerhoOBDolt 1 cto rune eee yep eurn a Inr trea ee 289 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis eese nennen 289 TRIGSer SEQuencel EEVel BBPQGWONR cardine cce nuce hee iene ll Rte deer netta 289 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port cesses 290 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements TiIGger SEQuencel EE 290 qTRIGger
307. gger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement the measurement cannot be completed Remote command TRIG SOUR PSE see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 292 Time Trigger Source Trigger Source Triggers in a specified repetition interval Remote command TRIG SOUR TIME see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 292 Trigger Level Trigger Source Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 290 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower on page 291 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 290 For analog baseband or digital baseband input only TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 289 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower on page 291 Repetition Interval Trigger Source Defines the repetition interval for a time trigger The shortest interval is 2 ms The repetition interval should be set to the exact pulse period burst length frame length or other repetitive signal characteristic Remote command TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval on page 294 Drop Out Time Trigger Source Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Note For input from the optional Analog Baseband Interface using the baseband power trigger BBP the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to a
308. ggers With the R amp S FSW the power sensors can be connected to the Power Sensor inter face directly and no further cables are required They can then be configured as an external power sensor trigger Fig 6 3 Connecting a power sensor using the POWER SENSOR interface The R amp S FSW receives an external trigger signal when the defined trigger level is measured by the power sensor Power measurement results are provided as usual For details see How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External PSE Trigger on page 139 6 3 2 2 Power Sensor Settings Power sensor settings are available in the Power Sensor tab of the Input dialog box Each sensor is configured on a separate tab Data Input and Output Settings Input Source Power Sensor State on off Continuous Update mna of Sensorl D Select Auto Sensor2 Zeroing Power Sensor Meas gt Ref Sensor3 Frequency Manual Reference Value 67 19 67 19d8m Sensor4 o Frequency Coupling Iv Use Ref Level Offset Unit Scale Mm Number of Readings Meas Time Average Duty Cycle External Power Trigger External Trigger Level Hysteresis on dB Dropout Time 100 0 us Holdoff Time i0o 0s Slope Rising Falling Continuous Vals DDdte iccrt ee me o tr t e o eens 134 co f 134 Zelong Powebb TE 134 Frequency Manual 2 ere E EERSTEN 134 Fredgu ency e tele EE 135 Biel We S 135 Meas Eine POET 135 Setting
309. gnal from the Analog Baseband Interface is processed in the same manner as for other RF input see chap ter 5 1 Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input on page 23 However a trans ducer is activated before the common process to compensate for the additional path of the redirected signal Additionally the modulated signals can be converted to any fre quency in the analysis bandwidth Complex spectrum analysis However if the input is already available as a complex baseband signal I and Q sig nals the Analog Baseband Interface allows you to analyze the complex spectrum of the baseband signal This is useful for measurements in the early stages of signal pro cessing or radio transmission when the analog baseband signal has not yet been modulated Low IF signals UO input that has already been modulated Low IF signal is down converted digitally Data acquisition The Analog Baseband Interface of the R amp S FSW can process both single ended unbalanced and differential balanced input The signal is input to the R amp S FSW via the connectors of the Analog Baseband Interface If necessary for instance if the con nections are mixed up or the data is inverted by the device under test the and Q val ues in the input can be swapped The A D converter samples the input at a rate of 200 MHz As a result 200 megasamples of values and 200 megasamples of Q val ues are obtained per second Voltage levels full scale level
310. graphical diagrams marker tables or peak lists For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Measurements in the time and frequency domain The I Q Analyzer application not Master in MSRA mode can also perform measure ments on the captured UO data in the time and frequency domain see also chap ter 5 7 UO Analyzer in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode on page 92 They are con figured using the same settings and provide similar results In addition the analysis interval used for the measurement is indicated as in all multistandard applications The time and frequency domain measurements and the available results are described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Result displays for UO data MaA a 18 SPECON E 19 Heu E 20 Real Imag IQ iiir reete dee eee rd eens 20 Marker Table venga auseuannnitseeaceease susaana e AEE 21 Marker TE 21 Magnitude Shows the level values in time domain R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Measurement and Result Displays MultiView Spectrum Analog Demod IQ Analyzer 0 AQT 31 s SRate 32 0 MHz z RecLength e 1AP Clrw lagnitude 1001 pts Remote command LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH MAGN See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 313 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 357 Spectrum Displays the frequency spectrum of the captured UO samples MultiView SS IQ Analyzer Ref Level 30 00 dBm Meas Time 10 24 ms SRate 32 0 MHz Att OdB Freq 4 0GHz Rec
311. gs Note For the UO vector result display the number of UO samples to record Record Length must be identical to the number of trace points to be displayed Sweep Points Thus the sweep points are not editable for this result display If the Record Length is edited the sweep points are adapted automatically For record lengths outside the valid range of sweep points i e less than 101 points or more than 100001 points the diagram does not show valid results Note If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is used the record length may be restricted by the connected oscilloscope see its data sheet Remote command TRACe IQ RLENgth on page 303 TRACe IQ SET on page 304 Swap UO Activates or deactivates the inverted UO modulation If the and Q parts of the signal from the DUT are interchanged the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it On and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l Off and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe SWAPiq on page 302 RBW Defines the resolution bandwidth for Spectrum results The available RBW values depend on the sample rate and record length See chapter 5 6 4 Frequency Resolution of FFT Results RBW on page 90 Depending on the selected RBW mode the value is either determined automatically or can be defined manually As soon as you enter a value in the input field
312. gt Range 0 001 to 99 999 RST 99 999 Default unit Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Activates the duty cycle correction PMET2 DCYC VAL 0 5 Sets the correction value to 0 596 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Manual operation See Duty Cycle on page 136 SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency Frequency This command defines the frequency of the power sensor Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Frequency gt The available value range is specified in the data sheet of the power sensor in use RST 50 MHz Example PMET2 FREQ 1GHZ Sets the frequency of the power sensor to 1 GHz Manual operation See Frequency Manual on page 134 SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency LINK Coupling This command selects the frequency coupling for power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Coupling gt CENTer Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer MARKer1 Couples the frequency to the position of marker 1 OFF Switches the frequency coupling off RST CENTer Example PMET2 FREQ LINK CENT Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer Manual operation See Frequency Coupling on page 135 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe Duration This command selects the duration of power sensor measurements Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters Duration SH
313. h instruments are controlled by the R amp S FSW Thus the instruments must be connected via LAN and the TCPIP address or computer name of the oscilloscope must be defined on the R amp S FSW For tips on how to determine the computer name or TCPIP address see chapter 8 3 How to Configure Data Acquisition via the Optional 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 on page 200 or the oscilloscope s user documentation By default the TCPIP address is expected To enter the computer name toggle the 423 ABC button to ABC As soon as a name or address is entered the R amp S FSW attempts to establish a con nection to the oscilloscope If it is detected the oscilloscope s identity string is queried and displayed in the dialog box The alignment status is also displayed see Align ment on page 128 Note The IP address computer name is maintained after a PRESET and is transfer red between applications Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip on page 274 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope IDN on page 274 Alignment Access INPUT OUTPUT gt B2000 Config gt Alignment An initial alignment of the output to the oscilloscope is required once after setup It need only be repeated if a new oscilloscope is connected to the IF OUT 2 GHZ con nector of the R amp S FSW or if a new firmware is installed on the oscilloscope a E E E i d User Manual 1
314. hannel Such signals are referred to as UO signals UO signals are useful because the specific RF or IF frequencies are not needed The complete modulation information and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be ana lyzed in the I Q baseband Thus the I Q Analyzer is ideal for analyzing UO baseband signals The optional Digital Baseband Interface can be used to capture or output the I Q data The following typical applications use the R amp S Digital Baseband Interface Capturing and evaluating digital UO data in the UO Analyzer application of the R amp S FSW base unit or other optional applications e g R amp S FSW K70 VSA See also the description of the individual applications LVDS LVDS Digital Digital Baseband Baseband output input Signal generator Signal and Spectrum e g R amp S SMU Analyzer R amp S FSW Output of digital UO data to a selected receiver e g to implement fading simulat ing mobile radio communication participants using a generator LVDS LVDS Digital Digital Baseband Baseband output input l ke be er w ker er es Signal and Spectrum Signal generator Analyzer R amp S FSW e g R amp S SMU Capturing and evaluating digital UO data from a device with a user specific inter face using an R amp S EX IQ BOX see the R amp S9EX IQ BOX External Signal Inter face Module Manual LVDS LVDS Custom Custom Digital Digit
315. hannel 1 is reduced by half For details see the oscilloscope s data sheet and documentation IF Power trigger The IF power trigger is used to trigger on a current power level which corresponds to the envelope of the voltage However Rohde amp Schwarz oscilloscopes do not have power triggers or envelope triggers Therefore when using the B2000 option the IF power trigger corresponds to a width trigger with a negative polarity and the range longer on the oscilloscope The width is specified by the Trigger Drop out Time on the R amp S FSW with a default value of 1 us Triggering on a falling edge for the IF Power trigger with the B2000 option is not allowed Thus data acquisition starts when the power level at the signal fed into the CH1 input connector on the oscilloscope rises above the specified trigger level after having been below this level for a duration longer than the drop out time Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output trigger level Trigger Fig 5 28 Trigger event for IF power trigger using B2000 A Hysteresis defined on the R amp S FSW is used as the hysteresis for the width of the trigger on the oscilloscope By default this value is 0 However if a value other than 0 is defined an undefined state of the trigger system might occur Therefore the robust trigger option is activated on the oscilloscope The robust trigger shifts the trigger thresholds for the falling edge and for the risi
316. hardware option It is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 147 INPut EATT AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option It is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters State 110 ON OFF 1 ON 0 OFF RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 147 INPut EATT STATe State This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option It is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active 10 4 2 3 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters State 110 ON OFF 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 147 Configuring a Preamplifier INPUCGAIN STA KC 282 lenses m C Days 282 INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns th
317. he R amp S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator For details see chapter 5 4 5 7 Coupling the Frequencies on page 71 In figure 5 21 the TTL connection is illustrated using an R amp S SMU generator for exam ple R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing R amp S SMU rear panel 2 PF SS CLOCK INSTR 4 wi li EJ Se BNC Blank BNC Trigger E FSW B10 AUX CONTROL R amp S FSW rear panel Fig 5 21 TTL connection for an R amp S SMU generator In figure 5 22 the connection for an R amp S SMW is shown User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 64 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing R amp S SMW rear panel FSW B10 AUX CONTROL R amp S FSW rear panel Fig 5 22 TTL connection for an R amp S SMW generator The external generator can be used to calibrate the data source by performing either transmission or reflection measurements Transmission Measurement This measurement yields the transmission characteristics of a two port network The external generator is used as a signal source It is connected to the input connector of the DUT The input of the R amp S FSW is fed from the output of the DUT A calibration can be carried out to compensate for the effects of the test setup e g frequency response of connecting cables GEN OUTPUT DUT RF INPUT Fig 5 23 Test setup for transmission measurement
318. he following meaning Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface Table 5 7 Status information for digital baseband connections Icon Status Digital input Connection setup in progress Connection established e Connection error e Nocable connected although Digital UO input source state ON Digital UO input source state OFF and no cable connected Digital output Connection setup in progress Connection established iQ OUT Connection error e No cable connected although Digital UO output state ON Digital UO output source state OFF and no cable connected Error messages If an error occurs a message is displayed in the status bar and a status bit is set in one of the status registers For details on the message select it on the status bar See chapter 10 10 Querying the Status Registers on page 363 5 3 Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface Alternatively to capturing analog UO data from the standard RF INPUT connector on the front panel of the R amp S FSW analog baseband signals can also be captured via the optional Analog Baseband Interface if installed e Analog Baseband Input 50 Q Connectors optional 42 e Analog Baseband InpUlt uices cese eese engen eaput ocu pntn e re ER Enn LL LR unn 44 e W O Processing Modes rre decade dl ere cid rid 46 e Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Analog Baseband signals
319. ic mixer behavior Set the LO level of the mixer s LO port to 15 dBm SENS MIX LOP 15dBm Set the bias current to 1 mA SENS MIX BIAS LOW 1mA 9522 22 22 Configuring the mixer and band settings Use band V to full possible range extent for assigned harmonic 6 SENS MIX HARM BAND V SENS MIX RFOV ON Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Use a 3 port mixer type SENS MIX PORT 3 Split the frequency range into two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 average conv loss of 20 dB range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS LOW 20dB SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements fees Activating automatic signal identification functions Activate both automatic signal identification functions SENS MIX SIGN ALL Use auto ID threshold of 8 dB SENS MIX THR 8dB Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data for the input signal without distortions default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACE3 Configuring a conversion loss table for a user defin
320. ides analog baseband input or the probe must be connected to the R amp S FSW accordingly Since the Digital UO input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal path both cannot be used simultaneously When one is activated established connec tions for the other are disconnected When the second input is deactivated connec tions to the first are re established This may cause a short delay in data transfer after Switching the input source R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing pae M eene 5 3 2 Input via the Analog Baseband Interface can be enabled in the I Q Analyzer the Ana log Demodulation application or in one of the optional applications that process UC data where available Analog Baseband Input The Analog Baseband Interface can be used as an alternative data input source for measurements with the R amp S FSW Either an analog baseband signal is input at the BASEBAND INPUT I and BASEBAND INPUT Q connectors and processed from there or an RF signal is input at the BASEBAND INPUT I connector and redirected from there to the RF input path The BASEBAND INPUT I connector cannot be used to input RF signals on the R amp S FSW67 or R amp S FSW85 RF signals via the Analog Baseband Interface For RF signals that are redirected to the RF input path the si
321. if power measurement is generally acti vated State function The detected serial numbers of the power sensors connected to the instrument are provided in a selection list For each of the four available power sensor indexes Power Sensor 1 Power Sensor 4 which correspond to the tabs in the configura tion dialog one of the detected serial numbers can be assigned The physical sensor is thus assigned to the configuration setting for the selected power sensor index By default serial numbers not yet assigned are automatically assigned to the next free power sensor index for which Auto Assignment is selected Alternatively you can assign the sensors manually by deactivating the Auto option and selecting a serial number from the list Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe on page 268 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p DEFine on page 262 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt CONFigure AUTO STATe on page 261 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt on page 262 Zeroing Power Sensor Starts zeroing of the power sensor For details on the zeroing process refer to the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command CALibration PMETer p ZERO AUTO ONCE on page 263 Frequency Manual Defines the frequency of the signal to be measured The power sensor has a memory with frequency dependent correction factors This allows extreme accuracy for signals of a known frequency Remote command
322. if previous applica tion was also I Q Analyzer Note To turn trace display back on or to enable the evaluation functions of the UO Analyzer execute the TRAC IQ EVAL ON command see TRACe IO EVAL on page 220 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example TRAC IQ ON Switches on UO data acquisition 10 4 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements The following commands configure the UO Analyzer measurements e Configuring the Data Input and Output eene 221 e Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Gcalmg 278 iUe PERDE DELETE 285 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements 10 4 1 10 4 1 1 TMCS e EE Configuring Data ACQUISINON EE e Adjusting Settings Automatically seen Configuring the Data Input and Output The following commands are required to configure data input and output PRP le EP HH input from VQ Data EE Configuring Digital UO Input and Output Configuring Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface E Luet SOUMI UP PROMOS EE External erte 2 eo Reese geed Sgr seed Working with e EE coerceri eec iier e teo evecta eee Configuring the 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 CONMGUMING ge tre RE Input INPut ATTenuation PRO Tecton E ET iter M ll euer ee ie M M li sid E SI o PE RERO E ERECTO IL EES re lee E SPS
323. ifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level In some result displays the scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Amplitude Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 279 Unit Reference Level The R amp S FSW measures the signal voltage at the RF input In the default state the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW dBm Via the known input impedance 50 Q or 75 Q see Impedance on page 100 conversion to other units is possible The following units are available and directly convertible dBm dBmV dByV dBpA dBpW Volt Ampere Watt Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 223 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer on page 279 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level
324. igned to the Power Sensor 2 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Manual operation See Select on page 134 Configuring Power Sensor Measurements GALibration PMETereps ZEROUAUTO Dei e 263 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitUE ce eee eeee eee ee eee ae eee eeeteneeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 263 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE 264 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative STAT6 2 2 c ccsceeseneseeeneeeneceseananeeaeaeananaanenenens 264 PET ORI EE 264 jdm EE 265 SENS amp PMETersp DOYGle STAT uario aporta REESEN e 265 SENSe PMETersps DOYOlge MALUe ton 1r nite etre anta Aaa E REA EREE 265 SENSe PMETer p FREQuency onec nuce iania adaa aa kaada abl T EEN 266 SENS amp eTPMETersps FREQUEN y LINK oet iet eater o reget ette 266 SENSE PMET ers p gt MTI MEncoder reet te rete oed pou aad eia to iL edd oto eve ed edd 266 ISGENGe JpME Ter pzMlMeAVERage COUN nnne entr nnne nna n 267 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage STATe sese 267 SBENSe PMETer p ROFFSet S TATe inccr oti rote eter ere teen EES 268 ISENSeJPMEBTerspes EE 268 ISGENZGeJpMtE TercpzUb atel STATel eene nennen nnne 268 UNITA PME Ter p gt POWE ace deretur ene ree enn eee o ead ex ae ede 269 UNIT n PMETersps POWer RATIO EE 269 CALibration PMETer lt p gt ZERO AUTO ONCE This commands starts to zero the power sensor
325. illoscope 10 4 1 10 0 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt CoupType gt Coupling type DC Direct connection with 50 O termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal CDLimit Direct connection with 1 MO termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal AC Connection through capacitor removes unwanted DC and very low frequency components RST DC Manual operation See Coupling on page 161 Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 10 4 4 2 Configuring the Trig ger Output on page 294 DIAGNOStIEISERVice NS OUnC eas x3 cect sceedsc ntaven sins pei ree Rape trt e pae de e tope ex cba eua d RR das 276 OUT PUEI Eliette geen 276 OUNPUBIFE SOURCE 12 2 2 eri RUE ERU RR Ota E e uz en ed EMI ARERRKED MUNERE 277 QUTPUGIPIFERGQGUGMCY 2 e sdeeege uge dE Ee aaa ai 278 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce State This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the R amp S FSW on and off For details see chapter 5 4 8 Input from Noise Sources on page 83 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 141 OUTPut IF SBANd This command queries the sideband provided at the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector com pared to the sideband of the RF signal The sideband depends on the current center frequency This command is availabl
326. ime you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 with an IF power trigger only rising slopes can be detected For details see IF Power trigger on page 80 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 292 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW Trigger input parameters are available in the Trigger dialog box Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 295 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 294 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg iste
327. in an editor in read only mode directly from the External Generator configuration dialog box From there they can be edited and stored under a different name and are then available on the R amp S FSW For details see the R amp S FSW User Manual Calibration Mechanism A common measurement setup includes a signal generator a device under test DUT and a signal and spectrum analyzer Therefore it is useful to measure the attenuation or gain caused by the cables and connectors from the signal generator and the signal analyzer in advance The known level offsets can then be removed from the measure ment results in order to obtain accurate information on the DUT Calculating the difference between the currently measured power and a reference trace is referred to as calibration Thus the measurement results from the controlled external generator including the inherent distortions can be used as a reference trace to calibrate the measurement setup The inherent frequency and power level distortions can be determined by connecting the R amp S FSW to the signal generator The R amp S FSW sends a predefined list of fre User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 68 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing pae R H P A PWM Si 5 4 5 5 quencies to the signal generator see also chapter 5 4 5 7 Coupling the F
328. in female 0 050 Mini D Ribbon connector e g 3M 102XX 1210VE series For the connection use the cables provided with the R amp S EX IQ BOX or an R amp SGSMU Z6 cable order no 1415 0201 02 13 LV C rura eno Fig 1 1 LVDS connector on the R amp S FSW rear panel connector front view The table 1 1 shows the multiplexed data at the output of the LVDS transmitter Table 1 1 LVDS connector pin description Pin Signal Level Description 1 reserved for future use 2 GND OV Ground shield of pair 1 14 for future use 3 SDATO P LVDS Serial data channel 0 positive pin carries the bits VALID ENABLE MARKER 1 GP4 Reserve 1 GP2 RE 0 RE 1 4 SDAT1 P LVDS Serial data channel 1 positive pin carries the bits RE 2 RE 3 RE 4 RE 5 RE 6 RE 7 5 SDAT2 P LVDS Serial data channel 2 positive pin carries the bits RE 8 RE 9 RE 10 RE 11 RE 12 RE 13 6 CLK1 P LVDS Clock 1 positive pin clock for transmission on LVDS link R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input EH A 2 Annex Reference Pin Signal S CLK Level Description for future use 5VD Supply voltage for future use SDAT3_P Serial data channel 3 positive pin carries the bits RE_14 RE_15 RE_16 RE_17 RE_18 RE_19 SDAT4_P Serial data channel 4 positive pin carries the bits TRIGGER_1 GPO TRIGGER 2 GP1 MARKER 2 GP5 Reserve 2 GP3 IM 0 IM 1 SDAT5 P Serial data channel 5 posi
329. ing seesseesss 127 Alignment Bandwidth extension ancor eter tenemos 76 GEL Connections Controlling oscilloscopes 0 0 eee ee ee eee eee terete 78 Data e E External mixers External tigge c IF POWER QOER E Measurement setup Re lee Prerequisites 5 cote egen Remote commands tele Le EE Signal processing ci E Buren eet We WEE Band COMVEFSION losS table cios dee rer 112 External Mixer n External Mixer Remote control 238 Bandwidth Analysis esed 165 Depending on sample rate 40 Digital l G data nee nt ete 39 Extension options 26 165 Extension options see also B2000 76 e Analyzer vcro cette oet teda d 25 Maximum usable 25 165 Relationship to sample rate ssssssussss 27 Settings uir eee eren ren e nerd 163 Baseband Input CONNECTIONS E M 42 BB Power Trigger SOftKey 2 tret ratae itte 158 Bias Conversion loss table sesssssssss 108 112 External Mixer n 55 108 External Mixer Remote control 235 Branch for peak search de Analyzer a catt terti iret teet bete 188 C Calibration Analog Baseband Interface sessssssss External geherator asasena External generator remote ssess
330. input via the optional Digital Base band Interface or the optional Analog Baseband interface PSEN External power sensor RST IMMediate TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Manual operation See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 136 See Trigger Source on page 156 See Free Run on page 156 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 156 See External CH3 on page 157 See IF Power on page 157 See Baseband Power on page 158 See UO Power on page 158 See Digital UO on page 158 See RF Power on page 159 See Power Sensor on page 159 See Time on page 160 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval Interval This command defines the repetition interval for the time trigger Parameters Interval 2 0 ms to 5000 Range 2ms to 5000s RST 1 0s Example TRIG SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering TRIG TIME RINT 50 The sweep starts every 50 s Manual operation See Repetition Interval on page 160 10 4 4 2 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW OUTPuETRIGSerSport RE E 294 QUTPUb TsIGgereport LEV occ unii reet rore crepitu paio neca tte nt ona teu ape DEE 295 ECK UC hRIGSersporn cO TY pace eden E encanto etu rra Eeer 295 OUTbutTRlGoerzportz PULL GelMMedlate enne
331. ionally a trigger signal for example from the TRIG OUT connector of the R amp S FSW can be connected to the CH3 input connector of the oscilloscope R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing Fig 5 27 Measurement setup using the R amp S FSW and an R amp S RTO 5 4 7 3 Controlling the Oscilloscope The entire measurement via the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector and an oscilloscope as well as both instruments are controlled by the R amp S FSW Thus the instruments must be connected via LAN and the TCPIP address or computer name of the oscilloscope must be defined on the R amp S FSW For tips on how to determine the oscilloscope s computer name or IP address see chapter 8 3 How to Configure Data Acquisition via the Optional 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 on page 200 As soon as the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is activated see B2000 State on page 127 the R amp S FSW takes control of the oscilloscope The display on the oscilloscope is turned off to improve performance during data export As soon as the R amp S FSW closes the connection to the oscilloscope the display is reacti vated and the oscilloscope can be operated as usual However if the LAN connection is lost for any reason the display of the oscilloscope remains deactivated Restart the oscilloscope to reactivate the display Alternatively re establish the connection and then close it properly o
332. ions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 101 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for UO Analyzer GSM VSA Pulse Amplifier Transient Analysis DOCSIS and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 101 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input In some applica tions only 50 O are supported 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 O in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 The command is not available for measurements with the optional Digital Baseband Interface Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 100 See Unit on page 146 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S FSW If no additional input options are installed only RF input is supported Parameters Source RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ data only available with optional Digital Baseband Interface For details on
333. is process is called windowing Basics on FFT After sampling in the time domain each window is multiplied with a specific window function Windowing helps minimize the discontinuities at the end of the measured sig nal interval and thus reduces the effect of spectral leakage increasing the frequency resolution Various different window functions are provided in the R amp S FSW to suit different input signals Each of the window functions has specific characteristics including some advantages and some trade offs These characteristics need to be considered carefully to find the optimum solution for the measurement task QD Ignoring the window function rectangular window The regtangular window function is in effect not a function at all it maintains the origi nal sampled data This may be useful to minimize the required bandwidth however be aware that if the window does not contain exactly one period of your signal heavy sidelobes may occur which do not exist in the original signal 5 6 2 Table 5 9 Characteristics of typical FFT window functions Window type Frequency Magnitude Sidelobe sup Measurement recommendation resolution resolution pression Rectangular Best Worst Worst No function applied Separation of two tones with almost equal amplitudes and a small fre quency distance Blackman Harris Good Good Good Harmonic detection and spurious default emission detection Gauss Alpha Goo
334. ision of the analog baseband signals related to the external trigger signal and the RF signal the High Accuracy Timing Trig ger Baseband RF option can be activated for analog baseband input see High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF on page 117 Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface 5 3 3 Prerequisites for previous models of R amp S FSW For R amp S FSW models with a serial number lower than 103000 special prerequisites and restrictions apply for high accuracy timing To obtain this high timing precision trigger port 1 and port 2 must be connected via the Cable for High Accuracy Timing order number 1325 3777 00 e As trigger port 1 and port 2 are connected via the cable only trigger port 3 can be used to trigger a measurement Trigger port 2 is configured as output if the high accuracy timing option is active Make sure not to activate this option if you use trigger port 2 in your measurement setup When you first enable this setting you are prompted to connect the cable for high accuracy timing to trigger ports 1 and 2 If you cancel this prompt the setting remains disabled As soon as you confirm this prompt the cable must be in place UO Processing Modes The Analog Baseband Interface provides different methods of processing the base band input UO modes depending on the measurement requirements Complex baseband mode I jQ In the default complex baseband mode the analog inp
335. ited Special B2000 tables in b2g files can only be imported and deleted Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 245 Data Input and Output Settings Delete Table Deletes the currently selected conversion loss table after you confirm the action Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr on page 243 Import Table Imports a stored conversion loss table from any directory and copies it to the instru ments C r_s instr user cv1 directory It can then be assigned for use for a specific frequency range see Conversion loss on page 106 Note When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 special conversion loss tables are required Supported tables have the file extension 529 as opposed to ac1 for common tables While ac1 files can be used data acquisition with the B2000 option using such con version loss tables will lead to substantial inaccuracy Using no conversion loss tables at all during data acquisition with the B2000 option will cause even more inaccuracy Note that only common conversion loss tables in ac1 files can be edited Special B2000 tables in b2g files can only be imported and deleted For more details see chapter 5 4 7 7 External Mixers and B2000 on page 81 Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conver sion Loss Table New Table Edit Table or IN
336. l s 336 339 Peak JEU E 189 Peak remote control Peak list remote control A 344 e E ee PEE Positioning ee Positioning remote control sisarien 331 Querying position remote sese 361 Retrieving results remote re Search remote control essssssss 336 Setting center frequency eere 189 Setting reference level T EE e E Step size remote control BER 185 Table evaluation method ssssssss 21 Table remote control m Ke SNE EE Maximizing WiridoWs retmote e eene tree icti tae 312 Meas Time hardware setting sess 13 Measurement accuracy External generator s cete bie teet hnc vedette 69 Measurement channel Creating remote 216 219 Deleting remote wets att terere 217 Duplicating remote 216 Querying remote 217 Renaming remote 218 Replacing remote 24 216 Selecting remote sesesse 219 Measurement time AUO Setllngs ocn eer tette e 174 DISPIAVER ia 13 V Q data 166 Power sensor 2 135 Ip i o MES 324 Microbutton ie 119 MINIMUM gedoe 189 Marker positioning 189 NERU esis india use iri deesse Code a liens hod 189 Mixer Type External MIxet 2 2 arden Ecos 105 MKR MP P 181 MKR gt ees iet eiua as 186 188
337. l see INSTrument SELect on page 219 Be Dee EIB det 313 LAYGUEGATalog WIN DOW cni rodea cete atr tete dre tct e n eed o 314 LAYoutTDENty WINBOW 1i ioi o eaae ta esten to abeo eee dude pu TEA cce w EP opc IDEEN Ua 314 Bd E Ee EE 314 LAYout REPLace WINDOW eere rhet Fue ecce ctp tic enar nor poen cane pedea adadda 315 LAYOUTS PIG e M 315 LAY out WINDOW SAP ADD EE 317 LAYoutWINDow n IDEMtify ecu deerit natn eren enne epa ace bpm enne eR enn 317 Bd De det 317 LAYOuWINDOWSn gt RE PLACG T 318 Configuring the Result Display LAYout ADD WINDow WindowName Direction WindowType This command adds a window to the display in the active measurement channel This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the t
338. lanked out Time constant spectrum The automatic comparison of the test sweep and reference sweep with the Auto ID function can only be applied usefully for signals with a time constant spectrum since the two sweeps are always required to determine the actual spectrum Mixer products with low S N ratio If the S N ratio of a mixer product is lower than the user defined thereshold the level difference between the test sweep and reference sweep at the frequency of this mixer product is always within limits even if the signal occurs in one of the sweeps only Such mixer products cannot be identified by the Auto ID function It is therefore recom mended that you perform a visual comparison of the test sweep and reference sweep using the Signal ID function User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 59 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Examining unwanted mixer products with small span With large spans in which non modulated sinewave signals are represented as single lines unwanted mixer products are generally completely blanked out However if you examine the frequency range containing a blanked signal in detail using a small span e g an image frequency response part of the signal may nevertheless be displayed This happens when the displayed components of a blanked signal have a level differ ence which is smaller than the user defined threshold when compared with the noise floor These components are therefore not blanked out A
339. late lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt State This command links normal marker lt m1 gt to any active normal marker m2 If you change the horizontal position of marker m2 marker m1 changes its hori zontal position to the same value Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links marker 4 to marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 183 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 182 See Marker Type on page 183 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters lt Trace gt Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 183 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis 10 7 2 2 IO Analysis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a de
340. le or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt IQ file This input source is not available in all applications and not in MSRA MSRT oper ating mode Spectrum Input Source ME ao Frequency Input File Digital IQ C R_S Instr user predefined D_Waveform iq tar Select File Saved by FSW K Comment Date amp time 2015 02 18T 11 16 53 1Q File Sample rate 204 8 MHz Number of samples 1228800 Duration of signal 6ms Number of channels 1 6 3 1 3 Data Input and Output Settings For details see chapter 5 4 6 Basics on Input from UO Data Files on page 75 Lor aput EE 103 select le Data Te 103 UO Input File State Activates input from the selected UO input file If enabled the application performs measurements on the data from this file Thus most measurement settings related to data acquisition attenuation center frequency measurement bandwidth sample rate cannot be changed The measurement time can only be decreased in order to perform measurements on an extract of the availa ble data only Note Even when the file input is deactivated the input file remains selected and can be activated again quickly by changing the state Remote command INPut SELect on page 224 Select UO Data File Opens a file selection dialog box to select an input file that contains I Q data Note that the UO data must have a specific format iq tar as descri
341. le rate is displayed lt FullScaleLevel gt The level in dBm that should correspond to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 if transferred from connected device If not available 1 ONAN not a number is returned Example INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMW200A 101190 BBMM 1 OUT 100000000 200000000 Passed Passed 1 1 4QNAN Manual operation See Connected Instrument on page 115 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO lt State gt If enabled the digital input full scale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface is installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 115 INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling lt State gt If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the full scale level changes This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 115 Configuring I Q Analyzer Measurements INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer Level Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that corresponds to an UO sam ple with the magnitude 1 This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters
342. le rate of 600 MHz Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 35 MHz proportional up to maximum 28 MHz 35 MHz to 10 GHz 28 MHz MSRA master 35 MHz to 600 MHz 5 1 1 5 R amp S FSW with option B40 or U40 UO Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 40 MHz MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 50 MHz proportional up to maximum 40 MHz 50 MHz to 10 GHz 40 MHz MSRA master 50 MHz to 600 MHz 5 1 1 6 Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input R amp S FSW with option B80 or U80 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 80 MHz o 5 1 1 7 MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 100 MHz proportional up to maximum 80 MHz 100 MHz to 10 GHz 80 MHz MSRA master 100 MHz to 600 MHz R amp S FSW with activated option B160 or U160 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 160 MHz d MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 200 MHz proportional up to maximum 160 MHz 200 MHz to 10 GHz 160 MHz MSRA master 200 MHz to 600 MHz
343. lication Introduction to and getting familiar with the application Typical Applications for the UO Analyzer and optional input interfaces Example measurement scenarios for UO data import and analysis Measurements and Result Displays Details on supported measurements and their result types Basics on UO Data Acquisition Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the I Q Ana lyzer application as well as processing digital UO data in general Configuration and Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to import capture and analyze UO data in the I Q Analyzer with or without optional interfaces with their corresponding remote control command How to Work with UO Data The basic procedure to perform an UO Analyzer measurement or capture data via the R amp S Digital Baseband Interface with step by step instructions Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the test setup Remote Commands to perform Measurements with UO Data Remote commands required to configure and perform UO Analyzer measurements or process digital I Q data in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FSW User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes Annex R
344. lied to both input sockets referenced to the ground socket This is particularly helpful for mea surements on differential signals with high common mode levels for example current measurements using a shunt resistor CM offset setting 0 V CM offset setting 22 V 30 V ELI EI I IND Signal 25V clipping OOOOOOOQ 20V TRU o 15V 9 VP I 2 p D HII HII 5V a ere E raay OOO Fig 5 15 Common mode CM offset compensation for a differential measurement QD Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output If the input signals fit into the operating voltage window of the R amp S9RT ZD10 20 30 it is not necessary to set a common mode offset compensation Clipping effects due to incorrect common mode offset The R amp S9RT ZD10 20 30 probe measures only differential input signals Common mode signals are suppressed by the probe Therefore the common mode offset com pensation is not directly visible in the result display An incorrect common mode offset compensation can lead to unwanted clipping effects Measuring the common mode input voltage using the R amp S ProbeMeter is a convenient way to detect breaches of the operating voltage window For more information on common mode offset see the R amp S9RT ZD10 20 30 User Man ual 5 4 4 5 4 4 1 A common mode offset is only configurable in remote control see SENSe PROBe p SETup CMOFfset on page 248 Basics on External Mixers Some background knowledge on
345. lt displays and analysis functions provided by the UO Analyzer can also be used in MSRA mode In MSRT mode the MSRT Master performs a real time measurement to capture data Note that the available functions and settings for the I Q Analyzer in MSRA mode vary depending on whether the MSRA Master channel or an UO Analyzer application chan nel is selected For example data acquisition settings for an UO Analyzer application channel in MSRA mode configure the analysis interval not an actual data capture from the input signal And measurements in the time and frequency domain are only availa ble in an UO Analyzer application channel in MSRA mode R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard signals is how each data channel is correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the measurement in all applications and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit dia grams By default the analysis line is displayed however it c
346. lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous on page 327 Smoothing If enabled the trace is smoothed by the specified value between 1 96 and 50 96 The smoothing value is defined as a percentage of the display width The larger the smoothing value the greater the smoothing effect For more information see the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SMOothing STATe on page 328 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SMOothing APERture on page 327 Average Mode Defines the mode with which the trace is averaged over several sweeps A different averaging mode can be defined for each trace This setting is only applicable if trace mode Average is selected How many sweeps are averaged is defined by the Sweep Average Count on page 170 Linear The power level values are converted into linear units prior to averag ing After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit Logarithmic For logarithmic scaling the values are averaged in dBm For linear scaling the behavior is the same as with linear averaging Trace Settings Power Activates linear power averaging The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averag ing After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit Use this mode to average power values in Volts or Amperes cor rectly Remote command SENSe AVERage lt n gt TYPE on page 328 Predefined
347. lta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit depends on the result display Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 21 See Marker Peak List on page 21 See Marker Position X value on page 183 General Marker Settings The following commands control general marker functionality Remote commands exclusive to general marker functionality Pci MTAB E ES 335 DISPlay MINFO STAT ccce tenent tenente teret te tt teet te tests Dos 335 CAL Culate nzM AbkercmzXGGlze nnne rhnasnsen sensns r sa sad an ananas 336 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off AUTO Turns the marker table on if 3 or more markers are active RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 185 DISPlay MINFo STAT lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker information in all diagrams on and off 10 7 2 3 IO Analysis Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Displays the marker information in the diagrams OFF Hides the marker information in the diagrams RST ON Example DISP MINF OFF
348. lysis functions in the Spec trum application except for the special marker functions e Configuring Standard Traces cere ede rcr eet aee 325 e Using MaIKBES iicet rr rt n i ERE RU Gage 330 e Zooming into the Display 347 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only 349 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only 351 10 7 1 Configuring Standard Traces Useful commands for trace configuration described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 284 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 283 Remote commands exclusive to trace configuration DISPlayEWINDowens E TRACBSESMOD IE Een th ace eat nete beet ier 326 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztTR ACectsMODE HCOhNtnuous nennen 327 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe essere renes 327 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SMOothing APERture nen 327 DISPlay WINDow n TRACec t SMOothing STATe eee 328 ISENSeJAVERagesti TYPE E 328 IO Analysis BENSE JiuiNDow nz JDETechorzGfFUNGCHon nennen 328 SENSe WINDow n DETector t FUNCtion AUTO eeeeeeeeeeeen nennen 329 TRACE KEE Em 329 ISENS amp JAVERagesti COUR rer iita re t ecd aon n ei a cl b 330 Bine IO AVERage COUN D 330 SENSe AVERagesn ESTATest iieiiire cette aaa nb
349. m the defined sample rate see chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 25 Marker settings are now window specific EE E Le oer Do e RD eine sch a ee RR Ene oa cba ag esca paa eR RRR UNS 181 e Marker Search Settings and Positioning FUNCTIONS cccceeeeeeeeeeetetteeeeenees 186 e Marker Peak List Configutatior iun eo eter a e iia dices 190 Marker Settings or MKR gt Marker Config The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chap ter 10 7 2 1 Setting Up Individual Markers on page 331 e Jjaodividual Marke Setup eset eet e reme to err erben ee eee eae A nnd 181 General Marker SeHIngs ien o erre repere cy HERE DR HET RE PA A EXE TEE 184 Individual Marker Setup Up to 17 markers or delta markers can be activated for each window simultaneously Initial marker setup is performed using the Marker dialog box Marker Usage ER Markers Marker Settings Search Settings Ref Marker 20 0 MHz f hos 3 696 MHz 3 317MHz Selected Stimulus Link to Marker Trace O g F i E 2 EAS NI E 3 E SIE de E g E S E The markers are distributed among 3 tabs for a better overview By default the first marker is defined as a normal marker whereas all others are defined as delta markers with reference to the first marker All markers are assigned to trace 1 but only the first marker is active Selected BEE
350. mand controls the Negative TRansition part of a register 10 10 2 Querying the Status Registers Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable DIQ Register
351. med at any time namely the one in the currently active channel However in order to perform the configured measurements consecu tively a Sequencer function is provided If activated the measurements configured in the currently active channels are per formed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a 3 symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs as well as the MultiView as the measurements are per formed Sequential operation itself is independent of the currently displayed tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during I Q Analyzer operation All different information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the follow ing sections R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Welcome to the UO Analyzer Application MultiView Spectrum Spectrum 2 IQ Analyzer Ref Level 0 00 r AQT 1 3 SRate 32 0 MHz Att IUE Freq 3 MHz RecLength spear 2 CF 30 0 MHz 5 1001 pts Span 32 0 MHz Fig 2 1 Screen elements in the I Q Analyzer application 1 Channel bar for firmvare and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area with marker information 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on result display 6 In
352. mmand SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe on page 266 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage STATe on page 267 Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas gt Ref Sets the currently measured power as a reference value for the relative display The reference value can also be set manually via the Reference Value setting Remote command CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE on page 264 Reference Value Defines the reference value for relative measurements in the unit dBm Remote command CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude on page 263 Data Input and Output Settings Use Ref Lev Offset If activated takes the reference level offset defined for the analyzer into account for the measured power see Shifting the Display Offset on page 145 If deactivated takes no offset into account Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt ROFFset STATe on page 268 Average Count Number of Readings Defines the number of readings averages to be performed after a single sweep has been started This setting is only available if manual averaging is selected Meas Time Average setting The values for the average count range from 0 to 256 in binary steps 1 2 4 8 For average count 7 0 or 1 one reading is performed The general averaging and sweep count for the trace are independent from this setting Results become more stable with extended average particul
353. mmand is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 254 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CORR ON Activates normalization Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Source Calibration Normalize on page 125 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerator Name This command uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor with up to 1001 points The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix tra under c r_s instr trd The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency The generated transducer factor can be further adapted using the commands descri bed in the Remote Commands gt Configuring the R amp S FSW gt Working with Transduc ers section in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt Name gt lt name gt Example CORR TRAN GEN SMW200A1 Creates the transducer file C r_s instr trd SMW200A trd Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Save As Trd Factor on page 126 Programming Example for External Generator Control The following example demonstrates how to work with an external generator in a remote environment It assumes a signal generator of the type SMWO6 is connected to the R amp S FSW including TTL synchronization as described in chapter 5 4 5 1 External Generator Connections on page 63
354. mode Marker demodulation Frequency counter marker e Gated measurement e Video trigger Configuration Overview 6 Configuration The I Q Analyzer is a special application on the R amp S FSW which you activate using the MODE key When you switch to an UO Analyzer measurement channel the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate a measurement channel for the UO Analyzer application data acquisition from the input signal is started automatically with the default configuration It can be configured in the UO Analyzer Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu The main configuration settings and dialog boxes are also available via the I Q Ana lyzer menu which is displayed when you press the MEAS CONFIG key The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 10 Remote Commands to Perform Measurements with UO Data on page 209 Importing and Exporting UO Data The I Q data to be evaluated in the I Q Analyzer application can not only be captured by the UO Analyzer itself it can also be imported to the R amp S FSW provided it has the correct format Furthermore the captured UO data from the UO Analyzer c
355. mp S DiglConf application see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Inter face Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is minimized not closed If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSW once again Analog Baseband Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the optional Ana log Baseband Interface in the applications that support it They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box adios o we Frequency Input Settings Digital IQ 1 Q Mode Input Config Analog Baseband S SS 3 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF IQ File Signal Path Analog I jQ For more information on the optional Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Analog Baseband Input SEG costera tl eorr d eee 117 VO E ERR 117 PE ees RE 117 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband HE 117 Centor FROQUBMGY P 118 Data Input and Output Settings Analog Baseband Input State Enables or disable the use of the Analog Baseband input source for measurements Analog B
356. mple DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid for all traces t is irrelevant The R amp S FSW adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly For measurements with the optional external generator control the command defines the position of the reference value Parameters Position 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corre sponds to the upper display border RST 100 PCT frequency display 50 PCT time dis play Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Position on page 126 See Ref Level Position on page 152 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant 10 4 3 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in the specified unit PERCent Linear scaling in RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Selects linear scaling in Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Scaling on page 152 Frequency CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CENTer sessi nnne nena rnit 285 ISENSeTEREOUSDOUOBNTBE xci o rete
357. n If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the R amp S FSW you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 13 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value For the R amp S FSW85 the mechanical attenuation can be varied only in 10 dB steps User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 147 Amplitude If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote c
358. n and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 182 See Marker Type on page 183 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The value range and unit depend on the measure ment and scale of the x axis Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See Marker Position X value on page 183 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers IO Analysis Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 184 CALCu
359. n any inherent frequency or power distor tions Thus the measured DUT values are very accurate Approximate normalization As soon as any of the calibration measurement settings are changed the stored refer ence trace will no longer be identical to the new measurement results However if the measurement settings do not deviate too much the measurement results can still be normalized approximately using the stored reference trace This is indicated by the APX label in the channel bar instead of NOR This is the case if one or more of the following values deviate from the calibration set tings coupling RBW VBW SWT reference level RF attenuation start or stop frequency output level of external generator detector max peak min peak sample etc frequency deviation at a maximum of 1001 points within the set sweep limits corre sponds to a doubling of the span Differences in level settings between the reference trace and the current instrument settings are taken into account automatically If the span is reduced a linear interpola tion of the intermediate values is applied If the span increases the values at the left or User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 69 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing pae M SE SS EN right border of the reference dataset are extrapolated to the cu
360. n enn pea NEES ane EES 330 TRACelO AVERaoel GTATel nene ehnh pa i pinia adiaka danaa 330 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode Parameters lt Mode gt WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment Manual operation See Trace Mode on page 178 IO Analysis DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous State This command turns an automatic reset of a trace on and off after a parameter has changed The rese
361. n for marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event IO Analysis Manual operation See Peak Search on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum AUTO lt State gt This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace minimum on and off The R amp S FSW performs the peak search after each sweep Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK MIN AUTO ON Activates the automatic minimum value search function for marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a
362. n the sample rate Parameters Bandwidth For details on the maximum bandwidth see chapter 5 1 1 Sam ple Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 25 Manual operation See Analysis Bandwidth on page 165 TRACe 1Q DIQFilter State This command is only available when using the optional Digital Baseband Interface By default a decimation filter is used during data acquisition to reduce the sample rate to the value defined using TRACe IO SRATe If the filter is bypassed the sample rate is identical to the input sample rate configured for the Digital UO input source see INPut DIO SRATe on page 228 Parameters State ON OFF ON The digital UO filter bypass is on i e no filter or resampler is used during UO data acquisition OFF The filter bypass is off i e decimation filter and resampler are used during UO data acquisition RST OFF Manual operation See Omitting the Digital Decimation Filter No Filter on page 166 TRACe IQ RLENgth lt NoOfSamples gt This command sets the record length for the acquired UO data Increasing the record length also increases the measurement time Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Note Alternatively you can define the measurement time using the SENS SWE TIME command Parameters lt NoOfSamples gt Number of samples to record See chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page
363. n unwanted signal with a S N ratio that corresponds approximately to the user defined threshold may not be blanked out permanently Due to the fact that the noise display varies from one sweep to another the S N ratio changes and thus the level dif ference between the test sweep and reference sweep measured at a frequency changes as well As a result the criterion for detecting unwanted signals is not fulfilled To blank out unwanted signals permanently an almost constant noise indication is therefore required This can be achieved by reducing the video bandwidth Since the average noise indication lies well below the generated noise peak values the minimum level diminishes For identification using the Auto ID function signals should have this minimum noise level Display of mixer products at the same frequency If the input signal consists of a very large number of spectral components it will become more and more probable that two different unwanted mixer products will be displayed at the same frequency in the test sweep and reference sweep R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing M Fig 5 19 Different mixer products displayed at the same frequency in the test sweep and reference sweep large span Example The external mixer is set to use the 2nd order harmonic The signal recorded in the test sweep is displayed by trace 1 The IF filter of the R amp S FSW is represented at a 3 dB ba
364. nalyzed IO Analysis Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches on search limitation Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 187 See Deactivating All Search Limits on page 188 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits LEFT lt SearchLimit gt This command defines the left limit of the marker search range for all markers in all windows lt m gt n are irrelevant If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Parameters lt SearchLimit gt The value range depends on the frequency range or sweep time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements RST left diagram border Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 10MHz Sets the left limit of the search range to 10 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 187 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits RIGHT lt SearchLimit gt This command defines the right limit of the marker search range for a markers in all windows lt m gt lt n gt are irrelevant If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Parameters lt Limit gt The value range depends on the frequency range or sweep time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for
365. nalyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 160 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe Type For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Parameters Type POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 162 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs Parameters Source Example Configuring I Q Analyzer Measurements IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R am
366. named IQAnalyzer and creates a new measurement channel named IQAnalyzer2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 217 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 217 Example INST CRE IQ IQAnalyzer2 Adds an additional UO Analyzer channel named IQAnalyzer2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Activating UO Analyzer Measurements Setting parameters ChannelName1 String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 217 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extende
367. nd for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 245 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Band K A KA Q U VJ E W F D G Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Note The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA the input parameter A is still available and refers to the same band as KA For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 10 2 RST F 90 GHz 140 GHz Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB Ai Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BAND KA Sets the band to KA 26 5 GHz 40 GHz Manual operation See Band on page 112 SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias setting to be used with the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 245 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt BiasSetting gt numeric value RST 0 0A Default unit A Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BIAS 3A
368. ndwidth of 20 kHz the real IF bandwidth being 30 kHz If however the 3 dB band width of the signal recorded in the reference sweep is examined trace 2 it will be found to be larger exactly by a factor of 2 This shows that the two products were gen erated by mixing with LO harmonics of different orders The signal recorded in the test Sweep was generated by mixing with the 3rd order harmonic Since the frequency axis scaling is based on the 2nd order the mixer product or the resulting diagram of the IF filter is compressed by a factor of 2 3 The signal recorded in the reference sweep was generated by mixing with the fundamental of the LO signal Since the frequency axis scaling is based on the 2nd order the mixer product or the resulting diagram of the IF filter is expanded by a factor of 2 Automatic identification with a large span is not possible since the two mixer products are displayed at the same frequency The diagram shown in figure 5 20 is obtained when examining products with a narrow span using the Auto ID function You can easily recognize unwanted mixer products in the diagram obtained using one of the automatic detection functions User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 61 5 4 5 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output RBW 30 kHz VBW 100 kHz NN NN NN EN pe EN EN EN Center 29 46813403 GHz 20 kHz Span 200 kHz Fig 5 20 Unwanted mixer products displayed for small span Basics on External Gener
369. ned by the user e g in the Data Aquisition dialog box in the UO Analyzer application and which is used as the basis for analysis or output e Usable UO Analysis bandwidth the bandwidth range in which the signal remains undistorted in regard to amplitude characteristic and group delay this range can be used for accurate analysis by the R amp S FSW Record length Number of UO samples to capture during the specified measure ment time calculated as the measurement time multiplied by the sample rate For the UO data acquisition digital decimation filters are used internally in the R amp S FSW The passband of these digital filters determines the maximum usable LO 5 1 1 1 Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input bandwidth In consequence signals within the usable I Q bandwidth passband remain unchanged while signals outside the usable UO bandwidth passband are suppressed Usually the suppressed signals are noise artifacts and the second IF side band If frequencies of interest to you are also suppressed you should try to increase the output sample rate since this increases the maximum usable UO band width Bandwidth extension options The maximum usable UO bandwidth provided by the R amp S FSW in the basic installation can be extended by additional options These options can either be included in the ini tial installation B options or updated later U options The maximum bandwidth provi ded by the individual option i
370. ng edge by the Hysteresis resulting in different trigger levels Thus the trigger cannot hang inside the hysteresis triggering is always ensured The disadvantage of the robust trigger is a slight inaccuracy in the trigger measurements because different trig ger levels are used For steep edges the inaccuracy can be ignored For more details on the robust trigger functionality see the oscilloscope s documenta tion Trigger coupling The coupling mode of the external trigger to the oscilloscope can be configured in the Trigger settings 5 4 7 7 External Mixers and B2000 Optional External mixers can be used together with the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 However special conversion loss tables are required with a 2g file extension as opposed to acl for common tables While ac1 files can be used data acquisition with the B2000 option using such con version loss tables will lead to substantial inaccuracy Using an average conversion loss for the entire range instead of a conversion loss table during data acquisition with the B2000 option will cause even more inaccuracy In both cases the UNCAL sta tus message indicates that the measurement may have inaccurate results Special B2000 tables in 52g files cannot be edited within the R amp S FSW firmware they can only be imported and deleted For details on external mixers see chapter 5 4 4 Basics on External Mixers on page 53 5 4 7 8
371. ng DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SMOothing APERture on page 327 For more information see the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP3 TRAC2 SMO ON Turns on trace smoothing for trace 2 in window 3 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Smoothing on page 179 SENSe JAVERage lt n gt TYPE Mode This command selects the trace averaging mode Parameters lt Mode gt viDeo The logarithmic power values are averaged LiNear The power values are averaged before they are converted to logarithmic values POWer The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averaging After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit RST ViDeo Example AVER TYPE LIN Switches to linear average calculation Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Average Mode on page 179 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion lt Detector gt Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis IO Analysis Parameters Detector APEak Autopeak NEGative Negative peak POSitive Positive peak SAMPle First value detected per trace point RMS RMS value AVERage Average RST APEak Example DET POS Sets the detector to positive peak Manual operation See Detector on page 178 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion AUTO State This command couples and decouples the detector to the tra
372. ng on and off for all markers in all windows lt m gt n are irrelevant IO Analysis Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC MARK LOEX ON CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion lt Excursion gt This command defines the peak excursion for all markers in all windows m n are irrelevant The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak search The unit depends on the measurement Application Result display Unit Spectrum dB Manual operation See Peak Excursion on page 187 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SEARch lt MarkReallmag gt This command selects the trace type a marker search is performed on For all markers lt m gt is irrelevant Parameters lt MarkReallmag gt REAL Marker search functions are performed on the real trace of the Q measurement IMAG Marker search functions are performed on the imaginary trace of the I Q measurement MAGN Marker search functions are performed on the magnitude of the I and Q data RST REAL Example CALC4 MARK SEAR IMAG Manual operation See Branch for Peak Search on page 188 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe State This command turns marker search limits on and off for all markers in all windows lt m gt lt n gt are irrelevant If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be a
373. ngs Harmonics Configuration Defines if only even only odd or even and odd harmonics can be used for conversion Depending on this selection the order of harmonic to be used for conversion changes see Harmonic Order on page 106 Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE on page 239 Harmonic Order Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines which order of the harmonic of the LO frequencies is used to cover the fre quency range By default the lowest order of the specified harmonic type is selected that allows con version of input signals in the whole band If due to the LO frequency the conversion is not possible using one harmonic the band is split For the band USER the order of harmonic is defined by the user The order of har monic can be between 2 and 61 the lowest usable frequency being 26 5 GHz Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW on page 240 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue on page 239 Conversion loss Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines how the conversion loss is handled The following methods are available Average Defines the average conversion loss for the entire range in dB Table Defines the conversion loss via the table selected from the list Pre defined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R amp S FSW Alternatively you can define your
374. nnel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 313 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter Compared to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 312 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter per manently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Remote Commands to Perform Measurements with UO Data y 100 x 100 y 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 10 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters lt Index1 gt The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin
375. ns and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant IO Analysis Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Manual operation See Show Line on page 193 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe VALue Position This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s Manual operation See Position on page 193 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDows lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only INITiate lt n gt REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA MSRT mode not the MSRA MSRT Master The
376. nse data TRAC TO DATA Starts measurement and reads results Usage Query only TRACe IQ DATA FORMat Format This command selects the order of the UO data For details see chapter A 3 Reference Format Description for UO Data Files on page 379 Retrieving Results For traces captured using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 only IQPair format is available Parameters Format COMPatible IQBLock IQPair COMPatible and Q values are separated and collected in blocks A block 512k of values is followed by a block 512k of Q values fol lowed by a block of values followed by a block of Q values etc L11 1 Q Q Q Q 1 1 1 1 Q Q Q Q IQBLock First all l values are listed then the Q values LEE ELI Q Q Q0 Q Q Q IQPair One pair of UO values after the other is listed 1 Q 1 Q 1 Q RST IQBL TRACe IQ DATA MEMory lt OffsetSamples gt lt NoOfSamples gt This command queries the UO data currently stored in the memory of the R amp S FSW By default the command returns all UO data in the memory You can however narrow down the amount of data that the command returns using the optional parameters This command is not available for traces captured with the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 By default the amount of available data depends on TRACe 10 SET Parameters lt OffsetSamples gt lt NoOfSamples gt Return valu
377. nt if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 174 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 311 RF Attenuation Defines the attenuation applied to the RF input of the R amp S FSW This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface Attenuation Mode Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that no overload occurs at the RF INPUT connector for the current reference level It is the default setting By default and when electronic attenuation is not available mechanical attenuation is applied This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 280 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 280 Using Electronic Attenuatio
378. ntries is displayed in the preview pane to the right of the table Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL DATA on page 244 Insert Value Inserts a new position value entry in the table If the table is empty a new entry at 0 Hz is inserted If entries already exist a new entry is inserted above the selected entry The position of the new entry is selected such that it divides the span to the previous entry in half Delete Value Deletes the currently selected position value entry Shift x Shifts all positions in the table by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the x axis Shift y Shifts all conversion loss values by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the y axis 6 3 1 4 Data Input and Output Settings Save The conversion loss table is stored under the specified name in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory of the instrument Digital UO Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the optional Digi tal Baseband Interface in the applications that support it These settings are only available if the Digital Baseband Interface option is installed on the R amp S FSW They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box e Input Source Power Sensor Frequency
379. ocessing for analog I Q data without band width extension options Data aquisition hardware digital down conversion continuous decimation analog IF A D filter converter fractional resampling Downsampling analyzer IF signal Cl processor 5 Application sample rate 1 GHz sampling clock arbitrary External Trigger sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz Fig 5 2 Block diagram illustrating the R amp S FSW signal processing for analog I Q data with option B160 Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input Data aquisition hardware analog IF AJD filter converter analyzer IF a gt Application sample rate processor Fig 5 3 Block diagram illustrating the R amp S FSW signal processing for analog I Q data with option B320 External Trigger 1GHz sampling clock Data aquisition hardware digital down conversion continuous decimation analog IF A D filter converter analyzer IF signal sample rate 1 2 GHz sampling clock External Trigger Nerei 100 Hz 10 GHz Fig 5 4 Block diagram illustrating the R amp S FSW signal processing for analog I Q data with option B500 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input Definitions Input sample rate ISR the sample rate of the useful data provided by the device connected to the input of the R amp S FSW User Output Sample rate SR the sample rate that is defi
380. ommand INPut EATT STATe on page 281 INPut EATT AUTO on page 281 INPut EATT on page 281 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well The parameters Input Coupling and Impedance are identical to those in the Input settings See chapter 6 3 1 Input Source Settings on page 99 Preamplifier Input Settings If the optional Preamplifier hardware is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface For R amp S FSW26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSWS or 13 models the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 282 INPut GAIN VALue on page 282 6 4 2 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input The following settings and functions are available to define amplitude settings for input via the optional Analog Baseband Interface in the applications that support it They can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude tab of the Input dialog box Amplitude Amplitude M Amplitude Amplitude Scale Reference Level Inp
381. on Protocol in progress POWer Digital UO Input Device connected TIME EXTended STATus QUEStionable DIQ Digital UO Output Connection protocol error Digital UO Output Connection protocol in progress Digital UO Output Device connected Digital UO Input FIFO Overload STATus QUEStionable UO data acquisition error STATus QUEStionable SYNC Fig 10 2 Status registers used by the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 QUEStionable SY NO Reglstel inert e te 364 QUEStionable DIQ Register AAA 366 e STATus e STATus 10 10 1 STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register This register contains information about the state of the UO data acquisition This register The status of the STATus QUI STATus QUI You can read out the state of the register with STATus QU CONDition on page 366 is used by the optional Digital Baseband Interface ESTionable register on page 365 and STATus QUEStionable SYNC ESTionable SYNC register is indicated in bit 11 of the EStionable SYNC EV ENt Querying the Status Registers Bit No Meaning 0 7 not used 8 UO data acquisition error This bit is set if an error occurs during UO data acquisition because the input sample rates or number of samples between the signal source and the R amp S FSW do not match See also chapter 9 1 Error Messages on page 206 9 14 not used 15 This bit is always set to 0 ST
382. on the signal generator R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing pme M iH a fcc H T Ec n M 5 4 5 3 5 4 5 4 Generator type TTL support Generator type TTL support SMIQOSE SMY02 SMIQ04B X HP8254A SMIQO6GB X HP8257D SMJ03 X HP8340A SMJ06 X HP8648 z SML01 HP ESG A Series 1000A 2000A 3000A 4000A SML02 HP ESG B Series SML03 SMP02 X 1 2 3 4 Requires firmware version V2 10 x or higher on the signal generator Requires firmware version V1 10 x or higher on the signal generator Requires the option SMR B11 on the signal generator Fe e YS HS Requires firmware version V3 20 200 or higher on the signal generator Generator Setup Files For each signal generator type to be controlled by the R amp S FSW a generator setup file must be configured and stored on the R amp S FSW The setup file defines the frequency and power ranges supported by the generator as well as information required for com munication For the signal generators listed in chapter 5 4 5 2 Overview of Supported Generators on page 66 default setup files are provided If necessary these files can be edited or duplicated for varying measurement setups or other instruments The existing setup files can be displayed
383. onable SYNC register is also set Errors concerning the Digital Baseband Interface connection between instruments are indicated by a status bit in the STATus QUESTionable DIQ register See chap ter 10 10 2 STATus QUEStionable DIQ Register on page 366 The following tables describe the most common errors and possible solutions Table 9 1 I Q data acquisition errors using the optional Digital Baseband Interface and possible solu tions Message Possible solutions Sample rate too high in respect to input sample rate e Reduce the sample rate e Increase the input sample rate See table 5 6 Sample rate too low in respect to input sample rate e Increase the sample rate e Reduce the input sample rate See table 5 6 Number of IQ Capture samples too high e Reduce the number of UO samples to capture Decrease the sample rate or increase the input sample rate to reduce the ratio of sample rate input sample rate Keyword DATA ERR e Re establish the Digital UO connection NOTE If this error is indicated repeatedly either the Digital UO LVDS connection cable or the receiving or transmitting device might be defect Keyword PLL UNLOCKED Re establish the Digital UO connection after the clock from the input device has been restored Table 9 2 I Q data output errors using the optional Digital Baseband Interface and possible solutions Message Possible solutions
384. onfouratton sess 105 d 01 AR T T oas nadadncsie 105 LEE 106 L Harmonic E 106 C EE 106 External Mixer State Activates or deactivates the external mixer for input If activated ExtMix is indicated in the channel bar of the application together with the used band see Band on page 105 Remote command SENSe MIXer STATe on page 235 RF Start RF Stop Displays the start and stop frequency of the selected band read only The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configura tion see Range 1 2 on page 105 For details on available frequency ranges see table 10 2 Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt on page 237 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP on page 238 Data Input and Output Settings Handover Freq Defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover on page 237 Band Defines the waveguide band or user defined band to be used by the mixer The start and stop frequencies of the selected band are displayed in the RF Start and RF Stop fields For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 10 2 The mixer settings for the user defined band can be selected freely The frequency range for the user defined ban
385. only available if the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension is active see B2000 State on page 127 DC 50 Q Direct connection with 50 Q termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal DC 1 MO Direct connection with 1 MO termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal AC Connection through capacitor removes unwanted DC and very low frequency components Remote command TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling on page 275 Hysteresis Trigger Source Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 with an IF power trigger the hysteresis refers to the robust width trigger For details see IF Power trigger on page 80 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 289 Trigger Settings Trigger Holdoff Trigger Source Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 289 Slope Trigger Source For all trigger sources except t
386. option R amp S FSW B71 is installed These probes allow you to perform voltage measurements very flexibly and precisely on all sorts of devices to be tested without interfering with the signal Connecting probes Probes are automatically detected when you plug them into the upper BASEBAND INPUT connectors on the front panel of the R amp S FSW The detected information on the probe is displayed in the Probes tab of the Input dialog box individually for each connector Single ended and differential probes Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Input Configuration setting for the Analog Baseband input source must be set to Single ended for all probes see Input Con figuration on page 117 Availability of probe input Analog baseband input from connected probes can only be analyzed in applications that support UO data processing and the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B7 1 such as the UO Analyzer the Analog Demodulation application or one of the optional applications Frequency sweep measurements with probes Probes can also be used as an alternative method of providing RF input to the R amp S FSW In this case the probe must be connected to the BASEBAND INPUT I con nector and the input is redirected to the RF input path see chapter 5 4 2 RF Input from the Analog Baseband Connector on page 50 As opposed to common RF in
387. orming Sweeps eene 318 I Q AnalySiS TEE 325 Retrieving Results eret Zuse nt ee erai nn iet Ino Roe S IIR ARRA RES d 353 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results eene 362 Querying the Status Registers eeeeeessssseseseseeeeennene nnne nnne 363 Programming EXambpl6s eco cieneee tton trio nen e cpeseceuetedeunsneessaysausteseaneanterss 369 n2edlting p0 C 377 Description of the LVDS Conmectol cccccccceceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneaneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 377 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format 378 Reference Format Description for UO Data FileS 0 0 cccccccceseesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 379 VQ Data File Format iq tar erento innui 381 List of Remote Commands UO Analyzer l Q Input Interfaces LKE Trece C s 387 User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 4 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Preface 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual provides all the information specific to the application and processing digital UO data All general instrument functions and set tings common to all applications are described in the main R amp S FSW User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included Welcome to the UO Analyzer app
388. ory STORS sisi DEE 346 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe lt State gt This command turns labels for peaks found during a peak search on and off The labels correspond to the marker number in the marker peak list Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE ANN LAB STAT OFF Removes the peak labels from the diagram Manual operation See Displaying Marker Numbers on page 191 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt This command queries the number of peaks that have been found during a peak search The actual number of peaks that have been found may differ from the number of peaks you have set to be found because of the peak excursion lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Return values lt NumberOfPeaks gt Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE COUN Queries the number of peaks Usage Query only IO Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate Peaks This command initiates a peak search Parameters Peaks This parameter defines the number of peaks to find during the search Note that the actual number of peaks found during the search also depends on the peak excursion you have set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion Range 1 to 200 Example CALC MARK PEXC 5 Defines a peak excursion of 5 dB i e peaks must be at least 5 dB apart to be detected as a peak
389. ose above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Note that for input from the External Mixer R amp S FSW B21 the maximum reference level also depends on the conversion loss see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual for details Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 279 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level In some result displays the scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 145 Amplitude Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 279 Unit Reference Level The R amp S FSW measures the signal voltage at the RF input
390. ou can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS FREQ UP AND SENS FREQ DOWN commands see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 285 Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax iS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 154 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span In time domain zero span measurements the center frequency is coupled to the RBW Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 10 4 4 10 4 4 1 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency OFFSet Offset This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application Al results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application See also Frequency Offset on page 154 Note In MSRA MSRT mode the setting command is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master For MSRA MSRT applications only the query command is available Parameters Offset Ran
391. output of UO data to the optional Digital Baseband Interface on and off Using the digital input and digital output simultaneously is not possible If digital baseband output is active the sample rate is restricted to 100 MHz 200 MHz if enhanced mode is possible max 160 MHz bandwidth See also Digital UO enhanced mode on page 40 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example OUTP DIQ ON Manual operation See Digital Baseband Output on page 143 OUTPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital UO data output to the optional Digital Baseband Interface Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt NotUsed gt to be ignored lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements PRBSTestState State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt NotUsed gt to be ignored lt Placeholder gt for future use currently 0 Example OU
392. p S FSW B2000 is installed and active this parameter activates the CH3 input con nector on the oscilloscope Then the R amp S FSW triggers when the signal fed into the CH3 input connector on the oscilloscope meets or exceeds the specified trigger level Note In previous firmware versions the external trigger was connected to the CH2 input on the oscilloscope As of firmware version R amp S FSW 2 30 the CH3 input on the oscilloscope must be used EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RFPower First intermediate frequency Not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face or the optional Analog Baseband Interface IFPower Second intermediate frequency Not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face For input from the optional Analog Baseband Interface this parameter is interpreted as BBPower for compatibility reasons IQPower Magnitude of sampled UO data For applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face or the optional Analog Baseband Interface TIME Time interval BBPower Baseband power for digital input via the optional Digital Base band Interface Baseband power for digital
393. page 135 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative STATe State This command turns relative power sensor measurements on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC PMET2 REL STAT ON Activates the relative display of the measured value for power sensor 2 FETCh PMETer lt p gt This command queries the results of power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Return values Level Power level that has been measured by a power sensor The unit is either dBm absolute measurements or dB relative measurements Usage Query only READ PMETer lt p gt This command initiates a power sensor measurement and queries the results Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Usage Query only SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle STATe lt State gt This command turns the duty cycle correction on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Manual operation See Duty Cycle on page 136 SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle VALue Percentage This command defines the duty cycle for the correction of pulse signals The power sensor uses the duty cycle in combination with the mean power to calculate the power of the pulse Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor Parameters lt Percentage
394. ptional External Gen erator Control this command defines the power offset value assigned to the reference position Parameters lt Value gt RST 0 dBm coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Sets the power value assigned to the reference position to 20 dBm Manual operation See Reference Value on page 126 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire lt MeasType gt This command initiates a reference measurement calibration The reference mea surement is the basis for the measurement normalization The result depends on whether a reflection measurement or transmission measurement is performed see SENSe CORRection METHod on page 258 To obtain a correct reference measurement a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must have been carried out This is only possible in the single sweep mode This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 254 Parameters lt MeasType gt THRough TRANsmission mode calibration with direct connection between external generator and device input REFLection mode calibration with short circuit at the input OPEN only allowed in REFLection mode calibration with open input Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Example INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep operation CORR METH TRAN Selects a transmission measurement CORR COLL THR WAI Starts the measurement of reference data u
395. put processing a transducer is activated before the common process to compensate for the additional path of the redirected signal Probe signals that are redirected to the RF input path can also be analyzed in the Spectrum application of the R amp S FSW base unit Then you can perform RF measurements measurements in the time or frequency domain on the input from a probe User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 51 5 4 3 1 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Microbutton action You can define an action to be performed by the R amp S FSW when the probe s microbut ton if available is pressed Currently a single data acquisition via the probe can be performed simply by pressing the microbutton Impedance and attenuation The measured signal from the probe is attenuated internally by the probe s specific attenuation For probe signals that are redirected to the RF path the attenuation is compensated using a transducer see Frequency sweep measurements on probe input on page 50 The reference level is adjusted automatically For analog baseband input the attenuation is compensated without a transducer In this case higher levels are available for the full scale level A fixed impedance of 50 Q is used for all probes to convert voltage values to power levels Common Mode Offset Common mode offset compensation is available for R amp S9RT ZD10 20 30 probes with serial number 2 200 000 It can compensate a common DC voltage app
396. r ator frequency a message is displayed in the status bar Reverse Sweep via min Ext Generator Frequency 5 4 5 8 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Example Example for reverse sweep via minimum frequency Fanalyzerstat 100 MHz F analyzerStop 200 MHz Forse 150 MHz Fai 20 MHz Numerator Denominator 1 gt F GeneratorStart 50 MHz gt F GeneratorStop 50 MHz via Fmin Displayed Information and Errors Channel bar If external generator control is active some additional information is displayed in the channel bar Label Description EXT TG source power External generator active signal sent with source power level APX approximation LVL Power Offset see Source Offset on page 122 FRQ Frequency Offset see Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denomi nator Offset on page 123 NOR Normalization on No difference between reference setting and measurement Normalization on Deviation from the reference setting occurs Aborted normalization or no calibration performed yet Error and status messages The following status and error messages may occur during external generator control Message Description Ext Generator GPIB Handshake Error Connection to the generator is not possible e g due to a Ext Generator TCPIP Handshake Error Ext Generator TTL Handshake Error cable damage or loose connection or w
397. r ing data entry for example Positive offsets apply to an amplifier and negative offsets to an attenuator subsequent to the external generator Remote command SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet on page 254 Source Frequency Coupling Defines the frequency coupling mode between the R amp S FSW and the generator For more information on coupling frequencies see chapter 5 4 5 7 Coupling the Fre quencies on page 71 Auto Default setting a series of frequencies is defined one for each Sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW see Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denomi nator Offset on page 123 the RF frequency range covers the cur rently defined span of the R amp S FSW unless limited by the range of the signal generator Manual The generator uses a single fixed frequency defined by Manual Source Frequency which is displayed when you select Manual cou pling Remote command SOURce EXTernal FREQuency COUPling STATe on page 252 Manual Source Frequency Defines the fixed frequency to be used by the generator Remote command SOURce EXTernal FREQuency on page 251 Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset With automatic frequency coupling a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW However the frequency used by the generator may differ from
398. r bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 For details see the description of the STATus OPERation register in the R amp S FSW User Manual and the description of the AUX port in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual 6 7 6 7 1 Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settings User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 295 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 295 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 296 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate on page 296 Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settings How dat
399. r IF output When the B2000 option is activated the basic IF OUT 2 GHZ output is automatically deactivated It is not reactivated when the B2000 option is switched off For details see chapter 5 4 7 Basics on the 2 GHz Bandwidth Exten sion R amp S FSW B2000 Option on page 76 VIDEO The displayed video signal i e the filtered and detected IF signal is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector This setting is required to provide demodulated audio frequencies at the output Remote command OUTPut IF SOURce on page 277 Data Input and Output Settings IF Wide Out Frequency Defines or indicates the frequency at which the IF signal level is provided at the IF VIDEO DEMOD connector if IF Video Output is set to IF Note The IF output frequency of the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector cannot be defined manually but is determined automatically depending on the center frequency It is indi cated in this field when the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector is used For details on the used frequencies see the data sheet The IF WIDE OUTPUT connector is used automatically instead of the IF VIDEO DEMOD connector if the bandwidth extension hardware option R amp S FSW B160 U160 is activated i e for bandwidths 80 MHz If the IF OUT 2 GHZ output or the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 output is activated the measured IF value is provided at a fixed frequency of 2 GHz For more information see chapter 5 4 10
400. r Measurements INPut IQ BALanced STATe State This command defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain UO signal via 2 single ended lines Parameters State ON Differential OFF Single ended RST ON Example INP IQ BAL OFF Manual operation See Input Configuration on page 117 INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO State This command defines whether the full scale level i e the maximum input power on the Baseband Input connector is defined automatically according to the reference level or manually Parameters State ON Automatic definition OFF Manual definition according to INPut 10 FULLscale LEVel on page 231 RST ON Example INP IQ FULL AUTO OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level Mode Value on page 151 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel lt PeakVoltage gt This command defines the peak voltage at the Baseband Input connector if the full scale level is set to manual mode see INPut 10 FULLscale AUTO on page 231 Parameters lt PeakVoltage gt 0 25V 0 5V 1V 2V Peak voltage level at the connector For probes the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power RST 1V Example INP IQ FULL 0 5V Manual operation See Full Scale Level Mode Value on page 151 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements INPut IQ TYPE lt DataType gt This command defines the format of the inpu
401. r and UO Input Measurement and Result Displays MultiView Spectrum Spectrum 2 1Q Analyzer Ref Level 2 nu AQT 3 SRate 32 0 MHz Att dB Freq 30 0 MHz RecLength IRG IFP ms 07 9 e 1AP Clrw 1 Imag Real Imag 1 Q ICF 30 0 MHz Note For analog baseband input in Real Baseband mode only one diagram is dis played for the selected component For details see Real baseband mode I or Q only on page 47 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH RIM See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 313 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 357 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 185 Stimulus Response Function Function Result Tip To navigate within long marker tables simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 313 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 334 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 361 Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum or time domain How many peaks are displayed can be defined as well as the sort order In addition the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external application ec
402. r example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is O Hz Note In MSRA MSRT mode this function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Mas ter Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 287 Trigger Settings Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured Trigger settings can be configured via the TRIG key or in the Trigger dialog box which is displayed when you select the Trigger button in the Overview R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Configuration Trigger Source Trigger In Out Source Diff 0 0 s Offset Slope Rising Hysteresis Holdoff External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box Trigger Source Trigger In Out Trigger 2 Input Output Type User Defined Level Tow Pulse Length 100 0 us Send Trigger JL Trigger 3 input Conventional gating as in the Spectrum application is not available for the UO Ana lyzer however a special gating mode is available in remote control see on page 296 d For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the R amp S FSW User Manual C 156 L Trigger UO ageet eet i ul dede a ades rers adt 156 L Free PRU m 156 L External Trigger 1 2 3 seen 156 User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 155 Trigger Settings E ur el c NITE 15
403. r frequency and the stop value defined for the R amp S FSW Source Calibration Functions The calibration functions of the external generator are available in the Source Calibra tion subtab of the External Generator tab but only if external generator control is active see Source State on page 122 Ow zs Spectrum d A Input Source Power Sensor Tracking Generator H Measurement Configuration Interface Configuration Source Calibration Calibfate TFaISIISSROEL d rechten eene be s en aed bor E De aati rv e 125 Calibrate Reflection e EE 125 Calibrate Reflection Open 125 Source Calibration Normalize 5 x oe nen rca xen eden e teo naa rte nd reti eb ern 125 Roe EE 125 Save AS ee E 126 Reference Le BEE 126 Reference Value tette eoe ete etse ec ret ee see ie easet tee eee 126 Data Input and Output Settings Calibrate Transmission Starts a transmission type measurement to determine a reference trace This trace is used to calculate the difference for the normalized values For details see chapter 5 4 5 4 Calibration Mechanism on page 68 Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 258 Calibrate Reflection Short Starts a short circuit reflection type measurement to determine a reference trace for calibration If both calibrations open circuit short circuit are carried out the calibration trace is calculated by averaging the two measurements The order of the two calibration mea s
404. r input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or from the optional Analog Baseband Interface AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 222 Impedance For some measurements the reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FSW can be set to 50 Q or 75 Q R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Configuration 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This value also affects the unit conversion see Reference Level on page 145 This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or from the optional Analog Baseband Interface For analog baseband input an impe dance of 50 Q is always used Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 223 Direct Path Enables or disables the use of the direct path for small frequencies In spectrum analyzers passive analog mixers are used for the first conversion of the input signal In s
405. r that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Return values lt PeakPosition gt Position of the peaks on the x axis The unit depends on the measurement Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEeaks Y This command queries the position of the peaks on the y axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Return values lt PeakPosition gt Position of the peaks on the y axis The unit depends on the measurement Usage Query only MMEMory STORe lt n gt PEAK lt FileName gt This command exports the marker peak list to a file Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Remote Commands to Perform Measurements with UO Data ESCH 10 7 3 10 7 3 1 For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the pathname and extension of the ta
406. r trigger Possible solutions The oscilloscope is waiting for an external trigger signal at its CH3 input Provide a trigger signal to the oscilloscope either from an external device such as a signal generator or from the R amp S FSW by connecting the TRIG OUT connector of the R amp S FSW to the CH3 input connector of the oscilloscope Note In previous firmware versions the external trigger was connected to the CH2 input on the oscilloscope As of firm ware version R amp S FSW 2 30 the CH3 input on the oscillo Scope must be used Useatrigger other than External CH3 on the R amp S FSW IF OVLD An overload was detected on the oscilloscope increase the refer ence level UNCAL The B2000 option and an external mixer are active but only a common ac1 file or no conversion loss table are assigned Assign a B2000 specific table b2g file See chapter 5 4 7 7 External Mixers and B2000 on page 81 and Managing Conver sion Loss Tables on page 108 Oscilloscope is inoperable o As soon as the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is activated see B2000 State on page 127 the R amp S FSW takes control of the oscilloscope The display on the oscilloscope is turned off to improve performance during data export As soon as the R amp S FSW closes the connection to the oscilloscope the display is reacti vated and the oscilloscope can be operated as usual However if the LAN connection
407. r use the remote command to re activate the display see EXPort WAVeform DISPlayoff on page 272 5 4 7 4 Alignment An initial alignment of the output to the oscilloscope and the oscilloscope itself is required once after setup The alignment data is stored on the oscilloscope Thus alignment need only be repeated if one of the following applies e Anew oscilloscope is connected to the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector of the R amp S FSW Anew cable is used between the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector of the R amp S FSW and the oscilloscope e Anew firmware is installed on the oscilloscope or the R amp S FSW User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 78 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing pae M M M H 5 4 7 5 5 4 7 6 Alignment consists of two steps The first step requires a temporary connection from the REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ connector on the R amp S FSW to the CH1 input on the oscil loscope in addition to the reference and trigger connections described above The alignment process is performed by selecting a button Successful alignment of the oscilloscope and the oscilloscope ADC are indicated in a dialog box If necessary in particular after the firmware on the oscilloscope has been updated a self alignment is performed on the oscilloscope before the actual B200
408. rameters lt SweepPoints gt Range 101 to 100001 RST 1001 Example SWE POIN 251 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Points on page 170 SENSe SWEep TIME lt Time gt This command defines the sweep time Parameters lt Time gt refer to data sheet RST depends on current settings determined automati cally Example SWE TIME 10s Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Meas Time on page 166 SYSTem SEQuencer lt State gt This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual IO Analysis Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF 10 7 UO Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers etc can be configured using the following commands They are identical to the ana
409. rce Calibration settings It is similar to the Reference Level defined in the Amplitude settings However as opposed to the reference level this reference ine only affects the y axis scaling in the diagram it has no effect on the expected input power level or the hardware settings The reference line determines the range and the scaling of the y axis just as the refer ence level does The normalized reference trace 0 dB directly after calibration is displayed on this ref erence line indicated by a red line in the diagram By default the reference line is dis played at the top of the diagram If you shift the reference line the normalized trace is shifted as well Shifting the reference line and normalized trace You can shift the reference line and thus the normalized trace in the result display by changing the Reference Position or the Reference Value MultiView Spectrum RBW 2 MHz SWT 3ms VBW 2MHz Mode Auto Sweep NOR Ext T 1 Frequency 100 0 MHz 1001 pts 20 0 MHz 300 0 MHz Fig 5 25 Shifted reference line If the DUT inserts a gain or an attenuation in the measurement this effect can be reflected in the result display on the R amp S FSW To reflect a power offset in the mea surement trace change the Reference Value 5 4 5 7 Coupling the Frequencies As described in chapter 5 4 5 5 Normalization on page 69 normalized measure ment results are very accurate as long as the same settings are used
410. rence level offset of the analyzer for power sensor measurements Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON 1 Includes the reference level offset in the results OFF 0 Ignores the reference level offset RST 1 Example PMET2 ROFF OFF Takes no offset into account for the measured power Manual operation See Use Ref Lev Offset on page 136 SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe State This command turns a power sensor on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET1 ON Switches the power sensor measurements on Manual operation See State on page 133 See Select on page 134 SENSe PMETer lt p gt UPDate STATe State This command turns continuous update of power sensor measurements on and off If on the results are update even if a single sweep is complete Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Example PMET1 UPD ON The data from power sensor 1 is updated continuously Manual operation See Continuous Value Update on page 134 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer Unit This command selects the unit for absolute power sensor measurements lt n gt is irrele vant Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Unit gt DBM WATT W RST DBM Example UNIT PMET POW DBM Manu
411. requencies on page 71 The signal generator then sends a signal with the specified level at each frequency in the predefined list The R amp S FSW measures the signal and deter mines the level offsets to the expected values Saving calibration results A reference dataset for the calibration results is stored internally as a table of value pairs frequency level one for each sweep point The measured offsets can then be used as calibration factors for subsequent measurement results The calibration can be performed using either transmission or reflection measure ments The selected type of measurement used to determine the reference trace is included in the reference dataset Normalization Once the measurement setup has been calibrated and the reference trace is available subsequent measurement results can be corrected according to the calibration factors if necessary This is done by subtracting the reference trace from the measurement results This process is referred to as normalization and can be activated or deactiva ted as required If normalization is activated NOR is displayed in the channel bar next to the indication that an external generator is being used Ext Gen The normal ized trace from the calibration sweep is a constant 0 dB line as calibration trace reference trace 0 As long as the same settings are used for measurement as for calibration the normal ized measurement results should not contai
412. ress P aeS 128 Oscilloscopes ele Lu ET 78 128 B2000 EE 77 Connections B2000 eite 77 128 jefe io E 78 Data acquisitioni 2 praece etre eege 79 Display tees 78 Exteinal trigger i ro eere 80 Firmware versiori ne retentis 77 IF powet trigger oett trien ens 80 Prerequisites B2000 sese 77 Remote commands B2000 2 272 ue re 82 Scaling B2000 15 rere teet 82 Trigger coupling remote crei tne 81 lge ln PN 79 Troubleshooting B2000 sss 207 Output AT Acie 277 Configuration 139 Configuration remote 276 Digital Baseband Interface ssesessssss 37 Digital Baseband Interface settings 142 143 Digital Baseband Interface status 229 Digital VQ remote cene ete 229 IF frequencies IF frequency remote sssss 276 278 IF O t Frequency EE 141 IF so trce remote ET 277 Noise source 83 141 Parateters 2 eter t RE Er eee ea 50 Sample rate definition 25 39 E 139 Ec 141 162 MIGGO i in etai irent ect nds 140 277 Video sigtial rre terrere ttn 84 Overload External generator RF input oriris RF input remote Overloading External generator een retenir tn tenen 75 Overview V elle UCL EE 95 OVLD Extertial geherator
413. reti v Era Nai 191 SE e MET 191 Displaying Marker INUITiBSle cci le eter c aed d er eR d n 191 Exporting the Peak LISL om cicer reise RTL SEENEN KSE 191 Peak List State Activates deactivates the marker peak list If activated the peak list is displayed and the peaks are indicated in the trace display For each listed peak the frequency time X value and level Y value values are given Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STATe on page 346 Sort Mode Defines whether the peak list is sorted according to the x values or y values In either case the values are sorted in ascending order Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT on page 345 Zoom Functions Maximum Number of Peaks Defines the maximum number of peaks to be determined and displayed Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE on page 345 Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed the resolution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 337 Displaying Marker Numbers By default the marker numbers are indicated in the diagram so you can find the peaks from the list However for large numbers of peaks the ma
414. rget file Example MMEM STOR PEAK test dat Saves the current marker peak list in the file test dat Usage Event Manual operation See Exporting the Peak List on page 191 Zooming into the Display Using the Single Zoom RI EE lee Ee ele REN 347 DISPlayEWINDowsne ZOOMS KEE 347 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm EU 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 191 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off resi User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 347 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Remote Commands to Perform Measurements with UO Data peu nue e ER SS EE EEE a SS EE EE SE UE EE sl Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 191 See Restore Original Display on page 192 See
415. rigger samples values are filled up or omitted at the end of the capture buffer Basics on the 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 Option Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used by the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is provided here for a better under standing of the required configuration settings e Basic ele EE 76 e Prerequisites and Measurement Geiup nnn nn nn 77 Controlling the OscllloSbOpb err mr terre dE 78 JE duci HE 78 LAE DATA ACCU e DEEG 79 AE uo 79 e External Mixers and BZ eege SEENEN n eet ERR AN NK Bo e 81 e ee EE 82 Basic Principle The optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 allows you to analyze sig nals with a bandwidth of up to 2 GHz In order to process the data with this bandwidth an R amp S oscilloscope e g R amp S RTO is inserted in the measurement setup The R amp S FSW provides the signal to the oscilloscope at a fixed center frequency of 2 GHz via the additional connector The oscilloscope samples the signal at a rate of 10 Gigasamples using an external frequency reference The A D converted data is then sent to the R amp S FSW where it is equalized and resampled to the sample rate required by the R amp S FSW measurement application The entire measurement and both instru ments are controlled by the R amp S FSW Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Data aquisition h
416. rker numbers may decrease readability in this case deactivate the marker number display Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe on page 344 Exporting the Peak List The peak list can be exported to an ASCII file DAT for analysis in an external appli cation Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt PEAK on page 346 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 357 7 3 Zoom Functions Access Zoom icons in toolbar Sie ZOOM PR 191 MORDE LOG INV EE 192 Restore Original Dieplany eene nnne 192 R Deactivating Zoom Selection model 192 Single Zoom ER Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 347 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA on page 347 Multiple Zoom In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00OM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 348 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z0OM MULTiple lt
417. rmed imme diately without waiting for a trigger RST 1 SENSe ADJust FREQuency This command sets the center frequency to the frequency with the highest signal level in the current frequency range Configuring the Result Display Example ADJ FREQ Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq on page 173 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measurement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 146 10 5 Configuring the Result Display The commands required to configure the screen display in a remote environment are described here e General Window Commnands ties eiteeetzsesdesecrckcroinala EE eadai 311 e Working with Windows in the Display 312 10 5 1 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 219 IR GE e C
418. rnal trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Manual operation See Output Type on page 141 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 142 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth Length This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt Length gt Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 142 10 4 4 3 Configuring UO Gating Usually in spectrum analysis measurements are based on a certain length of time called the gate area With UO gating you can define the gate area using the gate length the distance between the capture periods and the number of periods The gate length and the distance between the capture periods are specified in samples D UO gating is only available using remote commands manual configuration is not possi ble Using UO gating the gate area can be defined using the following methods Edge triggered capturing After a
419. rom input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview The Overview varies depending on the application for detailed descriptions see the corresponding application User Manual The Overview for the UO Analyzer Master provides quick access to the following con figuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Input settings See chapter 6 3 Data Input and Output Settings on page 98 2 Amplitude settings See chapter 6 4 Amplitude on page 144 3 Frequency settings See chapter 6 5 Frequency Settings on page 153 4 Optionally Trigger Gate settings See chapter 6 6 Trigger Settings on page 154 5 Bandwidth settings See chapter 6 7 Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settings on page 163 6 Optionally output settings See chapter 6 3 3 Output Settings on page 139 7 Analysis settings and functions See chapter 7 Analysis on page 177 Import Export Functions 8 Display configuration See chapter 6 8 Display Configuration on page 172 To configure settings P Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Select a setting in the channel bar at the top of the measurement channel tab to change a specific setting For step by step instructions on configuring UO Analyzer measurements see chap ter 8 1 How to Perform Measurements in the I Q Analyzer Application on page 194 Preset
420. rom the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product F GW bm Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation DVD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Firmware Application Notes Application notes application cards white papers and educational notes are further publications that provide more comprehensive descriptions and background informa tion The latest versions are available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz web site at www rohde schwarz com appnote 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 3 1 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical
421. rong address Ext Generator Limits Exceeded The allowed frequency or power ranges for the generator were exceeded Reverse Sweep via min Ext Generator Fre Reverse sweep is performed frequencies are reduced to quency the minimum frequency then increased again see Reverse sweep on page 73 Ext Generator File Syntax Error Syntax error in the generator setup file see chap ter 5 4 5 3 Generator Setup Files on page 68 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Message Description Ext Generator Command Error Missing or wrong command in the generator setup file see chapter 5 4 5 3 Generator Setup Files on page 68 Ext Generator Visa Error Error with Visa driver provided with installation very unlikely Overloading At a reference level of 10 dBm and at a external generator output level of the same value the R amp S FSW operates without overrange reserve That means the R amp S FSW is in danger of being overloaded if a signal is applied whose amplitude is higher than the reference line In this case either the message RF OVLD for overload or IF OVLD for exceeded display range clipping of the trace at the upper diagram border over range is displayed in the status line Overloading can be avoided as follows e Reducing the output level of the external generator Source Power on page 122 in External Generator gt Measurement Configuration
422. rovided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Mode SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer REFResh ALL This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only in MSRA MSRT mode The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by all active MSRA MSRT applications The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Example SYST SEQ OFF D
423. rrent start or stop fre quency i e the reference dataset is extended by constant values Thus the instrument settings can be changed in a wide area without giving up normali zation This reduces the necessity to carry out a new normalization to a minimum If approximation becomes too poor however normalization is aborted and an error message is displayed see chapter 5 4 5 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 74 The normalized trace in the display The normalized reference trace is also displayed in the spectrum diagram by default at the top of the diagram 100 of the window height It is indicated by a red line labeled NOR followed by the current reference value However it can be shifted ver tically to reflect an attenuation or gain caused by the measured DUT see also Shifting the reference line and normalized trace on page 71 Restoring the calibration settings If the measurement settings no longer match the instrument settings with which the calibration was performed indicated by the APX or no label next to Ext TG in the channel bar you can restore the calibration settings which are stored with the refer ence dataset on the R amp S FSW Storing the normalized reference trace as a transducer factor The inverse normalized reference trace can also be stored as a transducer factor for use in other R amp S FSW applications that do not support external generator control The normalized trace data
424. rrere der erbe 23 Resetting RF input protection eite erre 50 221 Restoring Channel settings erret tete ett 97 Restrictions EL EE 82 Result displays ee TEE 20 Elei le E 18 Marker table erede enne 21 accep P 21 Real Imag ENT nentes 20 SECHER T 19 Result frequency External Generator 2 terrere dentes 124 Results AhalyZing NEE 177 Data format remote 956 UO Analyzer remote Retrieving remote ee Updating the display remote ssssse 350 Reverse sweep External generator esee 73 123 RF attenuation Auto 147 Manual 147 PRE WA pU iie terrere rn tte tenor pna 99 Analog Baseband connector ssssssesesssessrsssrersereeee 50 Connector remote 221 Overload protectiori sssrini enaa rte trn nonien 50 Overload protection remote s sssssssseesenesinrineeeeee 221 REMOS NRI ext tesa eea aN 221 224 RF overrange External Mier uge eragesat 54 105 241 RF OVLD External Generator Jane eren 74 RF Power Em 159 Trigger level remote eese 291 Rising Slope Power sensor esee 137 RUN CONT ROY E E 171 RUN SINGLE KOV ireto u odd c E 171 172 S Sample rate Analog Baseband Interface essssssss 44 DefinitlOn seinas cerei Edge
425. s SENSe IQ FFT WINDow OVERIap Rate Defines the part of a single FFT window that is re calculated by the next FFT calcula tion Parameters Rate double value Percentage rate Range 0 to 1 RST 0 75 Example IQ FFT WIND OVER 0 5 Half of each window overlaps the previous window in FFT calcu lation Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Window Overlap on page 169 SENSe IQ FFT WINDow TYPE Function In the UO Analyzer you can select one of several FFT window types Parameters Function BLACkharris Blackman Harris FLATtop Flattop GAUSsian Gauss RECTangular Rectangular P5 5 Term RST FLAT Example IQ FFT WIND TYPE GAUS Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Window Function on page 168 SENSe SWAPiq State This command defines whether or not the recorded UO pairs should be swapped I gt Q before being processed Swapping and Q inverts the sideband This is useful if the DUT interchanged the and Q parts of the signal then the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters State ON and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l OFF and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband j Q RST OFF Manual operation See Swap l Q on page 167 TRACe IQ BWIDth This command defines or queries the bandwidth of the resampling filter The bandwidth of the resampling filter depends o
426. s gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 For details see the description of the STATus OPERation register in the R amp S FSW User Manual and the description of the AUX port in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 295 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 295 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe LENGth on page 296 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the
427. s a common time marker for all MSRT applica tions For the I Q Analyzer application the commands to define the analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 10 4 5 Config uring Data Acquisition on page 299 Be sure to select the correct measurement chan nel before executing these commands In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the UO Analyzer Useful commands related to MSRT mode described elsewhere INITiate lt n gt REFResh on page 350 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer REFResh ALL on page 323 IO Analysis Remote commands exclusive to MSRT applications The following commands are only available for MSRT application channels CALC latesn RTMS EE le TEE 352 CALCulate n RTMS ALINe VALue 2 2 222 ctr eo corretto oaa ua ncs cie 352 CAL Culate nzRTMSWlNDowcn NA 352 SENSeIRTMS CAPTUreiDEESGL re irre dut etn te tata dnte e EAEL Aan iN irai ANa 353 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRT applications and the MSRT Master lt n gt is irrelevant Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parame
428. s for RF input have no effect on analog baseband input However a special bandwidth extension option for the Analog Baseband Interface is available which allows the R amp S FSW to analyze a maximum bandwidth of 80 MHz input per connector i e a 160 MHz analysis bandwidth Spectrum limits The analog baseband spectrum to be analyzed depends both on the analysis band width and on the center frequency which defines the middle of the spectrum The Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface spectrum should always remain within the span 40 MHz to 40 MHz without the B71E option or 80 MHz to 80 MHz with the B71E option to avoid effects from unwanted signal components e g mirrored sidebands Thus always select the maxi mum analysis bandwidth and the position of the center frequency such that the spec trum remains within the specified limits You are not forced by the R amp S FSW to do so but a warning message will be displayed if the limits are exceeded Table 5 8 Spectrum limits depending on I Q mode UO Mode Complex baseband I jQ Low F I Q Real Baseband I Q Analysis BW max 80 MHz default BW max 40 MHz default BW max 40 MHz i BW 160 MHz with B71E BWma 80 MHz with B71E default option option BW max 80 MHz with BWmax 2 BW 2 lt fy s BW BWmnay 2 BW 2 lt f BWma 2 B71E Option BW 2 BW 2 Center BWmax 2 lt fo lt BW max 2 0 lt f lt
429. s indicated by its number for example B40 extends the bandwidth to 40 MHz Note that the U options as of U40 always require all lower bandwidth options as a pre requisite while the B options already include them As a rule the usable UO bandwidth is proportional to the output sample rate Yet when the UO bandwidth reaches the bandwidth of the analog IF filter at very high output sample rates the curve breaks Bandwidth Extension Options nennen nnne 26 Relationship Between Sample Rate Record Length and Usable UO Bandwidth 27 R amp S FSW without additional bandwidth extension options c cceeeeeeeeeeeees 28 R amp S FSW with options B28 or U28 UO Bandwidth Extension 29 R amp S FSW with option B40 or U40 UO Bandwidth Extension 29 R amp S FSW with option B80 or U80 UO Bandwidth Extension 30 R amp S FSW with activated option B160 or U160 I Q Bandwidth Extension 30 Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated UO Bandwidth Extension Option B32 WUJ Z0 31 Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated UO Bandwidth Extension Option zio m 32 Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated UO Bandwidth Extension Option P 000 E et 34 Bandwidth Extension Options Max usable Required B option Required U option s
430. scale level or select Auto mode to have it set automati cally according to the selected reference level 7 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example a Baseband Power trigger to start capturing data only when a specific input power is exceeded 8 Press the MEAS CONFIG key and select Data Acquisition to configure the signal capture e Sample rate selected for analysis data or Analysis Bandwidth the band width range in which the signal remains unchanged by the digital decimation fil ter and thus remains undistorted this range can be used for accurate analysis by the R amp S FSW both values are correlated e Measurement Time how long the signal is to be captured e Record Length the number of samples to be captured also defined by sam ple rate and measurement time 9 Select the Display Config button and select up to six displays that are of interest to you To analyze the complex spectrum of the analog baseband signal for instance select the Spectrum result display and the UO mode I jQ in the input settings The displayed span corresponds to the selected sample rate Arrange the windows on the display to suit your preferences 10 Exit the SmartGrid mode 11 Start a new sweep with the defined settings User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 198 How to Capture or Output UO Data via Optional Interfaces 8 2 3 How to Capture Data from the Optional Baseband Inpu
431. sing direct connec tion between generator and device input and waits for the sweep end Usage Setting only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Calibrate Reflection Short on page 125 See Calibrate Reflection Open on page 125 SENSe CORRection METHod This command selects the type of measurement to be performed with the external gen erator This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 254 Parameters REFLection Selects reflection measurements TRANsmission Selects transmission measurements RST TRANsmission Example CORR METH TRAN Sets the type of measurement to transmission Manual operation See Calibrate Transmission on page 125 See Calibrate Reflection Short on page 125 See Calibrate Reflection Open on page 125 SENSe CORRection RECall This command restores the measurement configuration used for calibration This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 254 Example CORR REC Usage Event Manual operation See Recall on page 125 SENSe CORRection STATe State This command turns correction of measurement results normalization on and off Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements The command is available after you have created a reference trace for the selected measurement type with SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 257 This co
432. softkey e Press the MEAS key The common measurements as in the Spectrum application are listed In addition IQ Analyzer is provided under Basic Measurements to return to the default I Q Analysis functions Ts E E z GZ RecLengt 1001 E d Lt P cLengu mi Power Measurements Statistics Measurements Basic Measurements EG Channel Power ACLR C N CD Zero Span C NO IQ Analyzer OBW The time and frequency domain measurements and the required settings are descri bed in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Multiple measurements Only one measurement type can be configured per channel however several chan nels for time or frequency based measurements on UO data can be configured in par allel on the R amp S FSW Thus you can configure one channel for conventional UO Analysis for example and another for an SEM or power measurement on the same data Then you can switch through the results easily by switching tabs or monitor all results at the same time in the MSRA MSRT View Configuring an I Q Analyzer as an MSRA MSRT Application Remote command CALCulate n IQ MODE on page 215 Trace Settings 7 Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc can be config ured via the Analysis button in the Overview They are identical to the analysis func tions in the Spectrum application except for the special marker functions which are not available for UO data 7 1
433. ssse 63 FSW B2000 Alignment Signal Source 78 GPIB PN 63 IF OUT 2 GE ae entente 78 IF VIDEO DEMOD 141 REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ iem te 78 Continue single sweep ec m 172 Continuous sweep SOKE idee erred rnt tees 171 Conventions SCOPI comimands trente 210 Conversion loss External Mixer Remote control 240 241 Conversion loss tables sssssssssseees 109 110 Available remote control sss 243 Band remote control 242 Bias remote control 242 Configuring 109 Creating Seege ve 110 Deleting remote control A 243 External Mixet ue eie 106 External Mixer Remote control 240 Harmonic order remote control 1 244 Importing External Mixer 110 Managihg 2 rns 108 Mixer type remote control 245 Saving External Mixer 114 Selecting remote control 245 Shifting values External Mixer ats 113 Values External Mixer eese 113 Copying Measurement channel remote si MC EE Coupling Automatic external generator 2 123 Frequencies external generator ssssss 71 Input remote 222 Manual external generator 123 Dr 161 D Data acquisition
434. ssssss Normalization external generator Reference trace external generator 69 Reflection open measurement external generator 125 Reflection short measurement external generator 125 Restoring settings external generator 70 125 Storing results external generator 69 Transmission measurement external generator 125 Capture offset MSRA MSRT applications esses 169 MSRT applications ajo er P US eji i EE Capture time see also Measurement time 0 eee eects 324 Capturing UO data see Data acquisition 318 Center Mkr Freg aac rotten eege Center MEQUENCY A Analog Baseband B71 Automatic configuration eese Displayed ce emet qot idees in acr cet adds Setting to marker ns UE EE Channel bar Information external generator cceeeeeeeeteeees 74 Clock rate DENION eT 39 Closing Channels remote AA 217 Windows remote A 314 317 Common mode offset lee 52 Configuring Data acquisition remote ssess 299 UO Analyzer remote sse 220 Markers remote cnet cerni ta enne 330 Connector Baseband Inputs 2c rita e rote degen e 42 Connectors AUX control external generator 63 External generator control ssses
435. strument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA and MSRT operating mode additional tabs and elements are available A colored background of the screen behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA MSRT operating mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Channel bar information In the UO Analyzer application the R amp S FSW shows the following settings Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar for the I Q Analyzer application Ref Level Reference level m el Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Ref Offset Reference level offset Freq Center frequency Meas Time Measurement time Rec Length Defined record length number of samples to capture a S E User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 13 Understanding the Display Information SRate Defined sample rate for data acquisition RBW Spectrum evaluation only Resolution bandwidth calculated from the sample rate and record length Inp Dig IQ Input source digital UO data from the optional Digital Baseband Interface Inp Analog lt I Q mode Input source analog baseband data from the optional Analog Baseband Interface Q mode defines the processing mode see chapter 5 3 3
436. such as noise or trigger signals RF Input Protection The RF input connector of the R amp S FSW must be protected against signal levels that exceed the ranges specified in the data sheet Therefore the R amp S FSW is equipped with an overload protection mechanism This mechanism becomes active as soon as the power at the input mixer exceeds the specified limit It ensures that the connection between RF input and input mixer is cut off When the overload protection is activated an error message is displayed in the status bar INPUT OVLD and a message box informs you that the RF Input was discon nected Furthermore a status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register is set In this case you must decrease the level at the RF input connector and then close the message box Then measurement is possible again Reactivating the RF input is also possible via the remote command INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet RF Input from the Analog Baseband Connector RF input can not only be taken from the RF INPUT connector on the R amp S FSW If the optional Analog Baseband Interface is installed and active for input an RF signal can be input at the BASEBAND INPUT connector and redirected from there to the RF input path A transducer is activated to compensate for the additional path of the redir ected signal The signal is then processed as usual in the frequency and time domain as for any other RF input This is useful for exampl
437. t dB Example MIX LOSS 20dB Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 106 SENSe MIXer PORTSs lt PortType gt This command specifies whether the mixer is a 2 port or 3 port type Parameters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 105 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe State If enabled the band limits are extended beyond RF Start and RF Stop due to the capabilities of the used harmonics Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See RF Overrange on page 105 Conversion Loss Table Settings The following settings are required to configure and manage conversion loss tables E Leed Re TEE 242 SENSe CORRaction CVE BlAS iiic citra i reete ase be yat de a ede ua REENEN 242 SENSe CORRection CVISCATAIGG cune retain te ene y e apu en o EP hax ERE E RFRe eR a aA i 243 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements ISBNSeTGORRScUOnd E 243 SENSEI ele Be eren 243 SENSe ICORRecti n C EN E 244 ISENSeTGORRecuon C VE FIARMORIG 12 etuer tee ad cen rete ei 244 SENSe CORRection CVL MIX6Gt 5 2 octo acc EE occ io ena dee co re EP vL a ec ELLE ETATE 244 SENSeJCORRectom C VESPORTS EE 245 SENSe1CORRection C VE SE Ll 1 auct tage ck erronee bates e ped o Te SE dE 245 SENSe CORRection CVE SNIMBer iooi Loic eei eoo pua pac cusa sc EAR 245 SENSe CORRection CVL BAND Type This command defines the waveguide ba
438. t Connectors R amp S FSW B71 as RF Input RF signals can also be input via the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband Interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed Thus RF signals can also be input using an active R amp S probe The probe input can then be processed as common RF input 1 Connect the device for example a probe that provides analog baseband data modulated on a carrier frequency to the BASEBAND INPUT I connector at the front of the R amp S FSW 2 Press the INPUT OUTPUT key of the R amp S FSW 3 Select the Input Source Config button to configure the Radio Frequency signal Source 4 Setthe state of the Radio Frequency signal source to On 5 As the Input Connector select Baseband Input I 6 Select the Amplitude button to define the attenuation reference level or other set tings that affect the input signal s amplitude and scaling 7 Select the Frequency button to define the input signal s center frequency 8 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an IQ Power trigger to start capturing data only when a specific power is exceeded 9 Select the Bandwidth button and define the bandwidth parameters for data acqui sition e Sample rate or Analysis Bandwidth the span of the input signal to be cap tured for analysis or the rate at which samples are captured both values are correlated e Optionally if R amp S
439. t Minimum on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 189 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 189 IO Analysis 10 7 2 5 Marker Peak Lists Useful commands for peak lists described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 337 MMEMory STORe lt n gt PEAK on page 346 Remote commands exclusive to peak lists CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel S TATe 344 CAL Culate nzM bkerzmz FUNGCHontbEake COUN ener 344 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate eese 345 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE eere 345 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks SORT eee een nnns 345 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks STATe eene 346 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEeaks X eese nnns 346 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEeaks Y eee nnns 346 MMEM
440. t com pressed and thus it is possible to read the UO data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Sample iq tar files If you have the optional R amp S FSW VSA application R amp S FSW K70 some sample iq tar files are provided in the C R_S Instr user vsa DemoSignals directory on the R amp S FSW Contained files An ig tar file must contain the following files e Q parameter XML file e g xyz xm1 Contains meta information about the UO data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single UO parameter XML file inside an ig tar file e J Q data binary file e g xyz complex float32 Contains the binary I Q data of all channels There must be only one single UO data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file e Q preview XSLT file e g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the UO parameter XML file and a preview of the UO data in a web browser A sample stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt UO Data File Format iq tar A 4 1 I Q Parameter XML File Specification The content of the UO parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz com file RslqTar xsd In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar us
441. t data to generate a transducer factor The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix tra under c r_s instr trd The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency The generated trans ducer factor can be further adapted using the Transducer softkey in the SETUP menu For more information on transducers see the General Instrument Setup gt Transduc ers section in the R amp S FSW User Manual This function is only available if Source Calibration Normalize is switched on Note Note that the normalized measurement data is used not the reference trace Thus if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration without changing any settings the transducer factor will be 0 dB for the entire span by definition of the nor malized trace Remote command SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerator on page 259 Reference Position Defines the position of the Result Frequency Stop in percent of the total y axis range The top of the diagram is 100 the bottom is 0 By default the 0 dB line is displayed at the top of the diagram 100 This setting is only available if normalization is on see Source Calibration Normalize on page 125 The reference line defined by the reference value and reference position is similar to the Reference Level defined in the Amplitude settings However this reference line only
442. t is only available if the IF OUT 2 GHZ output connector is installed see Prerequisites below If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is installed and active this is the only setting available for IF output For details see chapter 5 4 7 Basics on the 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 Option on page 76 Restrictions Note the following restrictions for IF output e IF and video output is only available in the time domain zero span e For UO data only IF output is available F output is not available if any of the following conditions apply The optional Digital Baseband Interface is active for input or output MSRA operating mode is active MSRT operating mode is active A wideband extension is used hardware options R amp S FSW B160 B320 B500 used automatically for bandwidths 80 MHz in this case use the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector The sample rate is larger than 200 MHz upsampling IF WIDE OUTPUT If a hardware option R amp S FSW B160 B320 B500 for bandwidth extension is instal led and activated i e for bandwidths gt 80 MHz the IF output is not available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector but rather at the additional IF WIDE OUTPUT con nector provided by the option In this case the IF output frequency cannot be defined manually but is determined automatically depending on the center frequency For details on the used frequencies see the data sheet
443. t signal Parameters lt DataType gt lQ 1 Q IO The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two input channels are required for each input signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature compo nent l The in phase component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the in phase component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF I Q The quadrature component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the quadrature component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF Q RST IQ Example INP IQ TYPE Q Manual operation See Q Mode on page 117 CALibration AIQ DCOFfset Offset This command defines a DC offset of the input from the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters lt Offset gt numeric value DC offset RST 0 Default unit V Example CAL AIQ DCOF I 0 001 CALibration AlQ DCOFfset Q lt Offset gt This command defines a DC offset of the Q input from the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Parameters Offset numeric value DC offset RST 0 Default unit V Example CAL AIQ DCOF Q 0 001 CALibration AIQ HATiming STATe State Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband
444. t works for trace modes min hold max hold and average Note that the command has no effect if critical parameters like the span have been changed to avoid invalid measurement results Parameters State ON The automatic reset is off OFF The automatic reset is on RST OFF Example DISP WIND TRAC3 MODE HCON ON Switches off the reset function Manual operation See Hold on page 179 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 for TRACe1 0 for TRACe 2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 on page 178 See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 180 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SMOothing APERture Percentage This command defines the degree aperture of the trace smoothing if DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SMOothing STATe TRUE Parameters lt Percentage gt Range 1 to 50 RST 2 Default unit PCT Example DISP3 TRAC2 SMO APER 5 Defines an aperture of 5 for trace 2 in window 3 Manual operation See Smoothing on page 179 IO Analysis DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SMOothing STATe State This command turns trace smoothing for a particular trace on and off If enabled the trace is smoothed by the value specified usi
445. ta Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1Q STATe on page 363 MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1IQ COMMent on page 362 Data Input and Output Settings The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals 6 3 1 6 3 1 1 Data Input and Output Settings For background information on providing input and output or working with power sen Sors see the R amp S FSW User Manual To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Input button in the Overview e Select the INPUT OUTPUT key Dour Soiree SONGS acce mc endet nter ec ntt det ce eed cce doctr etae 99 Power SOMSONS M 130 Output Sets E 139 Digital 1 Q ele CT 142 Input Source Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config The input source determines which data the R amp S FSW will analyze Since the Digital UO input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal path both cannot be used simultaneously When one is activated established connec tions for the other are disconnected When the second input is deactivated connec tions to the first are re established This may cause a short delay in data transfer after Switching the input source E
446. tart of the measurement in case another trigger event occurs Range Os to 1s Increment 100 ns RST 0s Example PMET2 TRIG HOLD 0 1 Sets the holdoff time of the trigger to 100 ms Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 137 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis for external power triggers The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the IF power trigger level in order to allow a trigger to start the measurement Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3dB to 50 dB Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB Example PMET2 TRIG HYST 10 Sets the hysteresis of the trigger to 10 dB Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 137 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger LEVel Level This command defines the trigger level for external power triggers This command requires the use of an R amp S NRP Z81 power sensor Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters Level 20 to 20 dBm Range 20 dBm to 20 dBm RST 10 dBm Example PMET2 TRIG LEV 10 dBm Sets the level of the trigger Manual operation See External Trigger Level on page 136 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger SLOPe Edge This command selects the trigger condition for external power triggers Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Edge gt POSitive
447. te lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 341 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 341 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt on page 342 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 343 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum LEFT on page 343 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum RIGHt on page 343 Center Frequency Marker Frequency Sets the center frequency to the selected marker or delta marker frequency A peak can thus be set as center frequency for example to analyze it in detail with a smaller span This function is not available for zero span measurements Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CENTer on page 285 7 2 3 Marker Usage Reference Level Marker Level Sets the reference level to the selected marker level Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion REFerence on page 278 Marker Peak List Configuration Access Overview gt Analysis gt Marker gt Peak List or MKR FUNC gt Marker Peak List State Settings searchLimits Sort Mode SC Value Left Limit E 0 0 Hz J Right Limit E 26 5 GHz 50 TTT Maximum Number of Peaks Threshold Peak Excursion 6 0 dB ke Use Zoom Limits Display Marker Numbers On Search Limits Off Export Decimal Separator Point Peak NSU SC tee ege Eed 190 ege 190 Maximum Number of Peaks atre tasa ertet aat ter astro De
448. te that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 10 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter Manual operation
449. ters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Manual operation See Show Line on page 193 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRT applications and the MSRT Master lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time pretrigger posttrigger of the MSRT measurement Default unit s Manual operation See Position on page 193 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRT View or MSRT Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only Retrieving Results SENSe RTMS CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRT mode not for the MSRT Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters Offset This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is cont
450. th extension option B2000 Sample rate Maximum record length approx 10 kHz to 5 GHz 400 MSa SampleRate 10 GHz 100 5 GHz to 10 GHz 400 MSa SampleRate 10 GHz 1000 Example For the maximum sample rate of 2 5 GHz and the maximum bandwidth of 2 GHz on the R amp S FSW the maximum record length is approximately 400 MSa 2 5 GHz 10 GHz 100 99 999900 MSamples 5 2 Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface Alternatively to capturing analog UO data from the standard RF Input connector on the R amp S FSW digital UO data can be captured from the optional Digital Baseband Interface if installed Processing Data from the Digital Baseband Interface Furthermore the UO data processed by the I Q Analyzer can also be output to this interface e The digital input and output cannot be used simultaneously Since the Digital UO input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal path both cannot be used simultaneously When one is activated established connec tions for the other are disconnected When the second input is deactivated connec tions to the first are re established This may cause a short delay in data transfer after Switching the input source e Digital pil reete P SERE a ERENN ENNSNE RENE ER REP A TE NN SNNENRKRER 36 DUG RAO ic i detec 2 ea E nudnad een A A T 37 e Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Digital UO Data 39 e interface Status Informatlon lu
451. the B2000 Config softkey 6 In the B2000 tab of the Input dialog box enter the IP address of the oscillo Scope To enter the computer name instead of the IP address of the oscilloscope select the ABC button first 7 Setthe B2000 State to On 8 Select the Alignment subtab 9 Select the Alignment button How to Configure Data Acquisition via the Optional 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 10 11 12 13 When the first alignment step was completed succesfully a new dialog box is dis played Disconnect the cable from the REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ connector and instead con nect it to the FSW B2000 ALIGNMENT SIGNAL SOURCE connector on the R amp S FSW Select the Continue Alignment button When the second alignment step was successfully completed a green alignment message and the date are displayed in the dialog box The alignment data is stored on the oscilloscope If alignment fails an error message is displayed See table 9 4 for possible solu tions Remove the cable from the ALIGNMENT SIGNAL SOURCE on the R amp S FSW and connect it to the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector Select the Continue button The measurement setup is now ready for measurement How to capture data with the 2 GHz bandwidth extension 1 Check the following connections on the R amp S FSW and the oscilloscope For details see chapter 5 4 7 2 Prerequisites and Measurement Setup on page 77 e ThelF OUT 2 GHZ
452. the R amp S FSW Parameters lt NumberSensors gt Number of connected power sensors Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET COUN Usage Query only Manual operation See Select on page 134 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt DEFine lt Placeholder gt lt Type gt Interface lt SerialNo gt This command assigns the power sensor with the specified serial number to the selected power sensor index configuration The query returns the power sensor type and serial number of the sensor assigned to the specified index Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Setting parameters lt Placeholder gt Currently not evaluated lt SerialNo gt Serial number of a connected power sensor Query parameters lt Type gt The power sensor type e g NRP Z81 Interface Currently not evaluated Return values Placeholder Currently not used Type Detected power sensor type e g NRP Z81 Interface Interface the power sensor is connected to always USB lt SerialNo gt Serial number of the power sensor assigned to the specified index Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET2 DEF NRP Z81 123456 Assigns the power sensor with the serial number 123456 to the configuration Power Sensor 2 SYST COMM RDEV PMET2 DEF Queries the sensor assigned to Power Sensor 2 Result Ey NRP Z81 USB 123456 The NRP Z81 power sensor with the serial number 123456 is ass
453. the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas Ref 135 Reference Value senten nennen nnne en tens nn ns senten srt senten 135 Use Ref Lev Of al 136 Average Count Number of Readings 136 DU D VOI iet une dane err uite ate He e EUR rab E PE Yr HE Re pe EU 136 Using the power sensor as an external trigger eee 136 L External Trigger Level EEN 136 m 0 EMMP 137 NI d oo c NORTON 137 Gi o MILI OD ES 137 ni o PIRE 137 State Switches the power measurement for all power sensors on or off Note that in addition to this general setting each power sensor can be activated or deactivated individually by the Select setting on each tab However the general setting overrides the individual settings Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe on page 268 Data Input and Output Settings Continuous Value Update If activated the power sensor data is updated continuously during a sweep with a long sweep time and even after a single sweep has completed This function cannot be activated for individual sensors If the power sensor is being used as a trigger see Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 136 continuous update is not possible this setting is ignored Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt UPDate STATe on page 268 Select Selects the individual power sensor for usage
454. the data should be in binary format to improve performance In binary format the number of l and Q data can be calculated as follows Sof DataBytes ofi Data of Q Data a For the format QBLock the offset of Q data in the output buffer can be calculated as follows Gt of DataBytes Q Data Offset 2 LengthindicatorDigits with LengthIndicatorDigits being the number of digits of the length indicator including the In the example above 41024 this results in a value of 6 for LengthIndica torDigits and the offset for the Q data results in 512 6 518 UO Data File Format iq tar AA VQ Data File Format iq tar UO data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar An ig tar file contains UO data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate UO data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the UO data in a web browser and allows you to include user specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Comparison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar file are not changed no
455. the input from the R amp S FSW The RF frequency may be multiplied by a specified factor or a frequency offset can be added or both Note The input for the generator frequency is not validated i e you can enter any val ues However if the allowed frequency ranges of the generator are exceeded an error message is displayed on the R amp S FSW and the values for Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop are corrected to comply with the range limits The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator The default setting is 0 Hz Offsets lt gt 0 Hz are indicated by the FRQ label in the channel bar Negative offsets can be used to define reverse sweeps Data Input and Output Settings For more information on coupling frequencies and reverse sweeps see chapter 5 4 5 7 Coupling the Frequencies on page 71 For more information on error messages and the channel bar see chapter 5 4 5 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 74 Remote command SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator on page 252 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator on page 253 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency OFFSet on page 253 Result Frequency Start For reference only The start frequency for the generator calculated from the config ured generator frequency and the start value defined for the R amp S FSW Result Frequency Stop For reference only The stop frequency for the generator calculated from the config ured generato
456. the interval between gate periods to 20 samples TRAC IQ EGAT NOF 2 Sets the number of gate periods after the trigger signal to 2 RIG SOUR IQP i J Defines the magnitude of the sampled I Q data to be used as a trigger RIG LEV IQP 30dbm 2 j 10 11 3 Programming Examples Sets the trigger level TRAC IQ DATA WAI Performs a measurement and returns the RF input voltage at each sample point first 1000 I values then 1000 Q values TRAC IQ DATA MEM 0 500 Returns the first 500 samples of the stored trace data for the measurement For each sample first the I value then the Q value is listed TRAC IQ DATA MEM 500 500 Returns the second half of the 1000 captured sample values Data Acquisition via the Optional Digital Baseband Interface This example demonstrates how to capture UO data via the optional Digital Baseband Interface using the UO Analyzer in a remote environment 7 Activating the I Q Analyzer application RST Reset the instrument INST CRE IQ IQANALYZER Creates a new measurement channel named IQANALYZER INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode NP SEL DIQ Selects the digital baseband interface as the input source INP DIQ CDEV Queries the detected information for the connected instrument NP DIQ SRAT AUTO ON Sets the input sample rate to the rate of the connected instrument automatically NP DIQ RANG UPP 2
457. the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference Sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison Auto ID on page 108 function The input range is between 0 1 dB and 100 dB Values of about 10 dB i e default set ting generally yield satisfactory results Remote command SENSe MIXer THReshold on page 236 Bias Settings Define the bias current for each range which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s The trace is adapted to the settings immediately so you can check the results To store the bias setting in the currently selected conversion loss table select the Write to lt CVL table name gt button Remote command SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW on page 235 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH on page 235 Write to CVL table name Bias Settings Stores the bias setting in the currently selected Conversion loss table for the range see Managing Conversion Loss Tables on page 108 If no conversion loss table is selected yet this function is not available CVL Table not selected Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 242 Managing Conversion Loss Tables Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conver sion Loss Table or
458. the oscilloscope or remote opera tion other than by the R amp S FSW controlling the option is not possible If the LAN connection is lost for any reason the oscilloscope remains locked Restart the oscilloscope to unlock it To determine the oscilloscope s computer name gt On the oscilloscope press the SETUP key and select the System tab or LXI tab The current computer name is displayed To determine the oscilloscope s TCPIP address 1 Press the SETUP key and select the System tab 2 Tap Network 3 Touch and hold or right click Local Area Connection and select Properties 4 Windows XP On the General tab select Internet Protocol TCP IP and then select Proper ties Windows 7 On the Networking tab select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 and then select Properties The address is indicated under Use the following IP address How to align the IF OUT 2 GHz connector and the oscilloscope for initial use 1 Connect the REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the CH1 input on the front panel of the oscilloscope 2 Connectthe oscilloscope to the R amp S FSW via LAN 3 Connectan external reference to the REF IN connector of the oscilloscope If the reference is supplied by the R amp S FSW connect the REF OUTPUT 10 MHZ connector of the R amp S FSW to the REF IN connector of the oscilloscope 4 On the R amp S FSW press the INPUT OUTPUT key 5 Select
459. the signal genera tor the R amp S FSW sets the generator frequency for each frequency point individually via GPIB and only when the setting procedure is finished the R amp S FSW can measure the next sweep point For generators with a TTL interface the R amp S FSW sends a list of the frequencies to be set to the generator before the beginning of the first sweep Then the R amp S FSW starts the sweep and the next frequency point is selected by both the R amp S FSW and the gen erator using the TTL handshake line TRIGGER The R amp S FSW can only measure a value when the generator signals the end of the setting procedure via the BLANK signal Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control because the frequency stepping of the R amp S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator Reverse sweep The frequency offset for automatic coupling can be used to sweep in the reverse direc tion To do so define a negative offset in the external generator measurement configu ration Note that the frequency is defined as the unsigned value of the equation thus a negative frequency is not possible Example Example for reverse sweep FanalyzerStart 100 MHz Fanalyzerstop 200 MHz Fofiset 300 MHz Numerator Denominator 1 gt F Generatorstart 200 MHz FGeneratorstop 100 MHz If the offset is adjusted so that the sweep of the generator crosses the minimum gene
460. ting All Search Limits on page 188 Positioning the Marker This chapter contains remote commands necessary to position the marker on a trace e Positioning Normal Markers cerit rete e dE ead im SE 340 e Positioning Delta Markers eer iieri et aee i eve Pe cred S nent 342 IO Analysis Positioning Normal Markers The following commands position markers on the trace CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum AUTO esses nnne nnne nnne na sadi nun 340 CAL GUulate pn MARKer m MAXImUBEF EE 340 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum NEXT esses nne nennen enne nn nn 340 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm MANimumf PDEAK nnne 340 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGHtEt c eeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen nennen anna 341 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum AUTO eeseeeeeee nennen nnne nennen nnn 341 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum LEFT eee nennen nnne nnns 341 CALCulatesmMARKersm MINIUEINEXT E 341 CALCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK cessisse nennen nnne 341 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHt eeeeeeee eene enne nnne nnn nn 342 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum AUTO State This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace maximum on and off The R amp S FSW performs the peak search after each sweep Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK MAX AUTO ON Activates the automatic peak search functio
461. ting I Q data see chapter 5 5 I Q Data Import and Export on page 85 MMEMbry EOADICES TANT eee t decade ce een tete e ertet ee ta tav neces eo dat 362 MMEMOory STORe lt n i1O COMME nl iuc rouer ta eri a eee deed E aa ec ER 362 MMEMom Ree VE VE 363 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores UO data from a file The file extension is iq tar Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only Manual operation See Q Import on page 98 MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1Q COMMent lt Comment gt This command adds a comment to a file that contains UO data The suffix n is irrelevant Parameters Comment String containing the comment 10 10 Querying the Status Registers Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data and the comment to the specified file Manual operation See UO Export on page 98 MMEMory STORe lt n gt lQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured UO data to a file The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored
462. tion settings in the cur rent application attenuation center frequency measurement bandwidth sample rate can be ignored As a result these settings cannot be changed in the current applica tion Only the measurement time can be decreased in order to perform measurements on an extract of the available data from the beginning of the file only 5 4 7 5 4 7 1 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output When using input from an UO data file the RUN SINGLE function starts a single mea surement i e analysis of the stored UO data while the RUN CONT function repeat edly analyzes the same data from the file Sample iq tar files If you have the optional R amp S FSW VSA application R amp S FSW K70 some sample iq tar files are provided in the C R S Instr user vsa DemoSignals directory on the R amp S FSW Furthermore you can create your own iq tar files in the I Q Analyzer see chap ter 8 4 How to Export and Import UO Data on page 203 Pre trigger and post trigger samples In applications that use pre triggers or post triggers if no pre trigger or post trigger samples are specified in the UO data file or too few trigger samples are provided to satisfy the requirements of the application the missing pre or post trigger values are filled up with zeros Superfluous samples in the file are dropped if necessary For pre trigger samples values are filled up or omitted at the beginning of the capture buffer for post t
463. tions and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta tion DVD delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument functions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSW in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the soft ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri bed here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on main tenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting Conventions Used in the Documentation In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parame ters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSW is not inclu ded in the application manuals All user manuals are also available for download f
464. tive pin carries the bits IM 2 IM 3 IM 4 IM 5 IM 6 IM 7 SDAT6 P Serial data channel 6 positive pin carries the bits IM 8 IM 9 IM 10 IM 11 1M 12 IM 13 SDAT7 P Serial data channel 7 positive pin carries the bits IM 14 IM 15 1M 16 IM 17 IM 18 IM 19 SDATO M reserved for future use Serial data channel 0 negative pin SDAT4 M Serial data channel 1 negative pin SDAT2 M Serial data channel 2 negative pin CLK1 M Clock 1 negative pin DGND Power ground ground return for 5V supply voltage for future use S DATA for future use SDAT3 M Serial data channel 3 negative pin SDAT4_M Serial data channel 4 negative pin SDAT5_M Serial data channel 5 negative pin SDAT6_M Serial data channel 6 negative pin SDAT7_M Serial data channel 7 negative pin GND LVDS ground shielding of transmission lines and shielding of cable Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format When trace data is retrieved using the TRAC DATA or TRAC IQ DATA command the data is returned in the format defined using the FORMat DATA The possible for mats are described here e ASCII Format FORMat ASCII The data is stored as a list of comma separated values CSV of the measured val ues in floating point format e Binary Format FORMat REAL 32 User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 378 Reference Format Description for UO
465. traces at the same position on the frequency axis Image signals and mixer products caused by other harmonics are displayed at different positions in both traces The user identifies the signals visually by comparing the two traces Since the LO frequency is displaced downwards in the reference sweep the conver sion loss of the mixer may differ from the test sweep Therefore the signal eve should only be measured in the test sweep trace 1 Auto ID function The Auto ID function basically functions like Signal ID function However the test and reference sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak values of each sweep point The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if Sig nal ID is active at the same time If Signal ID is not active the result can be dis played in any of the traces 1 to 3 Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this cal culated trace User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 58 R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing Test sweep and reference sweep traces Depending on which of the automatic signal identification functions are used the traces are used to display either the test sweep the upper side band sweep or the ref erence sweep lower side band sweep Function Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Signal ID Signal ID upper side band Signal ID lower side band Auto ID Auto ID Signal ID Auto ID Signal ID upper side band
466. ts Example MIX FREQ STAR Queries the start frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 104 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band stops Example MIX FREQ STOP Queries the stop frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 104 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet This command restores the preset frequency ranges for the selected standard wave guide band Note Changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function Use this command to restore the predefined band ranges Example MIX HARM BAND PRES Presets the selected waveguide band Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Band on page 105 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue Band This command selects the external mixer band The query returns the currently selected band This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 235 Parameters Band KA JQJUJVIEJWI F D GJ Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Manual operation See Band on page 105 Table 10 2 Frequency ranges for pre defined bands Band Frequency start GHz Frequency stop GHz KA A 26 5 40 0 Q 33 0 50 0 The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA Configuring I Q Analyz
467. ual Source Frequency on page 123 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency COUPling STATe State This command couples the frequency of the external generator output to the R amp S FSW Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Default setting a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW the RF frequency range covers the currently defined span of the R amp S FSW unless limited by the range of the signal generator OFF 0 The generator uses a single fixed frequency defined by SOURce EXTernal FREQuency RST 1 Example SOUR EXT FREQ COUP ON Manual operation See Source Frequency Coupling on page 123 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator lt Value gt This command defines the denominator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the ana lyzer Numerator _ Offset Denominator Source Freq RF Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST 1 Example SOUR EXT FREQ NUM 4 SOUR EXT FREQ DEN 3 Sets a multiplication factor of 4 3 i e the transmit frequency of the generator is 4 3 times the analyzer frequency Manu
468. uch mixers the LO signal is coupled into the IF path due to its limited isolation The coupled LO signal becomes visible at the RF frequency 0 Hz This effect is referred to as LO feedthrough To avoid the LO feedthrough the spectrum analyzer provides an alternative signal path to the A D converter referred to as the direct path By default the direct path is selected automatically for RF frequencies close to zero However this behavior can be deactivated If Direct Path is set to Off the spectrum analyzer always uses the ana log mixer path Auto Default The direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to zero Off The analog mixer path is always used Remote command INPut DPATh on page 222 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the analyzer in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 223 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector if available on the R amp S FSW An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW ensures th
469. uence LEVel BBPower Level This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger Configuring I Q Analyzer Measurements This command is available for the optional Digital Baseband Interface and the optional Analog Baseband Interface Parameters Level Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV BBP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 160 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event In the UO Analyzer application only EXTernal1 is supported Suffix port Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 7 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5V RST 1 4V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 160 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IF Power lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered For compatibility reasons this command is also available for the baseband power trigger source when using the Analog
470. uency The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 8 GHz The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli fication For details on available trigger levels see the instrument s data sheet Note If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the sweep may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stabil ity can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis This trigger source is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face or the optional Analog Baseband Interface If the trigger source RF Power is selected and digital UO or analog baseband input is activated the trigger source is automatically switched to Free Run Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 292 Power Sensor Trigger Source Trigger Source Uses an external power sensor as a trigger source This option is only available if a power sensor is connected and configured Note For R amp S power sensors the Gate Mode Lvl is not supported The signal sent by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded rather than a time period However only time periods can be used for gating in level mode Thus Trigger Settings the tri
471. uency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 s foenter E fmax E SPAN min 2 fmax and span i depend on the instrument and are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 285 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased using the arrow keys When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to another value or it can be manually set to a fixed value Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 286 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup fo
472. ueries the R amp S part number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt PartNumber gt Part number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID SRNumber Queries the serial number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 1 2 3 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt SerialNo gt Serial number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup MODE lt Mode gt Select the action that is started with the micro button on the probe head See also Microbutton Action on page 119 Suffix lt p gt 1 2 3 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Parameters Mode Manual operation Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements RSINgle Run single starts one data acquisition NOACtion Nothing is started on pressing the micro button RST RSINgle See Microbutton Action on page 119 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup NAME Queries the name of the probe Suffix lt p gt Return values lt Name gt Usage 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2
473. uery only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active measure ment channel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values lt WindowIndex gt Index number of the window Example LAY WIND IDEN 2 Queries the index of the result display named 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display in the active measurement channel Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY REM 2 Removes the result display in the window named 2 Configuring the Result Display Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window in the active measurement channel while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active measurement cha
474. uired if bandwidth extension option for 500 MHz is installed Remote command TRACe IQ WBANd STATe on page 306 TRACe IQ WBBANd MBWIDTH on page 307 Omitting the Digital Decimation Filter No Filter This setting is only available when using the optional Digital Baseband Interface If enabled no digital decimation filter is used during data acquisition Thus the Analy sis Bandwidth is identical to the input sample rate configured for the Digital UO input source see Input Sample Rate on page 115 Note however that in this case noise artifacts and the second IF side band may not be suppressed in the captured UO data Remote command TRACe IQ DIQFilter on page 303 Meas Time Defines the UO acquisition time By default the measurement time is calculated as the number of UO samples Record Length divided by the sample rate If you change the measurement time the Record Length is automatically changed as well For details on the maximum number of samples see also chapter 5 1 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable UO Bandwidth for RF Input on page 25 Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 324 Record Length Defines the number of UO samples to record By default the number of sweep points is used The record length is calculated as the measurement time multiplied by the sam ple rate If you change the record length the Meas Time is automatically changed as well Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settin
475. ults can be influenced by special settings In UO Analyzer mode the search settings for Real Imag I Q evaluation include an additional parameter see Branch for Peak Search on page 188 The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chap ter 10 7 2 4 Positioning the Marker on page 339 e Makor Search Satni EE 186 e Posit nliid FUNGON EE 188 Marker Search Settings Access Overview gt Analysis gt Markers gt Search Settings or MKR TO gt Search Config Markers are commonly used to determine peak values i e maximum or minimum val ues in the measured signal Configuration settings allow you to influence the peak search results ker Markers Marker Settings Search Settings Peaksearch SearchLimits Next Peak Mode Right Left Limit EN 0 0 Hz Exclude LO On Right Limit ES 26 5 GHz E en dB Threshold Li 120 0 dBm J Auto Max Peak Use Zoom Limits TOT o Auto Min Peak Search Limits Off Marker Usage search Mode for NEXtIPGAK EE 187 Peak EXGHEISIOU EE 187 SEC DT occi tert c Eee reconstruct ia Toce CEU E EE Dea EE Eun cola M Tad TE e ERN rie EE 187 L Search Limits E assem n aie dne dia o etel 187 Rd MI Li E OI 187 L Le 188 L Deactivating All Search Limits 0 s0cccssecsccceseceseseseescssteceeeneeenerenesees 188 Branch for Peak Seasrch niei iibri dere de eate re LED AEn eo Eod Po an Cav a E E EH 188 Search Mode for Next Peak Selects th
476. urement channels For more information on external generator control see chapter 5 4 5 Basics on Exter nal Generator Control on page 62 e Measurement ContglbaHofi 00 A EENEESOE ENEE SEENEN EES 251 e Interface Config ration uiecesuceccceese esee renean tup tnus a ken Inna bp n tnn arr bRn nnn zu apu nna 254 Source Galibraltol DEE 256 e Programming Example for External Generator Control 259 Measurement Configuration The following commands are required to activate external generator control and to con figure a calibration measurement with an external tracking generator SOURce EXTemalFREGUGnGy 2 2 en onna pua Leer ee eva EERSTEN DEO D ANRA 251 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency COUPling S TATe esee 252 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator eese 252 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator eese 253 SOURce EXTemal FREQuency OFFSetl 2 maroc dione et ire rates ae eee Papua 253 SOURce EXTemalPOWet BEVel 2 betty nee tto rt HER e ean esatta 253 el a NEEN KT 254 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet sse 254 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency Frequency This command defines a fixed source frequency for the external generator Parameters Frequency Source frequency of the external generator RST 1100050000 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements Example SOUR EXT FREQ 10MHz Manual operation See Man
477. urements is irrelevant Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 258 Selects the reflection method SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 257 Starts the sweep for short circuit calibration Calibrate Reflection Open Starts an open circuit reflection type measurement to determine a reference trace for calibration If both reflection type calibrations open circuit short circuit are carried out the refer ence trace is calculated by averaging the two measurements The order of the two cali bration measurements is irrelevant Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 258 Selects the reflection method SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 257 Starts the sweep for open circuit calibration Source Calibration Normalize Switches the normalization of measurement results on or off This function is only available if the memory contains a reference trace that is after a calibration has been performed For details on normalization see chapter 5 4 5 5 Normalization on page 69 Remote command SENSe CORRection STATe on page 258 Recall Restores the settings that were used during source calibration This can be useful if instrument settings were changed after calibration e g center frequency frequency deviation reference level etc Remote command SENSe CORRection RECall on page 258 Data Input and Output Settings Save As Trd Factor Uses the normalized measuremen
478. user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics 1 3 2 1 3 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation Convention Description Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board Notes on Screenshots When describing the functions of the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as
479. using the I Q Analyzer application and then per form analog demodulation on that data using the R amp S FSW AnalogDemodulation application if available As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values UO data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The UO data is stored in a format with the file extension iq tar For a detailed description see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual The import and export functions are available in the Save Recall menu which is dis played when you select the LI Save or EI Open icon in the toolbar see chap ter 6 2 Import Export Functions on page 97 Export only in MSRA mode In MSRA mode UO data can only be exported to other applications I Q data cannot be imported to the MSRA Master or any MSRA applications 5 6 5 6 1 Basics on FFT The I Q Analyzer measures the power of the signal input over time In order to convert the time domain signal to a frequency spectrum an FFT Fast Fourier Transformation is performed which converts a vector of input values into a discrete spectrum of fre quencies x y f FFT Hz Window Functions The Fourier transformation is not performed on the entire captured data in one step Only a limited number of samples is used to calculate an individual result Th
480. ut Settings Offset Unit Auto Level Full Scale Level Mode Value The input settings provided here are identical to those in the Input Source gt Analog Baseband tab see chapter 6 3 1 5 Analog Baseband Input Settings on page 116 For more information on the optional Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Reference Level E 149 L Shifting the Display Offset 149 Eenheete Een 150 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 150 Full Scale Level Mode Value enne nnne nnne 151 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R amp S FSW is adapted according to this value it is recom mended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Note that for input from the External Mixer R amp S FSW B21 the maximum reference level also depends on the conversion loss see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual for details Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel on page 279 Sh
481. ut is taken from the measurement described in chapter 10 11 1 I Q Analysis with Graphical Evaluation on page 370 Ji Activating the I Q Analyzer application RST Reset the instrument INST CRE IQ IQANALYZER Creates a new measurement channel named IQANALYZER INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode TRAC IQ SRAT 32MHZ Defines the sample rate TRAC IQ RLEN 1000 Sets the record length number of samples to capture to 1000 samples Programming Examples TRAC IQ BWID Queries the bandwidth of the resampling filter determined by the sample rate FORM DATA REAL 32 Formats the data as 32 byte real values TRAC IQ DATA FORM IQP Lists all I values first then all Q values in the trace results TRAC IQ AVER ON Defines averaging for the I Q trace TRAC IQ AVER COUN 10 Defines an average over 10 sweeps DISP TRAC1 MODE WRIT DISP TRAC2 MODE MAXH DISP TRAC3 MODE MINH Changes the trace modes OUTP DIQ ON OUTP DIQ CDEV Activates the digital baseband interface for output and queries the detected information of the connected instrument INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished The results are simultaneously sent to the output connector 10 11 6 Data Acquisition via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface This example demonstrates how to capture UO data via the optional Analog Baseband Interface using the I Q Analy
482. ut signal is assumed to be a complex baseband signal There is no need to equalize any IF filter or mix the signal into the complex baseband The analog hardware just has to ensure that the final UO data stored in the capture buffer has the correct sample rate for the application The analog baseband input signal is brought to the desired sample rate using a down sampling filter and fractional resampling No level compensation is necessary The resulting data can be processed by the selected application SO BWha 2 B 2 B 2 f DW Fig 5 12 Spectrum in complex baseband I jQ mode The complex spectrum of the input signal is displayed The center frequency does not have to be moved but it can be as long as the selected spectrum remains within the maximum analysis bandwidth see chapter 5 3 4 Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Analog Baseband signals on page 48 Processing Data From the Analog Baseband Interface Low IF mode I or Q In low IF mode the real signal from the selected input component I or Q is assumed to be a modulated carrier with a specific center frequency The signal is down conver ted to a selected center frequency low IF frequency using an NCO The center fre quency must be higher than 0 Hz so that no part of the negative mirrored spectrum lies within the analysis bandwidth The center frequency must be different to 0 Hz as in this case real baseband mode is assumed see Real baseband mode I or Q only
483. ver 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 323 SENSe AVERage n COUNt on page 330 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT After triggering starts the sweep and repeats it continuously until stopped This is the default setting While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly If the Sequencer is active in MSRT mode the Continuous Sweep function does not start data capturing it merely has an effect on trace averaging over multiple sequen ces In this case trace averaging is performed Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 320 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE After triggering starts the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count The measurement stops after th
484. void unintentional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 with an IF power trigger the drop out time defines the width of the robust width trigger By default itis setto 1 us For external triggers no drop out time is available when using the B2000 option For details see IF Power trigger on page 80 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 288 Trigger Offset Trigger Source Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep Trigger Settings offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for zero span e g UO Analyzer application and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretrigger max sweep timemax When using the optional Digital Baseband Interface the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See table 5 6 Tip To determine the trigger point in the sample for External or IF Power trigger source use the TRACe 10 TPISample command For the Time trigger source this function is not available Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 288 Coupling Trigger Source If the selected trigger source is IF Power or External CH3 you can configure the cou pling of the external trigger to the oscilloscope This setting is
485. wo different modes for the I Q Analyzer measurements are availa ble e A quick mode for pure data acquisition This mode is activated by default with the TRACe 10 STATe command The evaluation functions are not available however performance is slightly improved Amore sophisticated mode for acquisition and analysis This mode is activated when a new channel is opened for the UO Analyzer applica tion INST CRE NEW INST CRE REPL or by an additional command see TRACe IQ EVAL on page 220 Switching the data basis for measurement By default the UO Analyzer captures and processes UO data However the UO Ana lyzer application not Master in MSRA mode can also perform measurements on the captured UO data in the time and frequency domain In order to do so the I Q Analyzer performs an FFT sweep on the captured UO data providing power vs frequency results or uses the RBW filter to obtain power vs time zero span results This data is then used for the common frequency or time domain measurements In order to switch between these measurements you must select the data basis before performing a measurement For a description of remote commands required to perform measurements in the time and frequency domain see the R amp S FSW User Manual p HE Lat MODE m 215 INSTr ment CREate DUPLEicale rd rd i eo sedet recess 216 IS trumentGREatel NEW unie rh uy tt N Ia ex eqRu Eu X RRE RR 216 INS ThumentGR
486. x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See figure 10 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to the left Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 316 Configuring the Result Display LAY out WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix lt n gt determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used
487. ximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 400 MHz proportional up to maximum 320 MHz 400 MHz to 10 GHz 320 MHz MSRA master 400 MHz to 600 MHz Digital Baseband output If Digital Baseband output is active see Digital Baseband Output on page 143 the sample rate is restricted to 200 MHz max 160 MHz usable UO bandwidth Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input Usable UO bandwidth UO bandwidths for RF input MHz i i 320 Activated option B320 U320 ITT TTT EERE ARERR BRRSLORRERBRRRRR Output sample 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400 10000 rate fa MHz Fig 5 6 Relationship between maximum usable I Q bandwidth and output sample rate for active R amp S FSW B320 Table 5 3 Maximum record length with activated UO bandwidth extension option B320 or U320 Sample rate Maximum record length 100 Hz to 200 MHz 440 MSamples 200 MHz to 468 MHz 470 MSamples sample rate 1GHz 468 MHz to 10 GHz 220 MSamples MSRA master 468 MHz to 600 MHz for sample rates 200 MHz the UO Bandwidth Extension B320 is not used 5 1 1 9 Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated UO Bandwidth Extension Option B500 The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 provides measurement bandwidths up to 500 MHz Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input Digital Baseband output Digital Baseband output see Digital Baseband Output on page 143 is not available for an active R amp S FSW B500 bandwidth e
488. xtension D Real Time measurements and MSRT operating mode Real Time measurements and thus the entire MSRT operating mode are not availa ble if the R amp S FSW B500 bandwidth extension option is installed Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 100 Hz to 600 MHz proportional up to maximum 500 MHz 600 MHz to 10 GHz 500 MHz not MSRA master o Bandwidths between 480 MHz and 500 MHz Note the irregular behavior of the sample rate usable UO bandwidth relationship for bandwidths between 480 MHz and 500 MHz depending on which setting you change For compatibility reasons the relationship of Usable I Q bandwidth 0 8 Output sam ple rate is maintained for bandwidths 480 MHz However in order to make use of the maximum possible sample rate of 600 MHz at the maximum bandwidth of 500 MHz if you change the bandwidth between 480 MHz and 500 MHz the sample rate is adapted according to the relationship Output sample rate Usable LO bandwidth 0 833 On the other hand if you decrease the sample rate under 600 MHz the UO band width is adapted according to the regular relationship of Usable CO bandwidth 0 8 Output sample rate Processing Analog UO Data from RF Input UO bandwidths for RF input Usable UO bandwidth MHz Activated option 22 1 T TT B500 e Output sample 10 rate fout MHz Fig 5 7 Relationship between maximum usable I Q bandwidth and output sample rate for active R amp S FSW B500 MSR
489. xternal mixers are not supported in MSRA MSRT mode Radio Frequency i lte EE 99 Settings for Input from UO Data Eiles 102 External Mixer E 103 Digital VO Input Sets eoe rr Pert RE ue Crean Rx Pret aeu Pete er RO a aa eR 114 Analog Baseband Input Gettngs A 116 zione 118 External Generator Control Settings seite taa deoa cerrada eee 119 Settings for 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B20090 127 Radio Frequency Input Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt Radio Frequency or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Radio Frequency The default input source for the R amp S FSW is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector of the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source Data Input and Output Settings Input Source Radio Frequency Input Coupling Impedance Direct Path High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz YIG Preselector Input Connector Radio Frequency LEE 100 Input COUN AG EE 100 IPSCO EE 100 Bard E 101 Fligli Pass Filter WE E 101 VIGHPRESSIGCIOR EE 101 Input COMME CRO EE 102 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 224 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC This function is not available fo
490. y defined sample rate for the UO Analyzer press the MEAS CONFIG key and select Data Acquisition to change the Sample Rate setting Select the Frequency button to define the center frequency for the measurement Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an IQ Power trigger to start capturing data only when a specific power is exceeded Select the Display Config button and select up to six displays that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences Exit the SmartGrid mode Start a new sweep with the defined settings The captured data is written to the Digital Baseband Output connector continu ously How to Configure Data Acquisition via the Optional 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 The optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 allows you to analyze sig nals with a bandwidth of up to 2 GHz In order to process the data with this bandwidth an R amp S oscilloscope e g R amp S RTO is inserted in the measurement setup For details and prerequisites see chapter 5 4 7 Basics on the 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 Option on page 76 User Manual 1175 6449 02 19 200 How to Configure Data Acquisition via the Optional 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 Determine the oscilloscope s computer name or TCPIP address before activating the B2000 option Once activated manual operation on
491. yed The following information is provided for each connected probe Probe name e Serial number R amp S part number Type of probe Differential Single Ended For more information on using probes with an R amp S FSW see the R amp S FSW User Manual For general information on the R amp S9RTO probes see the device manuals Gommon Mode Offsel 2 tt reta e ote SEENEN 119 le gea Ire eee enar cea acne ud dace roe Pee pede eot eine c Ee ce paesi re sape Edo eene 119 Common Mode Offset Sets the common mode offset The setting is only available if a differential probe is connected to the R amp S FSW If the probe is disconnected the common mode offset of the probe is reset to 0 0 V For details see chapter 5 4 3 1 Common Mode Offset on page 52 Remote command SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup CMOFfset on page 248 Microbutton Action Active R amp S probes except for RT ZS10E have a configurable microbutton on the probe head By pressing this button you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe Select the action that you want to start from the probe Run single Starts one data acquisition No action Prevents unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the microbut ton Remote command SENSe PROBe p SETup MODE on page 249 External Generator Control Settings The External Generator settings are available in the Input dialog box if the R amp S FSW Extern
492. zer Data processilig uoi cob ate teen Len ee Ee oo 23 Errors Data acquisition cotone b nre cett Device cornectlOrnis eraot n aptis recreate rend Digital Baseband Interface External generator crsa tette i rrt ot eae o bo Evaluation methods Ee EE 313 Example Remote control of an external generator 259 Exclude LO REMOTE eiie ade dus dete bct Rd das 336 Exporting VQ data RE 85 95 98 203 381 385 VQ data remote retten 362 Peak list s Softkey External generator Activating Deactivating s sisien BASICS A M Calibration functions etate Calibration measurement settings E Channel bar information sssesssssss Connections 3 cune eese nente cras ia peu ea os eu Coupling frequencies EONS MR TET Generators supported neenon trt nette ttes Interface Ge Interface e E Normalizing Overloading Recalling calibration settings Reference level A Reference line Reference line position erret Reference line value seseessssesssssses Reference position oes Reference trace acte niet mussa arstin aaia Reference value ssssseeeeeeeee Reflection measurement Reflection open measurement 0c eee Reflection short measurement eee Remote control ds e CT Transducer factor aote cire Transmission measurement 2x T TEssynehlironization t
493. zer in a remote environment As an input signal a differ ential probe is assumed to be connected to the R amp S FSW ee Activating the I Q Analyzer application RST Reset the instrument INST CRE IQ IQANALYZER Creates a new measurement channel named IQANALYZER INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INP SEL AIQ Selects the analog baseband interface as the input source INP IQ TYPE I Only the signal on I input is analyzed I only mode INP IQ BAL ON Programming Examples Differential input signal INP IQ FULL AUTO OFF INP IQ FULL LEV 2V Peak voltage at connector is set manually to the maximum of 2V FREQ CENT 1MHz Shift center frequency to 1 MHz Low IF I a Configuring Data Acquisition RIG SOUR BBP RIG SEQ LEV BBP 20 si J E J mi Trigger on baseband power of 20 dBm RAC IQ SRAT 32MHZ et J Defines the sample rate RAC IQ RLEN 1000 S J Sets the record length number of samples to capture to 1000 samples RAC IQ BWID E J Queries the bandwidth of the resampling filter determined by the sample rate LAY ADD 1 RIGH FREQ Spectrum display in window 2 to the right of Magnitude results LAY ADD 1 BEL RIMAG Real I display in window 3 below Magnitude results TRAC IQ AVER ON Defines averaging for the magnitude trace of I component TRAC IQ AVER COUN 10 Defines an average over 10 sweeps DISP TRAC

R&S®FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S&reg;FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S®FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual